Enterasys Networks 6E2Xx Users Manual CH1

6H2xx to the manual b64eee24-c62a-29e4-3522-663573c5b8d4

: Enterasys-Networks Enterasys-Networks-6E2Xx-Users-Manual-366786 enterasys-networks-6e2xx-users-manual-366786 enterasys-networks pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 430

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Matrix E7 Series and
SmartSwitch 6000 Series Modules
(6H2xx, 6E2xx, 6H3xx, and 6G3xx)

Local Management User’s Guide

9033528-05

NOTICE
Enterasys Networks reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this
document and its web site without prior notice. The reader should in all cases consult Enterasys Networks to determine
whether any such changes have been made.
The hardware, firmware, or software described in this document is subject to change without notice.
IN NO EVENT SHALL ENTERASYS NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS)
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS DOCUMENT, WEB SITE, OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN
THEM, EVEN IF ENTERASYS NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN
OF, THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Enterasys Networks, Inc.
35 Industrial Way
Rochester, NH 03867
 2002 by Enterasys Networks, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
Order Number: 9033528-05 November 2002
LANVIEW is a registered trademark and ENTERASYS NETWORKS, NETSIGHT, SMARTSWITCH, MATRIX,
WEBVIEW, and any logos associated therewith, are trademarks of Enterasys Networks, Inc. in the United States and
other countries.
All other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.

ENTERASYS NETWORKS, INC.
PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENT
BEFORE OPENING OR UTILIZING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT,
CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
This document is an agreement (“Agreement”) between You, the end user, and Enterasys Networks, Inc. (“Enterasys”)
that sets forth your rights and obligations with respect to the Enterasys software program (“Program”) in the package.
The Program may be contained in firmware, chips or other media. UTILIZING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT, YOU
ARE AGREEING TO BECOME BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHICH INCLUDES THE
LICENSE AND THE LIMITATION OF WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, RETURN THE UNOPENED PRODUCT TO ENTERASYS OR
YOUR DEALER, IF ANY, WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS FOLLOWING THE DATE OF RECEIPT FOR A FULL
REFUND.
IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS ABOUT THIS AGREEMENT, CONTACT ENTERASYS NETWORKS
(603) 332-9400. Attn: Legal Department.
1. LICENSE. You have the right to use only the one (1) copy of the Program provided in this package subject to the
terms and conditions of this License Agreement.
You may not copy, reproduce or transmit any part of the Program except as permitted by the Copyright Act of the
United States or as authorized in writing by Enterasys.
2.

OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Program.

3. APPLICABLE LAW. This License Agreement shall be interpreted and governed under the laws and in the state
and federal courts of New Hampshire. You accept the personal jurisdiction and venue of the New Hampshire courts.
4. EXPORT REQUIREMENTS. You understand that Enterasys and its Affiliates are subject to regulation by
agencies of the U.S. Government, including the U.S. Department of Commerce, which prohibit export or diversion of
certain technical products to certain countries, unless a license to export the product is obtained from the U.S. Government
or an exception from obtaining such license may be relied upon by the exporting party.
If the Program is exported from the United States pursuant to the License Exception CIV under the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, You agree that You are a civil end user of the Program and agree that You will use the
Program for civil end uses only and not for military purposes.
If the Program is exported from the United States pursuant to the License Exception TSR under the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, in addition to the restriction on transfer set forth in Sections 1 or 2 of this Agreement, You
agree not to (i) reexport or release the Program, the source code for the Program or technology to a national of a country
in Country Groups D:1 or E:2 (Albania, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Bulgaria, Cambodia, Cuba, Estonia, Georgia,
Iraq, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Latvia, Libya, Lithuania, Moldova, North Korea, the People’s Republic of China,
Romania, Russia, Rwanda, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Ukraine, Uzbekistan, Vietnam, or such other countries as may be
designated by the United States Government), (ii) export to Country Groups D:1 or E:2 (as defined herein) the direct
product of the Program or the technology, if such foreign produced direct product is subject to national security controls
as identified on the U.S. Commerce Control List, or (iii) if the direct product of the technology is a complete plant or any
major component of a plant, export to Country Groups D:1 or E:2 the direct product of the plant or a major component
thereof, if such foreign produced direct product is subject to national security controls as identified on the U.S.
Commerce Control List or is subject to State Department controls under the U.S. Munitions List.

5. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The enclosed Product (i) was developed solely
at private expense; (ii) contains “restricted computer software” submitted with restricted rights in accordance with section
52.227-19 (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights Clause and its successors, and (iii) in
all respects is proprietary data belonging to Enterasys and/or its suppliers. For Department of Defense units, the Product
is considered commercial computer software in accordance with DFARS section 227.7202-3 and its successors, and use,
duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth herein.
6. EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY. Except as may be specifically provided by Enterasys in writing, Enterasys
makes no warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the Program (including its documentation and media).
ENTERASYS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, OTHER THAN THOSE SUPPLIED TO YOU BY
ENTERASYS IN WRITING, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO
THE PROGRAM, THE ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS, AND ANY ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE.
7. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL ENTERASYS OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR RELIANCE DAMAGES, OR OTHER LOSS)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS ENTERASYS PRODUCT, EVEN IF ENTERASYS HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR IN
THE DURATION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IN SOME INSTANCES, THE ABOVE
LIMITATION AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Contents
Figures ...........................................................................................................................................xii
Tables.............................................................................................................................................xv

ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Using This Guide...........................................................................................................xix
Structure of This Guide ..................................................................................................xx
Related Documents...................................................................................................... xxii
Document Conventions................................................................................................ xxii
Typographical and Keystroke Conventions................................................................. xxiii

1

INTRODUCTION
1.1

1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6

2

LOCAL MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
2.1

2.2
2.3

3

Overview ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1
The Management Agent ................................................................. 1-3
1.1.2
In-Band vs. Out-of-Band ................................................................. 1-3
Navigating Local Management Screens ......................................................... 1-3
Local Management Requirements .................................................................. 1-4
Local Management Screen Elements ............................................................. 1-4
Local Management Keyboard Conventions .................................................... 1-8
Getting Help .................................................................................................... 1-9

Management Terminal Setup.......................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1
Console Cable Connection ............................................................. 2-2
2.1.2
Management Terminal Setup Parameters ...................................... 2-3
Telnet Connections ......................................................................................... 2-4
Monitoring an Uninterruptible Power Supply................................................... 2-4

ACCESSING LOCAL MANAGEMENT
3.1

3.2
3.3

Navigating Local Management Screens ......................................................... 3-1
3.1.1
Selecting Local Management Menu Screen Items ......................... 3-4
3.1.2
Exiting Local Management Screens ............................................... 3-4
3.1.3
Using the NEXT and PREVIOUS Commands ................................ 3-5
3.1.4
Using the CLEAR COUNTERS Command ..................................... 3-5
Password Screen ............................................................................................ 3-6
Main Menu Screen .......................................................................................... 3-8
Contents

v

3.4
3.5
3.6

3.7
3.8
3.9

3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13

3.14
3.15

4

CHASSIS MENU SCREENS
4.1
4.2

4.3
4.4
4.5

vi

Module Selection Screen ................................................................................ 3-9
3.4.1
Selecting a Module ....................................................................... 3-11
Module Menu Screen .................................................................................... 3-12
Overview of Security Methods ...................................................................... 3-15
3.6.1
Host Access Control Authentication (HACA) ................................ 3-16
3.6.2
802.1X Port Based Network Access Control ................................ 3-19
3.6.2.1 Definitions of Terms and Abbreviations......................... 3-19
3.6.2.2 802.1X Security Overview ............................................. 3-20
3.6.3
MAC Authentication Overview ...................................................... 3-21
3.6.3.1 Authentication Method Selection................................... 3-21
3.6.3.2 Authentication Method Sequence ................................. 3-21
3.6.3.3 Concurrent Operation of 802.1X and MAC Authentication...
3-22
3.6.4
MAC Authentication Control.......................................................... 3-25
Security Menu Screen................................................................................... 3-26
Passwords Screen ........................................................................................ 3-29
3.8.1
Setting the Module Login Password ............................................. 3-31
Radius Configuration Screen ........................................................................ 3-31
3.9.1
Setting the Last Resort Authentication.......................................... 3-34
3.9.2
Setting the Local and Remote Servers ......................................... 3-34
Name Services Configuration Screen ........................................................... 3-35
System Authentication Configuration Screen................................................ 3-37
EAP (Port) Configuration Screen .................................................................. 3-39
EAP Statistics Menu Screen ......................................................................... 3-44
3.13.1
EAP Session Statistics Screen ..................................................... 3-46
3.13.2
EAP Authenticator Statistics Screen............................................. 3-48
3.13.3
EAP Diagnostic Statistics Screen ................................................. 3-51
MAC Port Configuration Screen.................................................................... 3-54
MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen.......................................................... 3-56

Contents

Chassis Menu Screen ..................................................................................... 4-2
Chassis Configuration Screen......................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1
Setting the IP Address .................................................................... 4-6
4.2.2
Setting the Subnet Mask................................................................. 4-7
4.2.3
Setting the Chassis Date ................................................................ 4-7
4.2.4
Setting the Chassis Time ................................................................ 4-8
4.2.5
Setting a New Screen Refresh Time............................................... 4-8
4.2.6
Setting the Screen Lockout Time.................................................... 4-9
SNMP Configuration Menu Screen ............................................................... 4-10
SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen ......................................... 4-12
4.4.1
Establishing Community Names ................................................... 4-13
SNMP Traps Configuration Screen............................................................... 4-14
4.5.1
Configuring the Trap Table ........................................................... 4-16

4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9

5

Chassis Environmental Information Screen .................................................. 4-16
Redirect Configuration Menu Screen (Chassis)............................................ 4-18
Port Redirect Configuration Screen .............................................................. 4-19
4.8.1
Changing Source and Destination Ports....................................... 4-22
VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen............................................................ 4-23
4.9.1
Changing Source VLAN and Destination Ports ............................ 4-26

MODULE CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS
5.1
5.2

5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6

5.7
5.8

Module Configuration Menu Screen................................................................ 5-2
General Configuration Screen......................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1
Setting the IP Address .................................................................... 5-8
5.2.2
Setting the Subnet Mask................................................................. 5-9
5.2.3
Setting the Default Gateway ......................................................... 5-10
5.2.4
Setting the TFTP Gateway IP Address ......................................... 5-11
5.2.5
Setting the Module Name ............................................................. 5-12
5.2.6
Setting the Module Date ............................................................... 5-12
5.2.7
Setting the Module Time ............................................................... 5-13
5.2.8
Entering a New Screen Refresh Time .......................................... 5-13
5.2.9
Setting the Screen Lockout Time.................................................. 5-14
5.2.10
Configuring the COM Port............................................................. 5-14
5.2.10.1 Changing the COM Port Application ............................. 5-16
5.2.11
Clearing NVRAM........................................................................... 5-16
5.2.12
Enabling/Disabling IP Fragmentation............................................ 5-17
SNMP Configuration Menu Screen ............................................................... 5-18
SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen ......................................... 5-20
5.4.1
Establishing Community Names ................................................... 5-22
SNMP Traps Configuration Screen............................................................... 5-23
5.5.1
Configuring the Trap Table ........................................................... 5-24
Access Control List Screen ........................................................................... 5-25
5.6.1
Entering IP Addresses .................................................................. 5-28
5.6.2
Enable/Disable ACL...................................................................... 5-29
System Resources Information Screen......................................................... 5-30
5.7.1
Setting the Reset Peak Switch Utilization ..................................... 5-31
FLASH Download Configuration Screen....................................................... 5-32
5.8.1
Image File Download Using Runtime............................................ 5-36
5.8.2
Configuration File Download Using TFTP..................................... 5-37
5.8.3
Configuration File Upload Using TFTP ......................................... 5-38

Contents

vii

6

PORT CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS
6.1
6.2
6.3

6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8

6.9

7

802.1 CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4

7.5

viii

Port Configuration Menu Screen..................................................................... 6-2
Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen......................................................... 6-4
Ethernet Port Configuration Screen ................................................................ 6-8
6.3.1
Selecting Field Settings ................................................................ 6-12
6.3.2
Setting the Advertised Ability ........................................................ 6-12
HSIM/VHSIM Configuration Screen .............................................................. 6-13
Redirect Configuration Menu Screen ............................................................ 6-14
Port Redirect Configuration Screen .............................................................. 6-16
6.6.1
Changing Source and Destination Ports....................................... 6-19
VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen............................................................ 6-20
6.7.1
Changing Source VLAN and Destination Ports ............................ 6-23
Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen) ............................... 6-24
6.8.1
802.3ad Port Screen .................................................................... 6-29
6.8.1.1 802.3ad Port Details Screen ......................................... 6-31
6.8.1.2 802.3ad Port Statistics Screen ...................................... 6-37
6.8.2
802.3ad Aggregator Screen.......................................................... 6-40
6.8.2.1 802.3ad Aggregator Details Screen .............................. 6-42
6.8.3
802.3ad System Screen................................................................ 6-44
Broadcast Suppression Configuration Screen .............................................. 6-46
6.9.1
Setting the Threshold.................................................................... 6-47
6.9.2
Setting the Reset Peak ................................................................. 6-48

Contents

802.1 Configuration Menu Screen .................................................................. 7-2
Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen.................................................... 7-4
Spanning Tree Configuration Screen.............................................................. 7-6
7.3.1
Configuring a VLAN Spanning Tree................................................ 7-9
Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen .................................................... 7-10
7.4.1
Enabling/Disabling the Default Spanning Tree Ports.................... 7-12
7.4.2
Viewing Status of Spanning Tree Ports ........................................ 7-12
PVST Port Configuration Screen .................................................................. 7-12

8

802.1Q VLAN CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS
8.1
8.2
8.3

8.4

8.5
8.6
8.7

8.8

8.9

9

Summary of VLAN Local Management........................................................... 8-2
8.1.1
Preparing for VLAN Configuration .................................................. 8-2
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen ..................................................... 8-3
Static VLAN Configuration Screen .................................................................. 8-6
8.3.1
Creating a Static VLAN ................................................................... 8-8
8.3.2
Displaying the Current Static VLAN Port Egress List...................... 8-8
8.3.3
Renaming a Static VLAN ................................................................ 8-9
8.3.4
Deleting a Static VLAN ................................................................... 8-9
8.3.5
Paging Through the VLAN List ..................................................... 8-10
Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen.................................................... 8-10
8.4.1
Setting Egress Types on Ports ..................................................... 8-12
8.4.2
Displaying the Next Group of Ports............................................... 8-13
Current VLAN Configuration Screen ............................................................. 8-14
Current VLAN Egress Configuration Screen................................................. 8-16
VLAN Port Configuration Screen .................................................................. 8-17
8.7.1
Changing the Port Mode ............................................................... 8-20
8.7.2
Configuring the VLAN Ports.......................................................... 8-21
VLAN Classification Configuration Screen.................................................... 8-21
8.8.1
Classification Precedence Rules .................................................. 8-29
8.8.2
Displaying the Current Classification Rule Assignments .............. 8-32
8.8.3
Assigning a Classification to a VID ............................................... 8-33
8.8.4
Deleting Line Items ....................................................................... 8-34
Protocol Port Configuration Screen............................................................... 8-35
8.9.1
Assigning Ports to a VID/Classification......................................... 8-37

802.1p CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS
9.1
9.2

9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6

802.1p Configuration Menu Screen ................................................................ 9-2
Port Priority Configuration Screen................................................................... 9-4
9.2.1
Setting Switch Port Priority Port-by-Port ......................................... 9-6
9.2.2
Setting Switch Port Priority on All Ports .......................................... 9-7
Traffic Class Information Screen..................................................................... 9-7
Traffic Class Configuration Screen ............................................................... 9-10
9.4.1
Assigning the Traffic Class to Port Priority.................................... 9-11
Transmit Queues Configuration Screen........................................................ 9-12
9.5.1
Setting the Current Queueing Mode ............................................. 9-15
Priority Classification Configuration Screen .................................................. 9-16
9.6.1
Classification Precedence Rules .................................................. 9-26
9.6.2
About the IP TOS Rewrite Feature ............................................... 9-29
9.6.3
Displaying the Current PID/Classification Assignments................ 9-30
9.6.4
Assigning a Classification to a PID ............................................... 9-30
9.6.5
Deleting PID/Classification/Description Line Items ....................... 9-31

Contents

ix

9.7

9.8

10

LAYER 3 EXTENSIONS MENU SCREENS
10.1
10.2

11

11.4
11.5

Network Tools ............................................................................................... 12-1
Built-in Commands........................................................................................ 12-4
Example, Effects of Aging Time on Dynamic Egress.................................. 12-37
Example, Using Dynamic Egress to Control Traffic .................................... 12-37
Special Commands ..................................................................................... 12-38

VLAN OPERATION AND NETWORK APPLICATIONS
13.1
13.2

13.3
13.4
13.5

x

Module Statistics Menu Screen..................................................................... 11-2
Switch Statistics Screen................................................................................ 11-4
Interface Statistics Screen ............................................................................ 11-6
11.3.1
Displaying Interface Statistics ....................................................... 11-9
RMON Statistics Screen ............................................................................. 11-10
11.4.1
Displaying RMON Statistics ........................................................ 11-13
Chassis Environmental Statistics
Configuration Screen .................................................................................. 11-14

NETWORK TOOLS SCREENS
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5

13

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screen ................................................................. 10-2
IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen................................................................ 10-3
10.2.1
IGMP/VLAN Configuration Procedure .......................................... 10-7

MODULE STATISTICS MENU SCREENS
11.1
11.2
11.3

12

Protocol Port Configuration Screen............................................................... 9-32
9.7.1
Assigning Ports to a PID/Classification......................................... 9-34
9.7.2
Example, Prioritizing Traffic According to Classification Rule....... 9-35
9.7.2.1 Solving the Problem ...................................................... 9-35
Rate Limiting Configuration Screen .............................................................. 9-37
9.8.1
Configuring a Port ......................................................................... 9-41
9.8.2
Changing/Deleting Port Line Items ............................................... 9-43
9.8.3
More About Rate Limiting ............................................................. 9-44

Contents

Defining VLANs............................................................................................. 13-2
Types of VLANs ............................................................................................ 13-4
13.2.1
802.1Q VLANs .............................................................................. 13-4
13.2.2
Other VLAN Strategies ................................................................. 13-4
Benefits and Restrictions .............................................................................. 13-4
VLAN Terms.................................................................................................. 13-5
VLAN Operation ............................................................................................ 13-7
13.5.1
Description .................................................................................... 13-7
13.5.2
VLAN Components ....................................................................... 13-7

13.6

13.7

13.8

13.9
13.10
13.11
13.12

13.13

13.14
13.15
13.16
13.17

A

GENERIC ATTRIBUTE REGISTRATION PROTOCOL (GARP)
A.1
A.2

B

Configuration Process................................................................................... 13-8
13.6.1
Defining a VLAN ........................................................................... 13-8
13.6.2
Classifying Frames to a VLAN ...................................................... 13-8
13.6.3
Customizing the VLAN Forwarding List ........................................ 13-8
VLAN Switch Operation ................................................................................ 13-9
13.7.1
Receiving Frames from VLAN Ports ........................................... 13-10
13.7.2
Forwarding Decisions ................................................................. 13-10
13.7.2.1 Broadcasts, Multicasts, and Unknown Unicasts.......... 13-10
13.7.2.2 Known Unicasts........................................................... 13-11
VLAN Configuration .................................................................................... 13-11
13.8.1
Managing the Switch................................................................... 13-11
13.8.2
Switch Without VLANs ................................................................ 13-11
13.8.3
Switch with VLANs...................................................................... 13-12
Summary of VLAN Local Management....................................................... 13-14
13.9.1
Preparing for VLAN Configuration .............................................. 13-15
Quick VLAN Walkthrough ........................................................................... 13-16
Examples .................................................................................................... 13-21
Example 1, Single Switch Operation........................................................... 13-22
13.12.1 Solving the Problem.................................................................... 13-22
13.12.2 Frame Handling .......................................................................... 13-24
Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches ............................................. 13-24
13.13.1 Solving the Problem.................................................................... 13-26
13.13.2 Frame Handling .......................................................................... 13-29
Example 3, Filtering Traffic According to a Layer 4 Classification Rule...... 13-32
13.14.1 Solving the Problem.................................................................... 13-32
Example 4, Securing Sensitive Information According to Subnet ............... 13-33
13.15.1 Solving the Problem.................................................................... 13-34
Example 5, Using Dynamic Egress to Control Traffic ................................. 13-34
Example 6, Locking a MAC Address to a Port Using Classification Rules . 13-36
13.17.1 Solving the Problem.................................................................... 13-36

Operation ........................................................................................................A-1
How It Works...................................................................................................A-2

ABOUT IGMP
B.1
B.2
B.3

IGMP Overview ...............................................................................................B-1
Supported Features and Functions.................................................................B-2
Detecting Multicast Routers ............................................................................B-3

INDEX
Contents

xi

Figures
Figure
1-1
2-1
2-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5

xii

Page
Example of a Local Management Screen ....................................................................... 1-5
Management Terminal Connection................................................................................. 2-2
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Connection ........................................................... 2-5
802.1Q Switching Mode, Chassis, LM Screen Hierarchy (Page 1 of 3) ......................... 3-2
802.1Q Switching Mode, Module, LM Screen Hierarchy (Page 2 of 3) .......................... 3-3
802.1Q Switching Mode, Chassis, LM Screen Hierarchy (Page 3 of 3) ......................... 3-4
Local Management Chassis/Module Password Screen.................................................. 3-7
Main Menu Screen.......................................................................................................... 3-8
Module Selection Screen .............................................................................................. 3-10
Module Menu Screen.................................................................................................... 3-12
Security Menu Screen................................................................................................... 3-27
Module Login Passwords Screen ................................................................................. 3-29
Radius Configuration Screen ........................................................................................ 3-32
Name Services Configuration Screen........................................................................... 3-35
System Authentication Configuration Screen ............................................................... 3-37
EAP Port Configuration Screen .................................................................................... 3-39
EAP Statistics Menu Screen ......................................................................................... 3-44
EAP Session Statistics Screen ..................................................................................... 3-46
EAP Authenticator Statistics Screen............................................................................. 3-49
EAP Diagnostic Statistics Screen ................................................................................. 3-51
MAC Port Configuration Screen.................................................................................... 3-55
MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen ......................................................................... 3-57
Chassis Menu Screen..................................................................................................... 4-2
Chassis Configuration Screen ........................................................................................ 4-4
SNMP Configuration Menu Screen............................................................................... 4-10
SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen ......................................................... 4-12
SNMP Traps Configuration Screen............................................................................... 4-15
Chassis Environmental Information Screen.................................................................. 4-17
Redirect Configuration Menu Screen............................................................................ 4-18
Port Redirect Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 4-20
VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen ........................................................................... 4-24
Module Configuration Menu Screen ............................................................................... 5-2
General Configuration Screen ........................................................................................ 5-4
Configuration Warning Screen, IP Address .................................................................... 5-9
Configuration Warning Screen, Subnet Mask............................................................... 5-10
COM Port Warning........................................................................................................ 5-15

Figures

Figure
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6

Page
Clear NVRAM Warning ................................................................................................. 5-17
SNMP Configuration Menu Screen ............................................................................... 5-19
SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen.......................................................... 5-21
SNMP Traps Configuration Screen ............................................................................... 5-23
Access Control List Screen ........................................................................................... 5-26
System Resources Information Screen......................................................................... 5-30
Flash Download Configuration Screen.......................................................................... 5-33
Port Configuration Menu Screen (in Agg Mode, HUNTGROUP) .................................... 6-2
Port Configuration Menu Screen (in Agg Mode, IEEE8023ad) ....................................... 6-3
Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen ......................................................................... 6-5
Ethernet Port Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 6-8
Redirect Configuration Menu Screen ............................................................................ 6-15
Port Redirect Configuration Screen............................................................................... 6-17
VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen............................................................................ 6-21
802.3ad Main Menu Screen .......................................................................................... 6-28
802.3ad Port Screen ..................................................................................................... 6-30
802.3ad Port Details Screen ......................................................................................... 6-32
802.3ad Port Statistics Screen ...................................................................................... 6-37
802.3ad Aggregator Screen .......................................................................................... 6-40
802.3ad Aggregator Details Screen .............................................................................. 6-42
802.3ad System Screen ................................................................................................ 6-44
Broadcast Suppression Configuration Screen .............................................................. 6-46
802.1 Configuration Menu Screen................................................................................... 7-2
Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen .................................................................... 7-5
Spanning Tree Configuration Screen .............................................................................. 7-7
Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen .................................................................... 7-10
PVST Port Configuration Screen................................................................................... 7-13
802.1Q VLAN Screen Hierarchy ..................................................................................... 8-2
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen ..................................................................... 8-4
Static VLAN Configuration Screen .................................................................................. 8-6
Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen .................................................................... 8-11
Current VLAN Configuration Screen ............................................................................. 8-14
Current VLAN Egress Configuration Screen ................................................................. 8-16
VLAN Port Configuration Screen................................................................................... 8-18
VLAN Classification Configuration Screen .................................................................... 8-22
Protocol Port Configuration Screen............................................................................... 8-36
802.1p Configuration Menu Screen................................................................................. 9-2
Port Priority Configuration Screen................................................................................... 9-5
Traffic Class Information Screen ..................................................................................... 9-8
Traffic Class Configuration Screen................................................................................ 9-10
Transmit Queues Configuration Screen ........................................................................ 9-13
Priority Classification Configuration Screen .................................................................. 9-17

Figures

xiii

Figure

Page

9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
10-1
10-2
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
12-1
12-2
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
13-10
13-11
13-12
13-13
13-14
13-15
13-16
13-17
13-18
13-19
A-1

Datagram, Layer 2 and Layer 3 .....................................................................................9-29
Protocol Port Configuration Screen ...............................................................................9-33
Prioritizing Network Traffic According to Classification Rule .........................................9-35
Rate Limiting Configuration Screen ...............................................................................9-38
Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screen..................................................................................10-2
IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen ................................................................................10-4
Module Statistics Menu Screen .....................................................................................11-3
Switch Statistics Screen ................................................................................................11-5
Interface Statistics Screen .............................................................................................11-7
RMON Statistics Screen ..............................................................................................11-10
Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration Screen..............................................11-14
Network Tools Help Screen ...........................................................................................12-2
Example, Dynamic Egress Application ........................................................................12-37
Example of a VLAN .......................................................................................................13-3
View from Inside the Switch...........................................................................................13-9
Switch Management with Only Default VLAN..............................................................13-12
Switch Management with VLANs.................................................................................13-13
802.1Q VLAN Screen Hierarchy..................................................................................13-15
Walkthrough Stage One, Static VLAN Configuration Screen ......................................13-17
Walkthrough Stage Two, Port 3 Egress Setting ..........................................................13-18
Walkthrough Stage Three, Port 10 Egress Setting......................................................13-19
Walkthrough Stage Four, VLAN Port Configuration ....................................................13-21
Example 1, Single Switch Operation ...........................................................................13-22
Switch Configured for VLANs ......................................................................................13-23
Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches..............................................................13-25
Bridge 1 Broadcasts Frames .......................................................................................13-29
Transmitting to Switch 4 ..............................................................................................13-30
Transmitting to Bridge 4...............................................................................................13-31
Example 5, Filtering Traffic According to a Classification............................................13-32
Example 6, Securing Traffic to One Subnet ................................................................13-33
Example 7, Dynamic Egress Application .....................................................................13-35
Locking Ports According to Classification Rule ...........................................................13-36
Example of VLAN Propagation via GVRP ...................................................................... A-2

xiv

Figures

Tables
Table
1-1
1-2
2-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8

Page
Event Messages ........................................................................................................... 1-6
Keyboard Conventions ................................................................................................. 1-8
VT Terminal Setup........................................................................................................ 2-3
Main Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions................................................................. 3-9
Module Selection Screen Field Descriptions .............................................................. 3-11
Module Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions........................................................... 3-13
Authentication Terms and Abbreviations .................................................................... 3-19
MAC / 802.1X Precedence States .............................................................................. 3-23
Security Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions ......................................................... 3-27
Module Login Passwords Screen Field Descriptions ................................................. 3-30
Radius Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ........................................................ 3-32
Name Services Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ........................................... 3-36
System Authentication Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ............................... 3-38
EAP Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions .................................................... 3-40
EAP Statistics Menu Screen Descriptions .................................................................. 3-45
EAP Session Statistics Screen Field Descriptions ..................................................... 3-47
EAP Authenticator Statistics Screen Field Descriptions ............................................. 3-49
EAP Diagnostic Statistics Screen Field Descriptions ................................................. 3-52
MAC Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions.................................................... 3-55
MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ......................................... 3-57
Chassis Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions............................................................ 4-3
Chassis Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ........................................................ 4-5
SNMP Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions...................................... 4-11
SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ......................... 4-13
SNMP Traps Configuration Screen Field Descriptions............................................... 4-15
Chassis Environmental Information Screen Field Descriptions .................................. 4-17
Redirect Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions................................... 4-19
Port Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions .............................................. 4-20
VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ........................................... 4-24
Module Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions ...................................... 5-3
General Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ........................................................ 5-5
COM Port Application Settings ................................................................................... 5-16
SNMP Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions...................................... 5-19
SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ......................... 5-21
SNMP Traps Configuration Screen Field Descriptions............................................... 5-24
Access Control List Screen Field Descriptions ........................................................... 5-27
System Resources Information Screen Field Descriptions ........................................ 5-31

Tables

xv

Table

Page

5-9
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
10-1
10-2

Flash Download Configuration Screen Field Descriptions..........................................5-34
Port Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions ...........................................6-3
Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ........................................6-5
Ethernet Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ................................................6-9
Redirect Configuration Menu Screen Field Menu Item Descriptions ..........................6-15
Port Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions...............................................6-18
VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ............................................6-22
802.3ad Main Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions .................................................6-29
802.3ad Port Screen Field Descriptions .....................................................................6-30
802.3ad Port Details Screen Field Descriptions .........................................................6-32
802.3ad Port Statistics Screen Field Descriptions ......................................................6-38
802.3ad Aggregator Screen Field Descriptions ..........................................................6-41
802.3ad Aggregator Details Screen Field Descriptions ..............................................6-43
802.3ad System Screen Field Descriptions ................................................................6-45
Broadcast Suppression Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ..............................6-47
802.1 Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions .........................................7-3
Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions ...........................7-5
Spanning Tree Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ..............................................7-7
Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ....................................7-11
PVST Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions...................................................7-13
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions ............................8-4
Static VLAN Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ..................................................8-7
Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ....................................8-11
Current VLAN Configuration Screen Field Descriptions .............................................8-15
Current VLAN Egress Configuration Screen Field Descriptions .................................8-17
VLAN Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions...................................................8-19
VLAN Classification Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ....................................8-23
Classification List ........................................................................................................8-24
Classification Precedence...........................................................................................8-30
Protocol Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ...............................................8-36
802.1p Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions .......................................9-3
Port Priority Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ...................................................9-6
Traffic Class Information Screen Field Descriptions .....................................................9-9
Traffic Class Configuration Screen Field Descriptions................................................9-11
Transmit Queues Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ........................................9-14
Priority Classification Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ..................................9-17
Classification List ........................................................................................................9-19
Classification Precedence...........................................................................................9-27
Protocol Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ...............................................9-33
Rate Limiting Configuration Screen Field Descriptions...............................................9-38
Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions ........................................10-3
IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ................................................10-5

xvi

Tables

Table

Page

11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
12-1
12-2
13-1

Module Statistics Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions ........................................... 11-3
Switch Statistics Screen Field Descriptions................................................................ 11-5
Interface Statistics Screen Field Descriptions ............................................................ 11-7
RMON Statistics Screen Field Descriptions ............................................................ 11-11
Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration Screen Field Descriptions ............. 11-15
Built-in Commands ..................................................................................................... 12-3
Path Cost Parameter Values .................................................................................... 12-31
VLAN Terms and Definitions ...................................................................................... 13-5

Tables

xvii

About This Guide
Welcome to the Enterasys Networks Matrix E7 Series and SmartSwitch 6000 Series Modules
(6H2xx, 6E2xx, 6H3xx and 6G3xx) Local Managment User’s Guide. This manual explains how
to access and use the Local Management screens to monitor and manage the switch modules, the
attached segments, and the SmartSwitch 6C105 or Matrix E7 6C107 chassis.
When a mix of 6H2xx, 6E2xx, 6H3xx, and 6G3xx modules are installed in the 6C107 chassis, you
must follow the module installation rules provided in the Matrix E7 Chassis Overview and Setup
Guide for proper operation.

Important Notices
Depending on the firmware version used in the switch module, some features described in this
document may not be supported. Refer to the Release Notes shipped with the switch module to
determine which features are supported.
There are restrictions on the version of firmware required for 6H302-48 modules with a serial
number starting with 3655xxxxxx. The serial number is visible on the top ejector tab of the switch,
or by querying the PIC MIB. For firmware in the 5.x track, version 5.03.05 or higher must be used
on 6H302-48 modules with a serial number starting with 3655. For the 4.x firmware track, 4.08.41
or higher must be used on 6H302-48 modules with a serial number starting with 3655.

USING THIS GUIDE
A general working knowledge of basic network operations and an understanding of management
applications is helpful prior to using Enterasys Networks Local Management.
This manual describes how to do the following:

• Access the Local Management application
• Identify and operate the types of fields used by Local Management
• Navigate through Local Management fields and menus
• Use Local Management screens to perform management operations
• Establish and manage Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)

About This Guide

xix

Structure of This Guide

STRUCTURE OF THIS GUIDE
The guide is organized as follows:
Chapter 1, Introduction, provides an overview of the tasks that may be accomplished using Local
Management (LM), and an introduction to LM screen navigation, in-band and out-of-band
network management, screen elements, and LM keyboard conventions.
Chapter 2, Local Management Requirements, provides the setup requirements for accessing
Local Management, the instructions to configure and connect a management terminal to the
SmartSwitch, and the instructions for connecting the SmartSwitch to an Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS) to monitor the UPS power status.
Chapter 3, Accessing Local Management, describes how to use the Main Menu screen to select
either the Chassis Menu screen or the Module Selection screen. The Chassis Menu screen is the
access point to the set of Local Management screens for the chassis. The Module Selection screen
is used to select the module to be configured and its Module Menu screen. The Module Menu
screen is the access point to the set of Local Management screens for the selected module and the
Module Login Password screen. The Security screens are also described in this chapter.
Chapter 4, Chassis Menu Screens, describes the Chassis Menu screen and the screens that can be
selected to configure chassis operation. These screens are used to configure the operating
parameters for the chassis, assign community names, and set SNMP traps; and obtain the operating
status of the chassis power supplies, power supply redundancy, and chassis fan tray. This screen
also provides access to screens to configure the port redirect and VLAN redirect functions.
NOTE: If you are installing modules into a seven-slot 6C107 chassis, there are
installation rules that must be followed to install 6H202, 6H203, 6H253, 6H258, 6H259,
6H262, 6E233, and 6E253 modules along with 6H3xx and 6G3xx modules in the same
chassis. Otherwise, the system will not operate properly.

Chapter 5, Module Configuration Menu Screens, describes the Module Configuration Menu
screen and the screens that can be selected from it. These screens are used to control access to the
switch module by assigning community names, configure the switch module to send SNMP trap
messages to multiple network management stations, limit access according to an Access Control
List (ACL) for additional security, access system resource information, download a new firmware
image to the switch module, provide access to menu screens to configure ports, and configure the
switch module for 802.1, 802.1Q VLAN, and layer 3 operations.
Chapter 6, Port Configuration Menu Screens, describes how to use the screens to configure the
ports for various operations, such as for Ethernet Interface, HSIM/VHSIM, port and VLAN
redirect, SmartTrunk, and broadcast suppression configuration.

xx

About This Guide

Structure of This Guide

Chapter 7, 802.1 Configuration Menu Screens, describes how to access the Spanning Tree
Configuration Menu, 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu, and 802.1p Configuration Menu,
screens. This chapter also introduces and describes how to use the Spanning Tree screens to create
a separate Spanning Tree topology for each VLAN configured in the module.
Chapter 8, 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens, describes how to use the screens to
create static VLANs, select the mode of operation for each port, filter frames according to VLAN,
establish VLAN forwarding (Egress) lists, route frames according to VLAN ID, display the
current ports and port types associated with a VLAN and protocol, and configure ports on the
switch as GVRP-aware ports. VLAN classification and classification rules are also discussed.
Chapter 9, 802.1p Configuration Menu Screens, describes how to use the screens to set the
transmit priority of each port, display the current traffic class mapping-to-priority of each port, set
ports to either transmit frames according to selected priority transmit queues or percentage of port
transmission capacity for each queue, assign transmit priorities according to protocol types, and
configure a rate limit for a given port and list of priorities.
Chapter 10, Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens, introduces and describes how to enable or
disable IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol, RFC 2236) on selected VLANs, or globally
on all VLANs that are available.
Chapter 11, Module Statistics Menu Screens, introduces and describes how to use the statistics
screens to gather statistics about the switch, interfaces, RMON, and HSIM/VHSIM and, if the
device is a repeater, repeater statistics.
Chapter 12, Network Tools Screens, describes how to access and use the Network Tool screens.
This chapter also includes examples for each command.
Chapter 13, VLAN Operation and Network Applications, introduces VLANs, describes how
they operate, and how to configure them using the Local Management screens described in
Chapter 8. Examples are also provided to show how VLANs are configured to solve a problem and
how the VLAN frames travel through the network.
Appendix A, Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP), describes the switch operation
when its ports are configured to operate under the Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
application – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).
NOTE: There is a global setting for GVRP that is enabled by default. However, this
setting is only accessible through a Management Information Base (MIB).

Appendix B, About IGMP, introduces the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), its
features and functions, and describes how it detects multicast routers.

About This Guide

xxi

Related Documents

RELATED DOCUMENTS
The following Enterasys Networks documents may help to set up, control, and manage the switch
module:

• 6C105 SmartSwitch 6000 Overview and Setup Guide
• Matrix E7 Chassis Overview and Setup Guide
• SmartTrunk User’s Guide
• WAN Series Local Management User’s Guide
Documents associated with the optional HSIM and VHSIM interface modules, module installation
user’s guides, and the manuals listed above, can be obtained from the World Wide Web in Adobe
Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF) at the following web site:
http://www.enterasys.com

DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS
The guide uses the following conventions:
NOTE: Calls the reader’s attention to any item of information that may be of special
importance.

TIP: Conveys helpful hints concerning procedures or actions.

CAUTION: Contains information essential to avoid damage to the equipment.

xxii

About This Guide

Typographical and Keystroke Conventions

TYPOGRAPHICAL AND KEYSTROKE CONVENTIONS
bold type

Bold type can denote either a user input or a highlighted screen selection.

RETURN

Indicates either the ENTER or RETURN key, depending on your keyboard.

ESC

Indicates the keyboard Escape key.

SPACE bar

Indicates the keyboard space bar key.

BACKSPACE

Indicates the keyboard backspace key.

arrow keys

Refers to the four keyboard arrow keys.

[-]

Indicates the keyboard – key.

DEL

Indicates the keyboard delete key.

italic type

Italic type indicates complete document titles.

n.nn

A period in numerals signals the decimal point indicator (e.g., 1.75 equals
one and three fourths). Or, periods used in numerals signal the decimal point
in Dotted Decimal Notation (DDN) (e.g., 000.000.000.000 in an IP address).

x

A lowercase italic x indicates the generic use of a letter (e.g., xxx indicates
any combination of three alphabetic characters).

n

A lowercase italic n indicates the generic use of a number (e.g., 19nn
indicates a four-digit number in which the last two digits are unknown).

[]

In the Local Management screens, the square brackets indicate that a value
may be selected. In the format descriptions in the Network Tools section,
required arguments are enclosed in square brackets, [ ].

<>

In the format descriptions in the Network Tools section, optional arguments
are enclosed in angle brackets, < >.

About This Guide

xxiii

1
Introduction
This chapter provides an overview of the tasks that may be accomplished using Local Management
(LM), and an introduction to LM screen navigation, in-band and out-of-band network
management, screen elements, and LM keyboard conventions.

Important Notices
Depending on the firmware version used in the switch module, some features described in this
document may not be supported. Refer to the Release Notes shipped with the switch module to
determine which features are supported.
There are restrictions on the version of firmware required for 6H302-48 modules with a serial
number starting with 3655xxxxxx. The serial number is visible on the top ejector tab of the switch,
or by querying the PIC MIB. For firmware in the 5.x track, version 5.03.05 or higher must be used
on 6H302-48 modules with a serial number starting with 3655. For the 4.x firmware track, 4.08.41
or higher must be used on 6H302-48 modules with a serial number starting with 3655.

1.1

OVERVIEW

Enterasys Networks Local Management is a management tool that allows a network manager to
perform the following tasks:

• Assign IP address and subnet mask.
• Select a default gateway.
• Assign a login password to the module for additional security.
• Download a new firmware image.
• Upload or download a configuration file to or from a TFTP server.
• Designate which Network Management Workstations will receive SNMP traps from the switch.
• Designate which Network Management Workstations are allowed to access the switch module.
• View switch, interface, and RMON statistics.

Introduction

1-1

Overview

• Assign ports to operate in the standard or full duplex mode.
• Configure ports to perform load sharing using SmartTrunking. Refer to the SmartTrunk User’s
Guide for details.

• Control the number of receive broadcasts that are switched to the other interfaces.
• Set flow control on a port-by-port basis.
• Configure ports to prioritize incoming frames at Layer 2, Layer 3, and Layer 4.
• Clear NVRAM.
• Set 802.1Q VLAN memberships and port configurations.
• Redirect frames according to port or VLAN and transmit them on a preselected destination port.
• Create a separate Spanning Tree topology for each VLAN configured in the switch module.
• Transmit frames on preselected destination ports according to protocol and priority or protocol
and VLAN.

• Configure the switch to operate as a Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) module to
dynamically create VLANs across a switched network.

• Configure the module to control the rate of network traffic entering and leaving the switch on a
per port/priority basis.

• Configure an optional HSIM or VHSIM installed in the device.
• Configure the module to dynamically switch frames according to a characteristic rule and
VLAN.

• Configure ports on the switch module as Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) ports.
• Provide additional security and policy administration capabilities via Port-based Web
Authentication (PWA) by configuring pertinent variables within the LM screen.

• Configure multiple ports to act in an 802.3ad trunk group.
• Configure and manage the use of 802.1w, a standards-based method to rapidly fail over links to
reduce downtime on a network.

• Provide additional security by configuring a physical port to lock on an attached device
according to a Classification rule so no other device can be connected to that port and used.
There are three ways to access Local Management:

• Locally using a VT type terminal connected to the COM port.
• Remotely using a VT type terminal connected through a modem.
• In-band through a Telnet connection.
1-2

Introduction

Navigating Local Management Screens

1.1.1

The Management Agent

The management agent is an entity within the switch module that collects statistical information
(e.g., frames received, errors detected) about the operational performance of the managed network.
Local Management communicates with the management agent for the purpose of viewing statistics
or issuing management commands. Local Management provides a wide range of screens used to
monitor and configure the switch module.

1.1.2

In-Band vs. Out-of-Band

Network management systems are often classified as either in-band or out-of-band. In-band
network management passes data along the same medium (cables, frequencies) used by all other
stations on the network.
Out-of-band network management passes data along a medium that is entirely separate from the
common data carrier of the network, for example, a cable connection between a terminal and a
switch module COM port. Enterasys Networks Local Management is an out-of-band network
management system.
A module connected out-of-band to the management agent is not connected to the LAN. This type
of connection allows you to communicate with a network module even when that module is unable
to communicate through the network, for example, at the time of installation.

1.2

NAVIGATING LOCAL MANAGEMENT SCREENS

To navigate within a Local Management screen, use the arrow keys of the terminal or the
workstation providing terminal emulation services. The Local Management screen cursor responds
to the LEFT, RIGHT, UP, and DOWN arrow keys. Each time you press an arrow key, the Local
Management screen cursor moves to the next available field in the direction of the arrow key.
The Local Management screen cursor only moves to fields that can be selected or used for input.
This means that the cursor jumps over display fields and empty lines on the Local Management
screen.
The Local Management screen cursor provides wrap-around operation. This means that a cursor
located at the edge of a screen, when moved in the direction of that edge, “wraps around” to the
outermost selectable item on the opposite side of the screen which is on the same line or column.

Introduction

1-3

Local Management Requirements

1.3

LOCAL MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

The switch module provides one communication port, labeled COM, which supports a
management terminal connection. To access Local Management, connect one of the following
systems to the COM port:

• Digital Equipment Corporation VT series terminal.
• VT type terminal running emulation programs for the Digital Equipment Corporation VT series.
• IBM or compatible PC running a VT series emulation software package.
You can also access Local Management using a Telnet connection through one of the network
ports of the switch module.
NOTE: For details on how to connect a console to the switch module, the setup
parameters for the console, or how to make a telnet connection, refer to Chapter 2.

1.4

LOCAL MANAGEMENT SCREEN ELEMENTS

There are six types of screens used in Local Management: password, menu, statistics,
configuration, status, and warning screens. Each type of screen can consist of one to five basic
elements, or fields. Figure 1-1 shows an example of the fields in a screen. A description of each
field follows the figure.

1-4

Introduction

Local Management Screen Elements

Figure 1-1

Example of a Local Management Screen
Display Fields

Event Message Field
Module Type &
Slot Number
Event Message Line

Display Field
Input Fields

Heading

See
Note

XXXX-XX LOCAL MANAGEMENT
General Configuration
Firmware Revision: XX.XX.XX
BOOTPROM Revision: XX.XX.XX

Module Type: XXXX-XX
Slot Number: X

MAC Address:

00-00-ID-00-00-00

Device Date:

10/11/97

IP Address:

0.0.0.0

Device Time:

14:23:00

Subnet Mask:

255.255.0.0

Screen Refresh Time:

30 sec.

Default Gateway:

NONE DEFINED

Screen Lockout Time:

15 min.

TFTP Gateway IP Addr:

0.0.0.0

Device Uptime XX D XX H XX M

Operational Mode: [802.1Q SWITCHING]

Clear NVRAM

SAVE

Selection Field

[NO]

IP Fragmentation [ENABLED]

EXIT

RETURN

Command Fields

Note:
This shows the location of the cut away that is used in most of the screen graphics in this
document. The top portion of the screen is cut away to eliminate repeating the same
information in each graphic.The screen title is contained in its figure title.
4046_03

Introduction

1-5

Local Management Screen Elements

Event Message Field
This field briefly displays messages that indicate if a Local Management procedure was executed
correctly or incorrectly, that changes were saved or not saved to Non-Volatile Random Access
Memory (NVRAM), or that a user did not have access privileges to an application.
Table 1-1 describes the most common event messages. Event messages related to specific Local
Management applications are described with those applications throughout this manual.
Table 1-1

Event Messages

Message

What it Means

SAVED OK

One or more fields were modified, and saved to NVRAM.

NOT
SAVED--PRESS
SAVE TO KEEP
CHANGES

Attempting to exit the LM screen after one or more fields were modified,
but not saved to NVRAM.

NOTHING TO
SAVE

The SAVE command was executed, but nothing was saved to NVRAM
because there were no configuration changes since the data was last saved.

Heading Field
Indicates whether the module was accessed using the chassis or module IP address. If the chassis
IP address is used to access the module, the heading will be the chassis name, e.g., 6C105. If the
module IP address is used to access the module, the module name will be in the heading, the same
as listed next to Module Type, e.g., 6H258-17.

Module Type and Slot Number Fields
Display only when a module is being accessed through Local Management. The module type is
displayed and the chassis slot number of the module is displayed. A chassis screen will not display
these fields.

1-6

Introduction

Local Management Screen Elements

Display Fields
Display fields cannot be edited. These fields may display information that never changes, or
information that may change as a result of Local Management operations, user selections, or
network monitoring information. In the screens shown in this guide, the characters in the display
fields are in plain type (not bold). In the field description, the field is identified as being
“read-only”.

Input Fields
Input Fields require the entry of keyboard characters. IP addresses, subnet mask, default gateway
and module time are examples of input fields. In the screens shown in this guide, the characters in
the input fields are in bold type. In the field description, the field is identified as being
“modifiable”.

Selection Fields
Selection fields provide a series of possible values. Only applicable values appear in a selection
field. In the screens shown in this guide, the selections display within brackets and are in bold
type. In the field description, the field is identified as being either “selectable” when there are more
than two possible values, or “toggle” when there are only two possible values.

Command Fields
Command fields are located at the bottom of Local Management screens. Command fields are
used to exit Local Management screens, save Local Management entries, or navigate to another
display of the same screen. In the screens shown in this guide, the characters in this field are all
upper case and in bold type. In the field description, the field is identified as being a “command”
field.

Introduction

1-7

Local Management Keyboard Conventions

1.5

LOCAL MANAGEMENT KEYBOARD CONVENTIONS

All key names appear as capital letters in this manual. Table 1-2 explains the keyboard conventions
and the key functions that are used.
Table 1-2

Keyboard Conventions

Key

Function

ENTER Key

Used to enter data or commands. These keys perform the same Local
Management function. For example, “Press ENTER” means that you
can press either ENTER or RETURN, unless this manual specifically
instructs you otherwise.

RETURN Key

ESCAPE (ESC) Key

Used to “escape” from a Local Management screen without saving
changes. For example, “Press ESC twice” means the ESC key must be
pressed quickly two times.

SPACE Bar

Used to cycle through selections in some Local Management fields.
Use the SPACE bar to cycle forward through selections and use the
BACKSPACE key to cycle backward through selections.

BACKSPACE Key
Arrow Keys

(UP-ARROW, DOWN-ARROW, LEFT-ARROW, RIGHT-ARROW)
Used to move the screen cursor. For example, “Use the arrow keys”
means to press whichever arrow key moves the cursor to the desired
field on the Local Management screen.

DEL Key

Used to remove characters from a Local Management field. For
example, “Press DEL” means to press the Delete key.

1-8

Introduction

Getting Help

1.6

GETTING HELP

For additional support related to the module or this document, contact Enterasys Networks using
one of the following methods:
World Wide Web

http://www.enterasys.com/

Phone

(603) 332-9400

Internet mail

support@enterasys.com

FTP
Login

ftp://ftp.enterasys.com
anonymous

Password

your email address

To send comments or suggestions concerning this document, contact the Technical Writing
Department via the following email address: TechWriting@enterasys.com
Make sure to include the document Part Number in the email message.
Before contacting Enterasys Networks, have the following information ready:

• Your Enterasys Networks service contract number
• A description of the failure
• A description of any action(s) already taken to resolve the problem (e.g., changing mode
switches, rebooting the unit, etc.)

• The serial and revision numbers of all involved Enterasys Networks products in the network
• A description of your network environment (layout, cable type, etc.)
• Network load and frame size at the time of trouble (if known)
• The device history (i.e., have you returned the device before, is this a recurring problem, etc.)
• Any previous Return Material Authorization (RMA) numbers

Introduction

1-9

2
Local Management Requirements
This chapter provides the following information:

• Management Terminal Setup (Section 2.1), which describes how to attach a Local Management
terminal to the switch module.
NOTE: When the 6C105 chassis is set to operate in the distributed mode, you can
connect the terminal to the COM port of any module in the chassis to access Local
Management of any module, unless the module is set to operate in the standalone
mode. In this case you must connect the terminal to the COM port of that module to
access its Local Management screens.

• Telnet Connections (Section 2.2), which provides guidelines when using a Telnet connection to
access Local Management.

• Monitoring an Uninterruptible Power Supply (Section 2.3), which describes how to make a
connection from the COM port to an American Power Conversion (APC) Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS) device. This type of connection enables the switch module to monitor the power
status in case of a power loss.

2.1

MANAGEMENT TERMINAL SETUP

Use one of the following systems to access Local Management:

• An IBM PC or compatible device running a VT series emulation software package
• A Digital Equipment Corporation VT100 type terminal
• A VT type terminal running emulation programs for the Digital Equipment Corporation
VT100 series

• A remote VT100 type terminal via a modem connection
• In-band via a Telnet connection

Local Management Requirements

2-1

Management Terminal Setup

2.1.1

Console Cable Connection

Use the Console Cable Kit provided with the chassis to attach the management terminal to the
switch module COM port as shown in Figure 2-1.
To connect the switch module to a PC or compatible device running the VT terminal emulation,
proceed as follows:
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable (supplied in the kit) to the COM port on the
switch module.
2. Plug the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable into the RJ45-to-DB9 adapter (supplied in
the kit).
3. Connect the RJ45-to-DB9 adapter to the PC communications port.
NOTE: If using a modem between the VT compatible device and the COM port of the
switch module, use the appropriate connector included in the console cable kit. Refer to
the modem manufacturer’s information for proper operation and setup of the modem.
As an example, Figure 2-1 shows the COM port connection to a 6H252-17 in a 6C105
chassis.
Figure 2-1

Management Terminal Connection

1

2

3

4

Fast Enet

PS1

5

PS2

6H252-17

RJ45 COM Port

UTP Cable
With RJ45
Connectors

COM
CPU

1

RX
TX

2

RX
TX

3

RX
TX

4

RX
TX

5

RX
TX

6

RX
TX

7

RX
TX

8

RX
TX

9

RX
TX

10

RX
TX

11

RX
TX

12

RX
TX

13

RX
TX

14

RX
TX

15

RX
TX

16

RX
TX

RJ45-to-DB9
PC Adapter
PC

2-2

Local Management Requirements

4046-01

Management Terminal Setup

2.1.2

Management Terminal Setup Parameters

Table 2-1 lists the setup parameters for the local management terminal.
Table 2-1

VT Terminal Setup

Display Setup Menu
Columns ->
Controls ->
Auto Wrap ->
Scroll ->
Text Cursor ->
Cursor Style ->

80 Columns
Interpret Controls
No Auto Wrap
Jump Scroll
Cursor
Underline Cursor Style

General Setup Menu
Mode ->
ID number ->
Cursor Keys ->
Power Supply ->

VT100, 7 Bit Controls
VT100ID
Normal Cursor Keys
UPSS DEC Supplemental

Communications Setup Menu
Transmit ->
Receive ->
XOFF ->
Bits ->
Parity ->
Stop Bit ->
Local Echo ->
Port ->
Transmit ->
Auto Answerback ->

2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
Receive=Transmit
XOFF at 64
8 bits
No Parity
1 Stop Bit
No Local Echo
DEC-423, Data Leads Only
Limited Transmit
No Auto Answerback

Keyboard Setup Menu
Keys ->
Auto Repeat ->
Keyclick ->
Margin Bell ->
Warning Bell ->

Typewriter Keys
any option
any option
Margin Bell
Warning Bell
Local Management Requirements

2-3

Telnet Connections

2.2

TELNET CONNECTIONS

Once the switch module has a valid IP address, the user can establish a Telnet session from any
TCP/IP based node on the network. Telnet connections to the switch module require the
community name passwords assigned in the SNMP Community Names Configuration screen.
For information about setting the IP address, refer to Section 5.2.
For information about assigning community names, refer to Section 5.4.
Refer to the instructions included with the Telnet application for information about establishing a
Telnet session.
If the switch module is operating in the 802.1Q mode with configured VLANs, the management
station must be connected to a physical port on the device that is on the same VLAN as the virtual
Host Data Port. For more information about the virtual Host Data Port and the setup information
for remote management in a device that is to be configured with VLANs, refer to Section 13.8.

2.3

MONITORING AN UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

If the switch module is connected to an American Power Conversion (APC) Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS) device for protection against the loss of power, a connection from the switch module
COM port to the UPS can be made to monitor the UPS power status. To use the COM port for this
purpose, it must be reconfigured to support the UPS connection using the procedure described in
Section 5.2.10. Refer to the UPS documentation for details on how to access the status
information.
The Console Cable Kit provided with the switch module is used to connect the UPS to the switch
module COM port as shown in Figure 2-2. To connect the UPS device to the COM port, proceed as
follows:
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable to the COM port on the switch module.
2. Plug the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable into the RJ45-to-DB9 male (UPS) adapter
(Enterasys Networks part number, 9372066).
3. Connect the RJ45-to-DB9 male (UPS) adapter to the female DB9 port on the rear of the UPS
device (refer to the particular UPS device’s user instructions for more specific information about
the monitoring connection).

2-4

Local Management Requirements

Monitoring an Uninterruptible Power Supply

Figure 2-2

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Connection
Fast Enet
6H252-17

1

2

3

4

PS1

5

Fast Enet

PS2

6H252-17

COM Port

RESET

COM

RESET

COM
1

RX
TX

2

RX
TX

3

RX
TX

4

RX
TX

5

RX
TX

6

RX
TX

7

RX
TX

8

RX
TX

9

RX
TX

10

RX
TX

11

RX
TX

12

RX
TX

13

RX
TX

14

RX
TX

15

RX
TX

16

RX
TX

CPU

DB9 Port

UPS Device
RJ45-to-DB9
UPS Adapter

UTP Cable
With RJ45 Connectors
4046-02

Local Management Requirements

2-5

3
Accessing Local Management
This chapter provides information about the following:

• Navigating through the Local Management screen hierarchy for 802.1Q Switching
(Section 3.1).

• Accessing the Password screen to enter a Local Management session (Section 3.2).
• Accessing the Main Menu screen and its menu items to gain access to the Local Management
screens for the 6C105 or 6C107 chassis and the modules installed in the chassis (Section 3.3).

• Accessing the Module Menu screen and its menu items to gain access to the Module
Configuration screens (described in Chapter 5, Chapter 6, Chapter 7, and Chapter 10), Module
Statistics screens (described in Chapter 11), Network Tools commands (described in
Chapter 12), and the Security screens, which are described in this chapter starting with the
Module Menu screen described in Section 3.5.

• An overview of the Security Methods that can be configured on this module is described starting
with Section 3.6.

3.1

NAVIGATING LOCAL MANAGEMENT SCREENS

The switch module Local Management application consists of a series of menu screens. Navigate
through Local Management by selecting items from the menu screens.
The hierarchy of the Local Management screens is shown in Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2, and
Figure 3-4.
NOTE: At the beginning of each chapter, a section entitled “Screen Navigation Path”
shows the path to the first screen described in the chapter.

Accessing Local Management

3-1

Navigating Local Management Screens

Figure 3-1

802.1Q Switching Mode, Chassis, LM Screen Hierarchy (Page 1 of 3)

Password

The 6C107 chassis does not support the screens in this shaded area.

Main
Menu

Chassis
Menu

Chassis Configuration Menu
SNMP Configuration Menu

Module
Selection

SNMP Community Names
Configuration
SNMP Traps Configuration

Chassis Environmental Information
Redirect Configuration
Menu

Port Redirect
Configuration
VLAN Redirect
Configuration

A
NOTES: The 6C107 chassis does not support the screens in the shaded area shown in
Figure 3-1, so the screen selection starts with the Password screen and skips to the
Module Selection screen.
If an additional Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet HSIM or VHSIM is installed in a switch,
an additional statistics screen selection (not shown in Figure 3-2) may display in the
Module Statistics Menu screen. This is dependent on the HSIM or VHSIM installed. For
more information, refer to Chapter 11.

3-2

Accessing Local Management

Navigating Local Management Screens

Figure 3-2

802.1Q Switching Mode, Module, LM Screen Hierarchy (Page 2 of 3)
Module Configuration Menu
General Configuration
SNMP Configuration Menu

SNMP Community Names Configuration
SNMP Traps Configuration

System Resources Information
Flash Download Configuration

Access Control List

Port Configuration Menu
802.1 Configuration Menu

Ethernet Port
Configuration

Spanning Tree Configuration Menu
Spanning Tree Configuration
Spanning Tree Port Configuration
PVST Port Configuration
802.1Q VLAN
Configuration Menu
802.1p
Configuration Menu

A

Port Priority
Configuration

Module
Menu

Traffic Class
Information
Traffic Class
Configuration
Transmit Queues
Configuration

Static VLAN
Configuration
Static VLAN Egress
Configuration
Current VLAN
Configuration
Current VLAN
Egress Configuration
VLAN Port
Configuration
VLAN Classification
Configuration

Security

B
* Refer to the SmartTrunk

Switch Statistics
Interface Statistics

HSIM/VHSIM
Configuration
Redirect Configuration
Menu
Port Redirect
Configuration
VLAN Redirect
Configuration
* SmartTrunk
Configuration
or
Link Aggregation
Menu
802.3ad Port
802.3ad
802.3ad Port
Port
Details
Details
802.3ad
802.3ad Port
Port
Statistics
Statistics

Priority Classification Protocol Port
Configuration
Configuration
Rate Limiting
Protocol Port
Configuration
IGMP/VLAN
Layer 3 Extensions Menu
Configuration
Module Statistics Menu
Network Tools

Ethernet Interface
Configuration

802.3ad
Aggregator
802.3ad
802.3ad
Aggregator
Details
Aggregator
Detail
802.3ad System

Broadcast Suppression
Configuration
RMON
Statistics
Passwords
Chassis Environment Statistics Configuration
Radius Configuration
Name Services Configuration
System Authentication Configuration

EAP Configuration
User’s Guide for the
Statistics
Menu hierarchy.
* Refer
to the SmartTrunk User’sEAP
Guide
for the screen
screen
hierarchy.
MAC Port Configuration

EAP Session Statistics
EAP Authentication Statistics

Accessing Local Management

3-3

Navigating Local Management Screens

Figure 3-3 802.1Q Switching Mode, Chassis, LM Screen Hierarchy (Page 3 of 3)

B

Security

Passwords
Radius Configuration

Name Services Configuration
System Authentication Configuration

EAP Configuration

3.1.1

EAP Statistics Menu
MAC Port Configuration

EAP Session Statistics

MAC Supplicant Configuration

EAP Diagnostic Statistics

EAP Authenticator Statistics

Selecting Local Management Menu Screen Items

Select items on a menu screen by performing the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item.
2. Press ENTER. The selected menu item displays on the screen.

3.1.2

Exiting Local Management Screens

There are two ways to exit the Local Management (LM) screens.

Using the Exit Command
To exit LM using the EXIT screen command, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the EXIT command at the bottom of the Local Management
screen.
2. Press ENTER. The Local Management Password screen displays and the session ends.

3-4

Accessing Local Management

Navigating Local Management Screens

Using the RETURN Command
To exit LM using the RETURN command, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the RETURN command at the bottom of the Local Management
screen.
2. Press ENTER. The previous screen in the Local Management hierarchy displays.
NOTE: The user can also exit Local Management screens by pressing ESC twice. This
exit method does not warn about unsaved changes and all unsaved changes are lost.

3. Exit from Local Management by repeating steps 1 and 2 until the Device Menu screen displays.
4. To end the LM session, use the arrow keys to highlight the RETURN command at the bottom
of the Device Menu screen.
5. Press ENTER. The Local Management Password screen displays and the session ends.

3.1.3

Using the NEXT and PREVIOUS Commands

If a particular Local Management screen has more than one screen to display its information, the
NEXT and PREVIOUS commands are used to navigate between its screens.
To go to the next or previous display of a screen, proceed as follows:
1. Highlight the applicable NEXT or PREVIOUS command at the bottom of the screen.
2. Press ENTER. The screen displays.

3.1.4

Using the CLEAR COUNTERS Command

The CLEAR COUNTERS command is used to temporarily reset all counters of a screen to zero to
allow you to observe counter activity over a period of time. To reset the counters, perform the
following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the CLEAR COUNTERS command.
2. Press ENTER, the counters are reset to zero.

Accessing Local Management

3-5

Password Screen

3.2

PASSWORD SCREEN

When to Use
To start a Local Management session, which is controlled through the Local Management
Password screen. Whenever a connection is made to the switch module the Local Management
Password screen displays. Before continuing, you must enter a password, which is compared to the
previously stored passwords and associated management level access policy configured using the
Security screen described in Section 3.7. The level of access allowed the user depends on the
password. To set or change passwords, refer to Section 5.4.
The level of management access is dependent on the Password and the associated Access Policy
configured in the Password Configuration screen described in Section 4.4.
NOTE: You can set the same string as a Security password and SNMP Community
Name. This will allow you to access and manage the switch whether you are starting a
Local Management session via a Telnet connection or local COM port connection, or
using a network SNMP management application.
If you utilize a string for the security password and a different one for the SNMP
Community Name, the two cannot be used interchangeably to access the switch
module. The access levels can also be configured to be different.

How to Access
Turn on the terminal. Press ENTER (this may take up to four times, because the COM port of the
switch module auto-senses the baud rate of the terminal) until the Local Management Password
screen displays. Figure 3-4 shows the Password screen.

3-6

Accessing Local Management

Password Screen

Screen Example
Figure 3-4

Local Management Chassis/Module Password Screen

xxxxxxxx LOCAL MANAGEMENT
Enterasys Networks, Inc.
P.O. Box 5005
Rochester, NH 03866-5005 USA
(603) 332-9400
c Copyright Enterasys Networks, Inc. 2001

Device Serial Number:
Device Hardware Revision:
Device Firmware Revision:
Device BOOTPROM Revision:

xxxxxxxxxxxx
xxx
xx.xx.xx
xx.xx.xx

Enter Password:

3650_10

Enter the Password and press ENTER. The default super-user access password is “public” or press
ENTER.
NOTE: The password is one of the passwords configured in the Module Login
Password screen. Access to certain Local Management capabilities depends on the
degree of access accorded that password. Refer to Section 5.4.
If an invalid password is entered, the terminal beeps and the cursor returns to the
beginning of the password entry field.
Entering a valid password causes the associated access level to display at the bottom of
the screen and the Module Menu screen to display.
If no activity occurs for a preset period of time, the Local Management Password screen
redisplays and the password has to be reentered.

Accessing Local Management

3-7

Main Menu Screen

3.3

MAIN MENU SCREEN
NOTE: This screen does not display when using the 6C107 chassis. The Module
Selection screen is displayed instead of this screen.

When to Use
To access the two major sets of Local Management screens used to configure the chassis and the
switch modules installed in the chassis.

How to Access
Enter a valid password in the Local Management Password screen as described in Section 3.2, and
press ENTER. The Main Menu screen, Figure 3-5, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-5

Main Menu Screen

CHASSIS
MODULES

EXIT
4046_04

3-8

Accessing Local Management

Module Selection Screen

NOTE: If the terminal is idle for several minutes the Local Management Password
screen redisplays and the session ends. This idle time can be changed in the General
Configuration screen in Section 5.2.9.

Menu Descriptions
Table 3-1

Main Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

CHASSIS

Provides access to the Chassis Menu screen that is used to configure
the chassis, access current chassis power supply and environmental
status, and perform port and VLAN redirect functions.
To access and use the Chassis Menu screen, refer to Section 4.1 for
instructions.

MODULES

3.4

Provides access to the Module Selection screen that is used to select
individual modules in the chassis for management purposes. If module
management is desired at this time, proceed to Section 3.4.

MODULE SELECTION SCREEN

Screen Navigation Path
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection

When to Use
To select a module in the chassis and the Module Menu screen, which is the access point to the set
of Local Management screens for the selected module. The Module Selection screen is the access
point to the Local Management screens for all modules installed in the 6C105 or 6C107 chassis.

Accessing Local Management

3-9

Module Selection Screen

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the MODULES menu item in the Module Selection screen, and
press ENTER. The Module Selection screen, Figure 3-6, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-6

Module Selection Screen

Module #

Serial #

Module Type

Hardware Revision

<1>

6H258-17

123456789

XXX

2

6H252-25

123456789

XXX

3

6H203-26

123456789

XXX

4

6H202-24

123456789

XXX

5

–

–

EXIT

–

RETURN
40462-39

3-10

Accessing Local Management

Module Selection Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-2 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-2

Module Selection Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Module #
(Selectable)

Display the slot in which the module is installed. The module number
enclosed in angle brackets (< >) indicates the module to which the
management terminal or Telnet session is currently connected.

Module Type
(Read-Only)

Display the type of interface module that is installed in each slot.

Serial #
(Read-Only)

Display the serial number of the module. The serial number of the
device is necessary when calling Enterasys Networks concerning the
module.

Hardware Revision
(Read-only)

Display the hardware version of the module.

3.4.1

Selecting a Module

To select an individual module to perform Local Management functions, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired module number in the Module # field.
2. Press ENTER, the applicable Module Menu screen displays. Proceed to Section 3.5.

Accessing Local Management

3-11

Module Menu Screen

3.5

MODULE MENU SCREEN

Screen Navigation Path
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu

When to Use
To access the Local Management screens for the switch module selected in the Module Selection
screen.

How to Access
Use the procedure described in Section 3.4.1.

Screen Example
Figure 3-7

Module Menu Screen

MODULE CONFIGURATION MENU
MODULE STATISTICS MENU
NETWORK TOOLS
SECURITY

EXIT

RETURN
40462_14

3-12

Accessing Local Management

Module Menu Screen

NOTE: If the terminal is idle for several minutes, the Local Management Password
screen redisplays and the session ends. This idle time can be changed in the Chassis
Configuration screen described in Section 4.2.

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-3 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 3-3

Module Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

MODULE
CONFIGURATION

Provides access to the Local Management screens that are used to
configure the switch module and also provides access to the Port
Configuration Menu screen, 802.1 Configuration Menu screens, and
the Layer 3 Extensions Menu screens.
The Port Configuration Menu screen provides access to the screens that
are used to set operating parameters specific to each port.
The 802.1 Configuration Menu screen provides access to the Spanning
Tree Configuration Menu screen, 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu
screen, and the 802.1p Configuration Menu screen. These screens are
used to set the basic switch operations, and provide access to screens to
configure VLANs, and assign port priorities.
For details about the screens, refer to:

• Chapter 5 for the Module Configuration Menu screen,
• Chapter 6 for the Port Configuration Menu screen,
• Chapter 7 for the 802.1 Configuration Menu screen, and
• Chapter 10 for the Layer 3 Extensions Menu screen.
MODULE
STATISTICS

Provides access to screens used to obtain statistics and performance
information for the switch module. For details, refer to Chapter 11.

NETWORK
TOOLS

The Network Tools function resides on the switch module and consists
of commands that allow the user to access and manage network
devices, including the ability to Telnet to other devices. Chapter 12
explains how to use the Network Tools utility.

Accessing Local Management

3-13

Module Menu Screen

Table 3-3

Module Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

Screen Function

SECURITY

Provides access to the following screens:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Module Login Passwords
Radius Configuration
Name Services Configuration
System Authentication Configuration
EAP Configuration
EAP Statistics Menu
MAC Port Configuration
MAC Supplicant Configuration

The Module Login Passwords screen allows you to set a login
password for the device according to access policy (read-only,
read-write, and super-user). A different password can be set for each
access policy.
To prevent clearing the passwords, hardware switch 8 on the board of
the device can be disabled using this screen. For an overview of the
security available on this switch module, refer to Section 3.6.
For more information about the Module Login Passwords screen, refer
to Section 3.8.
The Radius Configuration screen enables you to configure the Radius
client function on the switch module to provide another restriction for
access to the Local Management screens. For more information on
Radius Client, refer to Section 3.6.
For more information about the Radius Configuration screen, refer to
Section 3.9.
The System Authentication Configuration, EAP Configuration, and
EAP Statistics Menu screens enable you to securely authenticate and
grant appropriate access to end user devices directly attached to the
switch module ports. For more information about 802.1x port based
network access control, refer to Section 3.6.2.
For more information about the System Authentication Configuration,
EAP Configuration, and EAP Statistics Menu screens, refer to
Section 3.11, Section 3.12, and Section 3.13, respectively.

3-14

Accessing Local Management

Overview of Security Methods

Table 3-3

Module Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

Screen Function

SECURITY
(cont’d)

The MAC Port Configuration screen enables you to monitor the
authentication state of the supplicants associated with each port and
enable/disable, initialize, and force a revalidation of the port MAC
credential.
For more information about MAC port configuration, refer to
Section 3.14.
The MAC Supplicant Configuration screen enables you to see which
MAC authentication supplicants are active, their MAC address and
associated module ports, and enable you to initialize or reauthenticate
each of the supplicants.
For more information about the MAC Supplicant Configuration screen,
refer to Section 3.15.

3.6

OVERVIEW OF SECURITY METHODS

Six security methods are available to control which users are allowed to access, monitor, and
control the switch module.

• Login Security Password – used to access the Module Menu screen to start a Local Management
session via a Telnet connection or local COM port connection. Whenever a connection is made
to the switch module, the Local Management Password screen displays. Before continuing, you
must enter a login password, which is compared to the stored passwords and associated
management level access policies configured using the Security screen described in Section 3.7.

• SNMP Community String – allows access to the switch module via a network SNMP
management application. To access the switch module, you must enter an SNMP Community
Name string. The level of management access is dependent on the SNMP Community Name and
the associated Access Policy configured in the SNMP Community Names Configuration screen
described in Section 4.4.
NOTE: You can set the same string as a Security login password and SNMP
Community Name. This allows you to access and manage the switch module whether
you are starting a Local Management session via a Telnet connection or local COM port
connection, or using a network SNMP management application.
If the login security password is different from the SNMP Community Name, the two
cannot be used interchangeably to access the switch module.
Accessing Local Management

3-15

Overview of Security Methods

• Host Access Control Authentication (HACA) – authenticates user access of Telnet management,
console local management and WebView via a central Radius Client/Server application using the
Password screen described in Section 3.8. For an overview of HACA and a description of how
to set the access policy using the Radius Configuration screen, refer to Section 3.6.1 and
Section 3.9.

• Host Access Control List (ACL) – allows only the defined list of IP Addresses to communicate
with the host for Telnet, WebView (HTTP) and SNMP. To set up these parameters, refer to the
Host Access Control List (ACL) screen described in Section 3.6.1.

• 802.1X Port Based Network Access Control – provides a mechanism for administrators to
securely authenticate and grant appropriate access to end user devices (supplicants) directly
attached to switch module ports. For more information, refer to Section 3.6.2.

• MAC Authentication – provides a mechanism for administrators to securely authenticate and
grant appropriate access to end user devices directly attached to switch module ports. For more
information, refer to Section 3.6.3.

3.6.1

Host Access Control Authentication (HACA)

To use HACA, the embedded Radius Client on the switch module must be configured to
communicate with the Radius Server, and the Radius Server must be configured with the password
information. The software used for this application provides the ability to centralize the
Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) of the network resources. For more
information, refer to the RFC 2865 (Radius Authentication) and RFC 2866 (Radius Accounting)
for a description of the protocol.
Each switch module has its own Radius Client. The client can be configured via:

• The Radius Configuration screen described in Section 3.9, or
• The Network Tools Command Line Interface (CLI) using the “radius” command described in
Chapter 12.
The IP address of the Radius Server and the shared secret text string must be configured on the
Radius Client. The client uses the Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) to communicate the
user name and encrypted password to the Radius Server.
On the Radius Server, each user is configured with the following:
• name
• password
• access level

3-16

Accessing Local Management

Overview of Security Methods

The access level can be set to one of the following levels for each user name:
• super-user
• read-write
• read-only
To support multiple access levels per user name, it involves sending back a different “FilterID”
attribute using some server feature to differentiate between the same user name with different
prefixes/suffixes. For example, “username@engineering” and “username@home” could each
return different access levels.
NOTE: This is a server-dependent feature.

A Radius user/password combination is assigned one access level unless server-specific features
such as prefixes or suffixes are used to assign different access levels.
All radius values, except the server IPs and shared secrets, are assigned reasonable default values
when radius is installed on a new switch module. The defaults are as follows:
• Client, disabled
• Timeout, 20 seconds
• Retries, 3
• Primary and secondary Authentication ports: 1812 (per RFC 2865)
• Primary and secondary Accounting ports: 1813 (per RFC 2866)
• Last-resort for local and remote is CHALLENGE
If only one server is configured, it must be the primary server. It is not necessary to reboot after the
client is reconfigured.
The client cannot be enabled unless the primary server is configured with at least the minimum
configuration information.
NOTE: The minimum additional information that must be configured to use a server is
its IP and Shared Secret.

Accessing Local Management

3-17

Overview of Security Methods

When the Radius Client is active on the switch module, the user is presented with an authorization
screen, prompting for a user login name and password when attempting to access the host IP
address via the local console LM, Telnet to LM, or WebView application. The embedded Radius
Client encrypts the information entered by the user and sends it to the Radius Server for validation.
Then the server returns an access-accept or access-reject response back to the client, allowing or
denying the user to access the host application with the proper access level.
An access-accept response returns a message USER AUTHORIZATION = 
for 3 seconds and then the main screen of the application is displayed. An access-denied response
causes an audible “beep” and the screen to return to the user name prompt.
If the Radius Client is unable to receive a response from the Radius Server, because the Radius
Server is down or inaccessible, the Radius Client will time out to a default value of 20 seconds.
If the server returns an “access-accept” response (the user successfully authenticated), it must also
return a Radius “FilterID” attribute containing an ASCII string with the following fields in the
specified format:
“Enterasys:version=V:mgmt=M:policy=N”
Where:
V is the version number (currently V=1)
M is the access level for management, one of the following strings:
“su” for super-user access
“rw” for read-write access
“ro” for read-only access
N is the policy profile number (see the policy profile MIB)
NOTES:
1. Quotation marks (“ ”) are used for clarification only and are not part of the command
strings.
2. If the FilterID attribute is not returned, or the “mgmt” field is absent or contains an
unrecognizable value, access is denied.
3. Policy profiles are not yet deployed and the “policy=N” part may be omitted.

If the Radius client does not receive a response from the primary server, it will consult the
secondary server if one has been configured. If the secondary server also does not respond then the
switch module reverts to the last-resort authentication action. Last-resort authentication is
individually selectable for both local (COM port) and remote (TELNET or WebView). The
last-resort action may be to accept the user, reject the user, or challenge the user for the Local
Management passwords (resort to legacy authentication).
3-18

Accessing Local Management

Overview of Security Methods

3.6.2

802.1X Port Based Network Access Control

This section provides
• a brief description of 802.1X Port Based Network Access Control,
• definitions of common terms and abbreviations, and
• an overview of the tasks that may be accomplished using the 802.1X (EAP security and
authentication features.
When using the physical access characteristics of IEEE 802 LAN infrastructures, the 802.1X
standard provides a mechanism for administrators to securely authenticate and grant appropriate
access to end user devices directly attached to switch module ports. When configured in
conjunction with NetSight Policy Manager and Radius server(s), Enterasys Networks’ switch
modules can dynamically administer user based policy that is specifically tailored to the end user’s
needs.

3.6.2.1

Definitions of Terms and Abbreviations

Table 3-4 provides an explanation of authentication terms and abbreviations used when describing
the 802.1X and EAP security and authentication features.
Table 3-4

Authentication Terms and Abbreviations

Term

Definition

EAP

Extensible Authentication Protocol (e.g., Microsoft IAS
Server and Funk Steel Belted Radius).

PAE

Port Access Entity, device firmware that implements or
participates in the protocol.

PWA

Port Web Authentication, an enterprise specific
authentication process using a web browser user-login
process to gain access to ports.

RADIUS

Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.

Authenticator

The entity that sits between a supplicant and the
authentication server. The authenticator’s job is to pass
authenticating information between the supplicant and
authentication server until an authentication decision is
made.

Accessing Local Management

3-19

Overview of Security Methods

Table 3-4

Authentication Terms and Abbreviations (Continued)

Term

Definition

Authentication Server

Provides authentication service to an authenticator. This
service determines, by the credentials the supplicant
provides, whether a supplicant is authorized to access
services provided by the authenticator. The authentication
server can be co-located with an authenticator or can be
accessed remotely.

Supplicant

The entity (user machine) that is trying to be authenticated
by an authenticator attached to the other end of that link.

3.6.2.2

802.1X Security Overview

The Enterasys Networks’ 6000 Series and Matrix E7 modules support the following 802.1X
security and authentication features to:

• Authenticate hosts that are connected to dedicated switch ports.
• Authenticate based on single-user hosts. (If a host is a time-shared Unix or VMS system,
successful authentication by any user will allow all users access to the network.)

• Allow users to authenticate themselves by logging in with user names and passwords, token
cards, or other high-level identification. Thus, a system manager does not need to spend hours
setting low-level MAC address filters on every edge switch to simulate user-level access
controls.

• Divide system functionality between supplicants (user machines), authenticators, and
authentication servers. Authenticators reside in edge switches. They shuffle messages and tell
the switch when to grant or deny access, but do not validate logins. User validation is the job of
authentication servers. This separation of functions allows network managers to put
authentication servers on central servers.

• Use the 802.1X protocol to communicate between the authenticator and the supplicant. The
frame format using 802.1X includes extra data fields within a LAN frame. Note that 802.1X
does not allow routing.

• Use 802.1X to communicate between the authenticator and the authentication server. The
specific protocol that runs between these components (e.g., RADIUS-encapsulated EAP) is not
specified and is implementation-dependent.

3-20

Accessing Local Management

Overview of Security Methods

3.6.3

MAC Authentication Overview

This section discusses a method for a user to gain access to the network by validating the MAC
address of their connected device. Network management statically provisions MAC addresses in a
central radius server. Those pre-configured MAC addresses are allowed access to the network
through the usual RADIUS validation process. This section further discusses how MAC
Authentication and 802.1X cooperate to provide an integrated approach to authentication.

3.6.3.1

Authentication Method Selection

The 802.1X and PWA authentication methods are globally exclusive. Additionally, MAC
Authentication and PWA are globally mutually exclusive. However, MAC Authentication and
802.1X are not mutually exclusive, so that both 802.1X and MAC authentications can be
configured concurrently on the same device using the Local Management (LM) System
Authentication Configuration screen described in Section 3.11. When both methods are enabled on
the same device, the switch enforces a precedence relationship between MAC Authentication and
802.1X methods.
When configuring a device using the System Authentication Configuration screen, only the valid
set of global and per port authentication methods are available for selection. These are EAP, PWA,
MAC, MAC EAP, and NONE. If there is an attempt to enable both MAC Authentication and PWA
either through the sole use of MIBs or by using both the LM screen and MIBs, then an appropriate
error message is displayed.

3.6.3.2

Authentication Method Sequence

When MAC Authentication is enabled on a port, the Authentication of a specific MAC address
commences immediately following the reception of any frame. The MAC address and a currently
stored password for the port are used to perform a PAP authentication with one of the configured
radius servers. If successful, the port forwarding behavior is changed according to the authorized
policy and a session is started. If unsuccessful, the forwarding behavior of the port remains
unchanged.
If successful, the filter-id in the radius response may contain a policy string of the form
policy=”policy name”. If the string exists and it refers to a currently configured policy in this
switch, then the port receives this new policy. If authenticated, but the authorized policy is invalid
or non-existent, then the port forwards the frame normally according to the port default policy, if
one exists. Otherwise, frames are forwarded without any policy.

Accessing Local Management

3-21

Overview of Security Methods

3.6.3.3

Concurrent Operation of 802.1X and MAC Authentication

This section defines the precedence rules to determine which authentication method, 802.1X
(EAP) or MAC Authentication has control over an interface. Setting the 802.1X and MAC port
authentication is described in Section 3.11.
When both methods are enabled, 802.1X takes precedence over MAC Authentication when a user
is authenticated using the 802.1X method. If the port or MAC remains unauthenticated in 802.1X,
then MAC authentication is active and may authenticate the next MAC address received on that
port.
You can configure MAC Authentication and 802.1X to run concurrently on the same module, but
exclusively on distinct interfaces of that module. To achieve this, the 802.1X port behavior in the
force-unauthorized state is overloaded. When 802.1X and MAC Authentication are enabled, set
the 802.1X MIB to force-unauthorized for the interface in question and enable
MAC Authentication. This allows the MAC Authentication to run unhindered by 802.1X on that
interface. This, in effect, disables all 802.1X control over that interface. However, if a default
policy exists on that port, the switch forwards the frames according to that policy, otherwise the
switch drops them.
If a switch port is configured to enable both 802.1X and MAC Authentication, then it is possible
for the switch to receive a start or a response 802.1X frame while a MAC Authentication is in
progress. If this situation, the switch immediately aborts MAC Authentication. The 802.1X
authentication then proceeds to completion. After the 802.1X login completes, the user has either
succeeded and gained entry to the network, or failed and is denied access to the network. After the
802.1X login attempt, no new MAC Authentication logins occur on this port until:

• A link is toggled.
• The user executes an 802.1X logout.
• Management terminates the 802.1X session.
NOTE: The switch may terminate a session in many different ways. All of these
reactivate the MAC authentication method. Refer to Table 3-5 for the precedence
relationship between MAC and 802.1X authentication.

When a port is set for concurrent use of MAC and 802.1X authentication, the switch continues to
issue EAPOL request/id frames until a MAC Authentication succeeds or the switch receives an
EAPOL response/id frame.

3-22

Accessing Local Management

Overview of Security Methods

Table 3-5

MAC / 802.1X Precedence States

802.1X
Port
Control

MAC
Port
Control

Authenticated?

Force
Authorized

Don’t
Care

Don’t
Care

Default
Policy
Exists?

Yes

Authorized
Policy
Exists?

Don’t
Care

Action

• Neither method performs
authentication.

• Frames are forwarded according
to default policy.
Force
Authorized

Don’t
Care

Don’t
Care

No

Don’t
Care

• Neither method performs
authentication.

• Frames are forwarded.
Auto

Enabled

Yes

Don’t
Care

Yes

• Hybrid authentication (both
methods are active).

• Frames are forwarded according
to authorized policy.
Auto

Enabled

Yes

Yes

No

• Hybrid authentication (both
methods are active).

• Frames are forwarded according
to default policy.
Auto

Enabled

Yes

No

No

• Hybrid authentication (both
methods active).

• Frames are forwarded.
Auto

Enabled

No

Yes

Don’t
Care

• Hybrid authentication (both
methods are active).

• Frames are forwarded according
to default policy.
Auto

Enabled

No

No

Don’t
Care

• Hybrid authentication (both
methods are active).

• Frames are discarded.

Accessing Local Management

3-23

Overview of Security Methods

Table 3-5

MAC / 802.1X Precedence States (Continued)

802.1X
Port
Control

MAC
Port
Control

Authenticated?

Auto

Disabled

Yes

Default
Policy
Exists?

Don’t
Care

Authorized
Policy
Exists?

Action

Yes

• 802.1X performs authentication.
• Frames are forwarded according
to authorized policy.

Auto

Disabled

Yes

Yes

No

• 802.1X performs authentication.
• Frames are forwarded according
to default policy.

Auto

Disabled

Yes

No

No

• 802.1X performs authentication.
• Frames are forwarded.

Auto

Disabled

No

Yes

Don’t
Care

• 802.1X performs authentication.
• Frames are forwarded according
to default policy.

Auto

Disabled

Force
Unauthorization

Enabled

Force
Unauthorization

Enabled

Force
Unauthorization

Enabled

Force
Unauthorization

Enabled

3-24

No

Yes

No

Don’t
Care

Don’t
Care

• 802.1X performs authentication.

Yes

• MAC performs authentication.

• Frames are discarded.
• Frames are forwarded according
to authorized policy.

Yes

Yes

No

• MAC performs authentication.
• Frames are forwarded according
to default policy.

Yes

No

No

• MAC performs authentication.
• Frames are forwarded.

No

Accessing Local Management

Yes

Don’t
Care

• MAC performs authentication.
• Frames are forwarded according
to default policy.

Overview of Security Methods

Table 3-5

MAC / 802.1X Precedence States (Continued)

802.1X
Port
Control

MAC
Port
Control

Authenticated?

Default
Policy
Exists?

Force
Unauthorization

Enabled

No

No

Force
Unauthorization

Disabled

3.6.4

Don’t
Care

Don’t
Care

Authorized
Policy
Exists?

Action

Don’t
Care

• MAC performs authentication.

Don’t
Care

• Neither method performs

• Frames are discarded.

authentication.

• Frames are discarded.

MAC Authentication Control

This global variable can be set to enabled or disabled.
If set to enabled, then
a. MAC Authentication is active on those ports whose individual port-enabled variable is set to
enabled.
b. All session and statistic information is reset to defaults.
c. Any MAC addresses currently locked to ports are unlocked.
If set to disabled, then
a. MAC Authentication stops for all ports.
b. All active sessions are terminated with the cause portAdminDisabled.
c. All policies are applied to ports as a result of a MAC Authentication reverting to the ports
default policy, if any.
d. All ports currently authenticated using 802.1X, are unaffected.
e. Any 802.1X ports, which were set to forced-unauth, revert back to discarding all frames
regardless of the MAC Authentication state.

Accessing Local Management

3-25

Security Menu Screen

3.7

SECURITY MENU SCREEN

Screen Navigation Path
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Security Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Security Menu

When to Use
To access the Passwords, Radius Configuration, Name Services Configuration, System
Authentication Configuration, EAP Configuration, EAP Statistics Menu, MAC Port
Configuration, and MAC Supplicant Configuration screens.

• The Passwords and Radius Configuration screens allow you to configure additional limited
access.

• The Name Services Configuration screen allows you to set parameters for personalized web
authentication.

• The System Authentication Configuration, EAP Configuration, EAP Statistics Menu screens
enable you to view port authentication type and status, to configure EAP settings, and to view
EAP statistics.
• The MAC Port Configuration and MAC Supplicant Configuration screens enable you to
configure MAC Authentication for user devices (supplicants) directly attached to one or more
physical ports.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SECURITY menu item on the Module Configuration Menu
screen and press ENTER. The Security Menu screen, Figure 3-8, displays.

3-26

Accessing Local Management

Security Menu Screen

Screen Example
Figure 3-8

Security Menu Screen

PASSWORDS
RADIUS CONFIGURATION
NAME SERVICES CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION EAP CONFIGURATION
EAP STATISTICS MENU
MAC PORT CONFIGURATION
MAC SUPPLICANT CONFIGURATION

EXIT

RETURN
3528_14

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-6 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 3-6

Security Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

PASSWORDS

Used to set the Locally Administered Passwords (super-user,
read-write, and read-only) to access the device according to an access
policy. For details, refer to Section 3.8.

RADIUS
CONFIGURATION

Used to configure the Radius Client Parameters on the switch,
primary server, and secondary server. For details, refer to Section 3.9.

NAME SERVICES
CONFIGURATION

Used to set parameters for personalized Web authentication,
including the URL and IP of the Secure Harbour web page. For
details, refer to Section 3.10.

Accessing Local Management

3-27

Security Menu Screen

Table 3-6

Security Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

Screen Function

SYSTEM
AUTHENTICATION
CONFIGURATION

Used to enable or disable an authentication type for the device, and to
display the authentication type and authentication status (enabled or
disabled) for all ports. For details, refer to Section 3.11.

EAP
CONFIGURATION

Used to configure authentication settings for each port. For details,
refer to Section 3.12.

EAP STATISTICS

Used to navigate to the EAP Session Statistics, EAP Authentication
Statistics, and EAP Diagnostic Statistics screens. For details, refer to
Section 3.13.

MAC PORT
CONFIGURATION

Used to view the current port authentication states, enable or disable
the authentication function on each port, reset ports to the initial
authentication configuration, and force a revalidation of the MAC
credential. For details, refer to Section 3.14.

MAC SUPPLICANT
CONFIGURATION

Used to show how long MAC Authentication supplicants are logged
on to a port and their MAC address, and provides limited
configuration of these supplicants. For details, refer to Section 3.15.

3-28

Accessing Local Management

Passwords Screen

3.8

PASSWORDS SCREEN

When to Use
To provide additional security by using login passwords associated to access policy. This screen
allows the use of passwords to provide three levels of Local Management access (super-user,
read-write and read-only) via serial console or telnet connection. This screen is also used to disable
the function of hardware switch 8 to prevent the clearing of the login passwords.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the PASSWORDS menu item on the Security Menu screen and
press ENTER. The Module Login Passwords screen, Figure 3-9, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-9

Module Login Passwords Screen

Password

Access Policy

********
********
********

read-only
read-write
super-user

SWITCH 8 [ENABLED]
Restrict NVRAM Passwords from upload/download [DISABLED]

SAVE

EXIT

RETURN
3650_23

Accessing Local Management

3-29

Passwords Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-7 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-7

Module Login Passwords Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Password
(Modifiable)

Enter the password used to access the device according to an access
policy. For information on how to set the login password, refer to
Section 3.8.1.

Access Policy
(Read-Only)

See the access given each password. Possible selections are as follows:
read-only

This password allows read-only access to Local
Management, and excludes access to
security-protected fields of read-write or super-user
authorization.

read-write

This password allows read and write access to Local
Management, excluding security protected fields for
super-user access only.

super-user

This password permits read-write access to Local
Management and allows the user to change all
modifiable parameters including community names, IP
addresses, traps, and SNMP objects.

Switch 8
(Toggle)

Enable or disable the function of hardware switch S8 on the main
board of the device. When set to ENABLED, S8 can be used to clear
the password. When set to DISABLED, S8 cannot be used to clear the
password. The default is ENABLED.

Restrict NVRAM
Passwords from
upload/download
(Toggle)

Prevent passwords residing in NVRAM from being replaced when
downloading a configuration file. The default setting is DISABLED.
This prevents the passwords from being downloaded.

3-30

Accessing Local Management

Radius Configuration Screen

3.8.1

Setting the Module Login Password

Setting the Module Login Password provides additional security by assigning each switch module
its own password and allowing you to disable the function of switch S8 so that the password
cannot be cleared. To assign the password and disable switch S8, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate Password field. A different password can be
assigned to each Access Policy.
2. Press ENTER.
3. To disable the function of switch S8 so the passwords cannot be cleared, use the arrow keys to
highlight the Switch 8 field.
4. Press the SPACE bar to select DISABLED.
5. To save the settings, press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays at the top of the screen.

3.9

RADIUS CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To configure the Radius client in the switch to restrict access to the management functions of the
Local Management screens, by way of the COM port or network TELNET connection.
NOTE: The configuration and enable state of the Radius client will be stored in NVRAM
and loaded on power-up. If the client is properly configured and enabled, the platform
will create the Radius client and enable it at boot time, superseding legacy
authentication. Otherwise, the legacy authentication becomes operational.
Radius Client parameters can also be set using the Network Tools screen described in
Chapter 12.

This screen allows you to set the necessary parameters to centralize the Authentication,
Authorization, and Accounting of the network resources. For information about Radius Client and
how it functions, refer to Section 3.6 and Section 3.6.1.

Accessing Local Management

3-31

Radius Configuration Screen

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the RADIUS CONFIGURATION menu item on the Security
Menu screen and press ENTER. The Radius Configuration screen, Figure 3-10, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-10

Radius Configuration Screen

Timeout: 20
Retries: 03

Local
Remote
Last Resort Action: [CHALLENGE] [CHALLENGE]
Radius Client: [DISABLED]

IP Address:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

SAVE

Secret:
NOT CONFIGURED
NOT CONFIGURED

Auth Port:
1812
1812

EXIT

RETURN
3650_22

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-8 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-8

Radius Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Timeout
(Modifiable)

Enter the maximum time in seconds to establish contact with the
Radius Server before timing out. The default is 20 seconds.

Retries
(Modifiable)

Enter the maximum number of attempts (1…N) to contact the Radius
Server before timing out. The default is 20 seconds.

3-32

Accessing Local Management

Radius Configuration Screen

Table 3-8

Radius Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Last Resort
Action/Local
(Selectable)

Accept, Challenge, and Reject, which do the following:
ACCEPT: Allows local access (via COM port) at the super-user
level with no further attempt at authentication.
CHALLENGE: Reverts to local module (legacy) passwords.
REJECT: Does not allow local access.
For more details, refer to Section 3.9.1.
To set local and remote servers, refer to Section 3.9.2.

Last Resort
Action/Remote
(Selectable)

Accept, Challenge, and Reject, which do the following:
ACCEPT: Allows local access (via COM port) at the super-user
level with no further attempt at authentication.
CHALLENGE: Reverts to local module (legacy) passwords.
REJECT: Does not allow remote access.
For more details, refer to Section 3.9.1.
To set local and remote servers, refer to Section 3.9.2.

Radius Client
(Toggle)

Enable or disable client status.

IP Address
(Modifiable)

Enter the IP address (in decimal-dot format) of the primary and
secondary servers being configured for the Radius function.

Secret
(Modifiable)

Enter a secret string of characters or the primary and secondary server
(16 characters are recommended as per RFC 2865. The maximum is 32
characters).

Auth Port
(Modifiable)

Enter the number of the Authorization UDP Port for the Primary and
Secondary server.

Accessing Local Management

3-33

Radius Configuration Screen

3.9.1

Setting the Last Resort Authentication

The Radius client can be configured to use primary and secondary servers. If the primary server
does not respond within the specified number of retries during the specified time-out period, the
client will then attempt to authenticate using the secondary server. If the secondary server also
does not respond, then the client returns a time-out condition.
The “last resort” platform action in case of Radius server time-out for both local and remote access
is selectable for each type of access:

• Local login via the COM port.
• Remote login via a remote network TELNET connection.

3.9.2

Setting the Local and Remote Servers

Before setting the parameters, refer to Section 3.6.1 and Section 3.9.1 for a better understanding of
Radius Servers and Last Resort Authentication. To set the local and remote server, proceed as
follows:
1. Highlight the Timeout field and enter the maximum time in seconds to establish contact with
the Radius Server before timing out.
2. Highlight the Retries field and enter the desired maximum number of attempts (1…N) to contact
the Radius Server before timing out.
3. Highlight the Last-Resort Action/Local field and select ACCEPT, CHALLENGE, or
REJECT to allow local access at the super-user level with no further attempt at authentication;
revert local module to (legacy) passwords, or not allow local access.
4. Highlight the Last-Resort Action/Remote field select ACCEPT, CHALLENGE, or
REJECT to allow remote access at the super-user level with no further attempt at
authentication, revert remote module to (legacy) passwords, or not allow remote access,
respectively.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IP Address field and enter the IP address (in decimal-dot
format) of the primary and secondary servers being configured for the RADIUS function.
6. Highlight the Secret field and enter a secret string of characters or the primary and secondary
server (16 characters are recommended as per RFC 2865. The maximum is 32 characters).
7. Highlight the Auth Port field and enter the number of the Accounting UDP Port for the Primary
and Secondary server.
8. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER to save your settings.

3-34

Accessing Local Management

Name Services Configuration Screen

3.10 NAME SERVICES CONFIGURATION SCREEN
When to Use
Use this screen when enabling Port-based Web authentication. This screen can also be used to
configure the global Secure Harbour name and IP address. The user can Enable/Disable Name
Services and associate the switch name with the Secure Harbour IP address.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the NAME SERVICES CONFIGURATION menu item on the
Security Menu screen and press ENTER. The Name Services Configuration screen, Figure 3-11,
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-11

Name Services Configuration Screen

Switch Name:
Secure Harbour IP:
Name Services:
Web Authentication:

SAVE

EXIT

Secure Harbour
0.0.0.0
[DISABLED]
[DISABLED]

RETURN
3650_21

Accessing Local Management

3-35

Name Services Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-9 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-9

Name Services Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Switch Name
(Modifiable)

Create a textual name to bind to the IP address.

Secure Harbour IP
(Read-Only)

See the IP address used to access services.

Name Services
(Toggle)

Enable or disable the name services function.

Web Authentication
(Toggle)

Enable or disable Web Authentication.

3-36

NOTE: The switch Name and the Secure Harbour IP must be
globally unique within your network and the end switch must
contain the identical information.

NOTE: The Switch Name and the Secure Harbour IP must be
globally unique within your network and the end switch must
contain the identical information. The Secure Harbour IP cannot
be the same as the management IP of the switch.

Accessing Local Management

System Authentication Configuration Screen

3.11 SYSTEM AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION SCREEN
When to Use
To enable or disable an authentication type for the device, and to display the authentication type
and authentication status (enabled or disabled) for all ports.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SYSTEM AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION menu
item on the Security Menu screen and press ENTER. The System Authentication Configuration
screen, Figure 3-12, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-12

System Authentication Configuration Screen

System Authentication [EAP]
Port #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SAVE

Authentication Type
EAP
EAP
EAP-MAC
EAP
EAP
EAP
EAP-MAC
EAP-MAC
EAP
EAP
NEXT

Authentication Status
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
Unauthenticated
EXIT

RETURN
37831-02

Accessing Local Management

3-37

System Authentication Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-10 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-10

System Authentication Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

System
Authentication
(Selectable)

Enable or disable an authentication type for the device, or turn off the
port authentication function on all ports. Options are EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol), PWA (Port Web Authentication), MAC
(Machine Address Code), EAP MAC, or NONE.

• EAP is encapsulated in LAN frames according to the 802.1X
standard.

• PWA uses the web browser user login process to allow access to
ports.

• MAC authentication limits access to the network by validating the
MAC address of their connected devices.

• EAP MAC enables using both MAC and EAP authentication
methods concurrently for security.

• NONE turns off all port authentication in the switch. The default is
NONE.
To select the option, use the arrow keys to highlight the System
Authentication field, step to EAP, PWA, MAC, EAP MAC, or
NONE using the SPACE bar, then press ENTER.
Port #
(Read-Only)

See the port numbers of all ports known to the device. Up to 10 ports
can be displayed at a time. To see additional ports, select NEXT and
press ENTER to display the authentication type and status for the next
10 ports.

Authentication Type
(Read-Only)

See the authentication type configured for each port: EAP, PWA,
MAC, EAP MAC, or NONE.

Authentication
Status
(Read-Only)

See whether the port is authenticated for the chosen authentication
type. Status is Authenticated, EAP Authenticated, MAC
Authenticated, or Unauthenticated.

3-38

Accessing Local Management

EAP (Port) Configuration Screen

3.12 EAP (PORT) CONFIGURATION SCREEN
When to Use
To configure authentication settings for each port.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the EAP CONFIGURATION menu item on the Security Menu
screen and press ENTER. The EAP Port Configuration screen, Figure 3-13, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-13

EAP Port Configuration Screen

Port Authentication Backend Port
Initialize
Force
Maximum
State
State
Control
Port
Reauth Requests
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
2 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
3 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
4 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
5 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
6 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
7 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
8 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
9 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]
10 initialize
idle
[Auto]
[FALSE] [FALSE]
[2]

SAVE

NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
37831_03

Accessing Local Management

3-39

EAP (Port) Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-11 for a functional description of each screen field.
.

Table 3-11

EAP Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port
(Read-Only)

See the port number of all ports known to the device. Up to 10 ports
can be displayed as a time. Highlight NEXT and press ENTER to
display the next set of ports.

Authentication State
(Read-Only)

See the current authentication state of each port.
These following nine described states are the possible internal states
for the authenticator. Some states are simply pass-through states
causing a small action and immediately moving to a new state.
Therefore, not all states can be observed for this interface.
• initialize: A port is in the initialize state when:
a. EAP authentication is disabled,
b. EAP authentication is enabled and the port is not linked, or
c. EAP authentication is enabled and the port is linked. (In this case
very little time is spent in this state, it immediately transitions to
the connecting state, via disconnected.
• disconnected: The port passes through this state on its way to
connected whenever the port is reinitialized, via link state change,
reauthentication failure, or management intervention.
• connecting: While in this state, the authenticator sends request/ID
messages to the supplicant.
• authenticating: The port enters this state from connecting after
receiving a response/ID from the supplicant. It remains in this state
until the entire authentication exchange between the supplicant and
the authentication server completes.
• authenticated: The port enters this state from authenticating state
after the exchange completes with a favorable result. It remains in
this state until linkdown, logoff, or until a reauthentication begins.

3-40

Accessing Local Management

EAP (Port) Configuration Screen

Table 3-11

EAP Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Authentication State
(Cont’d)

• aborting: The port enters this state from authenticating when any
event occurs that interrupts the login exchange.
• held: After any login failure, this state is entered where the port
remains for the number of seconds equal to quietPeriod (can be set
using mib).
• forceAuth: Management has set this in “Port Control”. This allows
normal, unsecured switching on this port.
• forceUnauth: Management has set this in “Port Control”.
Absolutely no frames are forwarded to or from this port.

Backend State
(Read-Only)

See the current backend state of each port.
The backend state machine controls the protocol interaction between
the authenticator (the switch) and the authentication server (typically a
radius server).
These following seven states are the possible internal states for the
authenticator. Some states are simply pass-through states causing a
small action and immediately moving to a new state. Therefore, you
may not observe all of the states in this interface.
For more detail, please see the IEEE Standard 802.1X-20001, Port
Based Network Access Control.
• request: The port has received a request from the server and is
waiting for a response from the supplicant.
• response: The port has received a response from the server and is
waiting for either another request or an accept or reject from the
server.
• success: The port has received a success from the server. Send a
success to the supplicant and move to idle.
• fail: The port has received a reject from the server. Send a fail to the
supplicant and move to idle.
• timeout: The port has timed-out during the authentication exchange.

Accessing Local Management

3-41

EAP (Port) Configuration Screen

Table 3-11

EAP Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Backend State
(Cont’d)

• idle: The port is currently not involved in any authentication, but is
ready to begin one. Move to idle after completion.
• initialize: The port is initializing the relevant backend variables and
is not ready to begin an authentication. Move to idle after
completion.

Port Control
(Selectable)

Set the port control mode enabling network access for each port.
Modes include:
• Auto: In this mode, frames are forwarded according to the
authentication state of each port. When no default policy has been
applied to the port, and its authentication state is unauthorized, the
port discards all incoming and outgoing frames. If a default policy is
applied to the port and its authentication state is unauthorized,
frames are forwarded according to the configuration specified for
that policy.
Once authorized, a port forwards frames according to its current
configuration. A policy string may be returned by the Radius Server
in the filter id attribute. This policy string can reference a set of
VLAN and priority classification rules pre-configured in the switch.
If a policy string is returned as part of the user authorization process,
then frames are forwarded according to the configuration specified
by that policy.
If no policy is returned, the switch forwards frames using the
existing default policy configuration, if it exists, or the current
configuration for the port if no default policy exists. If the default
policy is used, then we interpret that default policy to now be active
on the controlled port. Although continuing to use the default policy
after authorization may be a legal configuration, there are no
practical uses.
If a policy string is returned that has no definition in the switch, then
this is an illegal configuration and the port is not authenticated.
Therefore frame forwarding in this case follows the rules outlined
above for an unauthorized port.

3-42

Accessing Local Management

EAP (Port) Configuration Screen

Table 3-11

EAP Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Port Control
(Cont’d)

• Forced Authenticated Mode: The Forced Authenticated Mode is
meant to disable authentication on a port. It is intended for ports that
support ISLs and devices that cannot authenticate, such as printers
and file servers. If a default policy is applied to the port via the Policy
Profile MIB, then frames are forwarded according to the
configuration set by that policy, otherwise frames are forwarded
according to the current configuration for that port. Authentication
using 802.1X is not possible on a port in this mode.
• Forced Unauthenticated Mode: When a port is set to the Forced
Unauthenticated Mode, all frames received on the port are discarded
by a filter. Authentication using 802.1X is not possible on a port in
this mode.

Initialized Port
(Single Setting)

Set to TRUE to initialize all state machines for this port. After
initialization, authentication can proceed normally on this port
according to its control settings. This has the effect of kicking off any
currently authorized user on the port and resetting the session
information for a new login.
You can only set this field to TRUE to initialize the port. Afterwards
the field immediately reverts to FALSE.

Force Reauth
(Single Setting)

Set to TRUE to cause an immediate forced reauthentication for a user
who is currently logged on to the port. If the reauthentication fails, then
the user is forced off the port. If there is no user on the port, a setting of
TRUE of this variable has no effect. Setting this variable to FALSE has
no effect.

Maximum
Requirements
(Modifiable)

Set the maximum number of times EAP request frames will be
transmitted to the supplicant before timeout. Default is 2; range is
1 to 10.

Accessing Local Management

3-43

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

3.13 EAP STATISTICS MENU SCREEN
Screen Navigation Path
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Security Menu > EAP Statistics
Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Security Menu > EAP Statistics Menu

When to Use
To access the EAP Session Statistics, EAP Authenticator Statistics, and EAP Diagnostic Statistics
screens.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the EAP STATISTICS menu item on the Security Menu screen
and press ENTER. The EAP Statistics Menu screen, Figure 3-14, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-14

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

EAP SESSION STATISTICS
EAP AUTHENTICATOR STATISTICS
EAP DIAGNOSTIC STATISTICS

EXIT

RETURN
3783 04

3-44

Accessing Local Management

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-12 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 3-12

EAP Statistics Menu Screen Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

EAP SESSION
STATISTICS

Used to review and clear EAP session statistics for each port. For
details, refer to Section 3.13.1.

EAP
AUTHENTICATOR
STATISTICS

Used to review authenticator statistics for each port, including EAP
frame types received and transmitted, and frame version number and
source MAC address. For details, refer to Section 3.13.2.

EAP DIAGNOSTIC
STATISTICS

Used to view port counters useful for EAP troubleshooting, including
logoffs and timeouts while authenticating, and to view authorization
failure messages from the authentication server. For details, refer to
Section 3.13.3.

Accessing Local Management

3-45

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

3.13.1 EAP Session Statistics Screen
When to Use
To review and clear EAP session statistics for each port.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the EAP SESSION STATISTICS menu item on the EAP
Statistics Menu screen and press ENTER. The EAP Session Statistics screen, Figure 3-15,
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-15

EAP Session Statistics Screen

SessionID: (1, 00-00-00-00-00-00)
SessionOctetsRx:
0
SessionOctetsTx:
0
SessionFramesRx:
0
SessionFramesTx:
0
Session Authenticate Method: remote Authentication Server
Session Time:
00 days 00:00:00
Session Terminate Cause: port failure
Session User Name:

Port Number: [ 1]

CLEAR COUNTERS

EXIT

RETURN
3783_05

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-13 for a functional description of each screen field.

3-46

Accessing Local Management

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

Table 3-13

EAP Session Statistics Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

SessionID
(Read-Only)

See the unique ASCII string identifier for a particular session.

SessionOctetsRx
(Read-Only)

See counts of user data octets received on the port during a particular
session.

SessionOctetsTx
(Read-Only)

See counts of octets of transmitted on the port during a particular
session.

SessionFramesRx
(Read-Only)

See counts of user data received on the port during a particular session.

SessionFramesTx
(Read-Only)

See counts of user data frames transmitted on the port during a
particular session.

Session
Authenticate
Method
(Read-Only)

See whether the session was established by a remote Authentication
Server or a local Authentication Server.

Session Time
(Read-Only)

See the amount of time a session has been active in days, hours,
minutes, and seconds.

Session Terminate
Cause
(Read-Only)

See which of the following reasons ended the session:
• Supplicant Logoff: End user logged off.
• port failure: Authentication port failed.
• Supplicant Restart: End user restarted session.
• Reauthentication Failed: A previously authenticated Supplicant
has failed to re-authenticate successfully following timeout of the
reauthentication timer or explicit reauthentication.
• authControlForce Unauth: Port forced to unauthorize mode by
network manager.
• portReInit: Port reinitialized.
• portAdminDisabled: Port disabled.
• notTerminatedYet: Session still active.

Accessing Local Management

3-47

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

Table 3-13

EAP Session Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Session User Name
(Read-Only)

See the user name associated with the PAE (Point of Access Entity).

Port Number
(Selectable)

Select the port number to display the associated EAP Session Statistics.
To select a port number, use the arrow keys to highlight the Port
Number field. Then step to the correct port number using the SPACE
bar and press ENTER to display the associated port EAP Session
Statistics.

CLEAR
COUNTERS
(Command)

Set the octets and frame counters to zero for a particular port. To clear
the counters, highlight CLEAR COUNTERS and press ENTER.
NOTE: This command clears the counters for this LM
screen, but it does not clear the associated MIB objects.

3.13.2 EAP Authenticator Statistics Screen
When to Use
To review authenticator statistics for each port, including EAP frame types received and
transmitted, and frame version number and source MAC address. This screen refreshes counters
data automatically.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the EAP AUTHENTICATOR STATISTICS menu item on the
EAP Statistics Menu screen and press ENTER. The EAP Authenticator Statistics screen,
Figure 3-16, displays.

3-48

Accessing Local Management

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

Screen Example
Figure 3-16

EAP Authenticator Statistics Screen

Total Frames Rx:
Total Frames Tx:
Start Frames Rx:
Logoff Frames Rx:
Response Id Frames Rx:
Response Frames Rx:
Request Id Frames Tx:
Request Frames Tx:
Invalid Frames Rx:
Length Error Frames Rx:

Port Number: [ 1]

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Frame Version:
Frame Source:

CLEAR COUNTERS

EXIT

0
00-00-00-00-00-00

RETURN
3783_06

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-14 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-14

EAP Authenticator Statistics Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Total Frames Rx
(Read-Only)

See counts of all EAP frames received by the authenticator.

Total Frames Tx
(Read-Only)

See counts of all EAP frames transmitted by the authenticator.

Start Frames Rx
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP start type frames received by the authenticator.

Logoff Frames Rx
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP logoff type frames received by the authenticator.

Accessing Local Management

3-49

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

Table 3-14

EAP Authenticator Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Response Id Frames
Rx
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP response identification type frames received by the
authenticator.

Response Frames
Rx
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP response type frames received by the authenticator.

Request Id Frames
Tx
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP request identification type frames transmitted by the
authenticator.

Request Frames Tx
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP request identification type frames transmitted by the
authenticator.

Invalid Frames Rx
(Read-Only)

See counts of frames received by the authenticator that have an
unrecognizable frame type.

Length Error
Frames Rx
(Read-Only)

See counts of frames received by the authenticator with an invalid
length field for the frame body,

Frame Version
(Read-Only)

See the EAP protocol version present in the most recent EAP frame.

Frame Source
(Read-Only)

See the source MAC address for the most recent EAP frame received.

Port Number
(Selectable)

Select the port number to display the associated EAP Authenticator
Statistics. To select a port number, use the arrow keys to highlight the
Port Number field. Then step to the correct port number using the
SPACE bar and press ENTER to display the associated port EAP
Authenticator Statistics.

CLEAR
COUNTERS
(Command)

Set the octets and frame counters to zero for a particular port. To clear
the counters, highlight CLEAR COUNTERS and press ENTER.

3-50

NOTE: This command clears the counters for this LM
screen, but it does not clear the associated MIB objects.

Accessing Local Management

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

3.13.3 EAP Diagnostic Statistics Screen
When to Use
To view port counters useful for EAP troubleshooting, including logoffs and timeouts while
authenticating, and to view authorization failure messages from the authentication server. The
counters on this screen refresh automatically.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the EAP DIAGNOSTIC STATISTICS menu item on the EAP
Statistics Menu screen and press ENTER. The EAP Diagnostic Statistics screen, Figure 3-17,
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 3-17

EAP Diagnostic Statistics Screen

Enters Connecting:
Logoffs Connecting:
Enters Authenticating:
Success Authenticating:
Timeouts Authenticating:
Fail Authenticating:
Reauths Authenticating:
Starts Authenticating:
Logoffs Authenticating:
Reauths Authenticated:
Starts Authenticated:
Logoffs Authenticated:
Port Number: [ 1]

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

------ Backend Statistics
Responses:
Access Challenges:
Other Requests To Supp:
Non-NAK resp From Supp:
Auth Successes:
Auth Failures:

CLEAR COUNTERS

EXIT

-----0
0
0
0
0
0

RETURN
3783_07

Accessing Local Management

3-51

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-15 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-15

EAP Diagnostic Statistics Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Enters Connecting
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions to connecting state from any other state.

Logoffs Connecting
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from connecting to disconnected state after an
EAPOL logoff message. EAPOL is an encapsulation of the EAP
protocol, plus some extra data fields, within a LAN frame.

Enters
Authenticating
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from connecting to authenticating state after an
EAP Respld message is received from the supplicant (end-user
requesting authentication).

Success
Authenticating
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticating to authenticated state after
backend authentication has a successful authentication with the
supplicant (end-user requesting authentication).

Timeouts
Authenticating
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticating to aborting state due to
backend authentication timing out.

Fail Authenticating
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticating to held state due to
backend authentication failure.

Reauths
Authenticating
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticating to aborting state due to
reauthentication requests.

Starts
Authenticating
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticating to aborting state due to a
start from the supplicant (end-user requesting authentication).

Logoffs
Authenticating
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticating to aborting state due to a
logoff message from the supplicant (end-user requesting
authentication).

3-52

Accessing Local Management

EAP Statistics Menu Screen

Table 3-15

EAP Diagnostic Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Reauths
Authenticated
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticated to connecting state due to a
reauthentication request.

Starts
Authenticated
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticated to connecting state due to a
start from the supplicant (end-user requesting authentication).

Logoffs
Authenticated
(Read-Only)

See counts of transitions from authenticating to disconnected state due
to a logoff message from the supplicant (end-user requesting
authentication).

Backend Statistics:
Responses
(Read-Only)

See counts of initial access-request frames to the authentication server.

Access Challenges
(Read-Only)

See counts of initial access-challenge frames to the authentication server.

Other Requests To
Supp
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP request frames transmitted that are not EAP
notification, failure or success-type messages. This frame count
indicates that the authenticator picked an EAP method.

Non-NAK resp
From Supp
(Read-Only)

See counts of initial responses to an EAP request from the supplicant
(end-user requesting authentication). Count does not include EAP-NAK
frames. This count indicates that the supplicant can communicate with
the chosen EAP method.

Auth Successes
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP success messages from the authentication server.
Indicates that the supplicant is successfully authenticated.

Auth Failures
(Read-Only)

See counts of EAP failure messages from the authentication server.
Indicates that the supplicant is not authenticated.

Port Number
(Selectable)

Select the port number to display the associated EAP Diagnostic
Statistics. To select a port number, use the arrow keys to highlight the
Port Number field. Then step to the correct port number using the
SPACE bar and press ENTER to display the associated port EAP
Diagnostic Statistics.

Accessing Local Management

3-53

MAC Port Configuration Screen

Table 3-15

EAP Diagnostic Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

CLEAR
COUNTERS
(Command)

Set the octets and frame counters to zero for a particular port. To clear
the counters, use the arrow keys to highlight CLEAR COUNTERS and
press ENTER.
NOTE: This command clears the counters for this LM screen,
but it does not clear the associated MIB objects.

3.14 MAC PORT CONFIGURATION SCREEN
When to Use
To display the authentication state of the supplicant associated with each port, enable or disable the
authentication function, initialize authentication status, and force a revalidation of the MAC
credential on a per port basis.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the MAC PORT CONFIGURATION menu item on the Security
Menu screen and press ENTER. The MAC Port Configuration screen, Figure 3-18, displays.

3-54

Accessing Local Management

MAC Port Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 3-18

MAC Port Configuration Screen

Port

Authentication
Port
Initialize
Force
State
Enable
Port
Reauth
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
authenticated
[Enabled]
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
2
authenticated
[Disabled] [FALSE]
[FALSE]
3
unauthenticated
[Enabled]
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
4
unauthenticated
[Enabled]
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
5
authenticated
[Enabled]
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
6
authenticated
[Enabled]
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
7
authenticated
[Enabled]
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
8
authenticated
[Enabled]
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
9
authenticated
[Enabled]
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
SET ALL PORTS:
SAVE

PREVIOUS

[Enabled]
NEXT

[FALSE]
EXIT

[FALSE]
RETURN
35281_21

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-16 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-16

MAC Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port #
(Read-Only)

See the port numbers of all ports known to the device. Up to 9 ports can
be displayed at a time. To see additional ports, select NEXT and press
ENTER to display the authentication type and status for the next 10
ports.

Authentication State
(Read-Only)

See the current state of the MAC Authentication of a port supplicant. If
a supplicant is currently active, on that port, then authenticated is
displayed in this field, otherwise unauthenticated is displayed.

Port Enable
(Toggle)

Enable or disable MAC authentication for a given port.

Accessing Local Management

3-55

MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen

Table 3-16 MAC Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)
Use this field…

To…

Initialize Port
(Single Setting)

Initialize the authentication status of the port. When this field is set to
TRUE, the current authentication session is terminated, the port returns
to its initial authentication status, and the field returns to FALSE.

Force Reauth
(Single Setting)

Force the revalidation of the MAC credential for the port. When this
field is set to TRUE, revalidation is executed. When set to TRUE, the
field returns to FALSE. It always reads a value of FALSE.

SET ALL PORTS
(Command)

Set all ports in the module to the settings in the associated Port Enable,
Initialize Port, and Force Port columns.

3.15 MAC SUPPLICANT CONFIGURATION SCREEN
When to Use
To determine the active MAC Authentication supplicants on the module and perform limited
configuration on these supplicants, which includes initializing the supplicant and reauthenticating
the supplicant.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the MAC SUPPLICANT CONFIGURATION menu item on the
Security Menu screen and press ENTER. The MAC Supplicant Configuration screen, Figure 3-19,
displays.

3-56

Accessing Local Management

MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 3-19

MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen

Port

Duration
MAC
Initialize
Reauthenticate
(dd:hh:mm:ss)
Address
Supplicant
Supplicant
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
00:12:23:58
nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn
[FALSE]
[FALSE]
2
54:02:56:00
nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn
[FALSE]
[FALSE]

SAVE

PREVIOUS

NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
35281_93

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 3-17 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 3-17

MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port
(Read-Only)

See the port numbers of all ports known to the device. Up to 10 ports
can be displayed at a time. To see additional ports, select NEXT and
press ENTER to display the authentication type and status for the next
10 ports.

Duration
(Read Only)

See the time in days:hours:minutes:seconds that an active supplicant is
logged on via the port.

MAC Address
(Read Only)

See the ASCII value of the MAC address for each active supplicant
associated with a port.

Accessing Local Management

3-57

MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen

Table 3-17 MAC Supplicant Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)
Use this field…

To…

Initialize Supplicant
(Single Setting)

Terminate the current session with a supplicant. When set to TRUE,
the current session is terminated. It always displays a value of FALSE.

Reauthenticate
Supplicant
(Single Setting)

Force a revalidation of the MAC credential for the supplicant. When set
to TRUE, the switch forces the revalidation. It always displays a value
of FALSE.

3-58

Accessing Local Management

4
Chassis Menu Screens

NOTE: The screens described in this chapter apply only to the 6C105 chassis.

This chapter provides the information to access the following:

• Chassis Configuration screen to set the chassis operating parameters (Section 4.2),
• SNMP Configuration Menu screen and its menu items to access other screens to modify the
SNMP community names and set SNMP traps (Section 4.3),

• Chassis Environmental Information screen to monitor the power supply status, power supply
redundancy status, and the fan tray status (Section 4.6), or

• Redirect Configuration Menu screen and its menu items to access other screens to configure the
chassis to redirect traffic from a source switch port to a destination switch port, or redirect traffic
from a VLAN to a particular switch port (Section 4.7).

Screen Navigation Path
For 6C105 chassis only:
Password > Main Menu > Chassis Menu

Chassis Menu Screens

4-1

Chassis Menu Screen

4.1

CHASSIS MENU SCREEN

When to Use
To access the Local Management screens that allow you to configure and monitor operating
parameters, modify SNMP community names, set SNMP traps, monitor the chassis environmental
status, and to perform port redirect functions.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the CHASSIS menu item on the Main Menu screen and press
ENTER. The Chassis Menu screen, Figure 4-1, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 4-1 Chassis Menu Screen

CHASSIS CONFIGURATION
SNMP CONFIGURATION MENU
CHASSIS ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
REDIRECT CONFIGURATION MENU

RETURN
4046_05

4-2

Chassis Menu Screens

Chassis Menu Screen

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-1 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 4-1

Chassis Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

CHASSIS
CONFIGURATION

Allows the user to configure operating parameters for the chassis. For
details, refer to Section 4.2.

SNMP
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Used to access the SNMP Community Names Configuration screen
and the SNMP Traps Configuration screen. These screens are used to
modify SNMP community names and set SNMP traps. For details,
refer to Section 4.3.

CHASSIS
ENVIRONMENTAL
INFORMATION

Provides access to chassis power supply status, power supply
redundancy status and chassis fan tray status. For details, refer to
Section 4.6.

REDIRECT
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Provides access to the Port Redirect Configuration and VLAN
Redirect Configuration screens. For details, refer to Section 4.7.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-3

Chassis Configuration Screen

4.2

CHASSIS CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To set the chassis date and time, IP address and Subnet Mask, the operational mode of all modules
installed in the chassis, view the chassis uptime, screen refresh time and lockout time, and view the
chassis uptime.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the CHASSIS CONFIGURATION menu item on the Chassis
Menu screen and press ENTER. The Chassis Configuration screen, Figure 4-2, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 4-2

Chassis Configuration Screen

MAC Address:

00-00-ID-00-00-00

Chassis Date:

02/11/1999

IP Address:

0.0.0.0

Chassis Time:

14:23:00

Subnet Mask:

0.0.0.0

Screen Refresh Time:

30 sec.

15 min.
Screen Lockout Time:
Chassis Uptime XX D XX H XX M

SAVE

EXIT

RETURN
4046_41

4-4

Chassis Menu Screens

Chassis Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-2 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 4-2

Chassis Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

MAC Address
(Read-Only)

Display the base physical address of the chassis.

IP Address
(Modifiable)

Set the IP address for the chassis. If an IP address is assigned to the
chassis, all the interface modules installed in the chassis can be
managed via this IP address, eliminating the need to assign an IP
address to each interface module. To set the IP address, refer to
Section 4.2.1.

Subnet Mask
(Modifiable)

Display the subnet mask for the chassis. A subnet mask “masks out”
the network bits of the IP address by setting the bits in the mask to 1
when the network treats the corresponding bits in the IP address as part
of the network or subnetwork address, or to 0 if the corresponding bit
identifies the host. The chassis automatically uses the default subnet
mask that corresponds to the IP class that was entered in the IP address
field. Section 4.2.2 describes how to change the subnet mask from
default.

Chassis Date
(Modifiable)

Set the value that the chassis recognizes as the current date. When the
chassis date is modified and saved all interface modules installed in the
chassis are set to this date. To set a new chassis date, refer to
Section 4.2.3.

Chassis Time
(Modifiable)

Set the value that the chassis recognizes as the current time. When the
chassis time is modified and saved, all interface modules installed in
the chassis are set to this time. To enter a new time, refer to
Section 4.2.4.

Screen Refresh
Time
(Modifiable)

Set the rate at which the screens are updated. This setting determines
how frequently (in seconds) information is updated on the screen. To
enter a new update time, refer to Section 4.2.5.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-5

Chassis Configuration Screen

Table 4-2

Chassis Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Screen Lockout
Time
(Modifiable)

Set the maximum number of minutes that the Local Management
application displays a module’s screen while awaiting input or action
from a user. For example, if the number 5 is entered in this field, the
user has up to five minutes to respond to each of the specified module’s
Local Management screens. In this example, after five minutes of
“idleness” (no input or action), the terminal “beeps” five times, the
Local Management application terminates the session, and the display
returns to the Password screen. To enter a new lockout time, refer to
Section 4.2.6.

Chassis Uptime
(Read-Only)

Display the total time the chassis has been operating. The chassis
uptime is based on which interface module installed in the chassis has
been operating for the longest period of time.

4.2.1

Setting the IP Address

To set the IP address, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IP Address field.
2. Enter the IP address into this field using Decimal Dotted Notation (DDN) format
(nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).
3. Press ENTER. If the IP address is a valid format, the cursor returns to the beginning of the IP
address field. If the entry is not valid, the Event Message Line displays “INVALID IP
ADDRESS OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management does not alter the current value and
refreshes the IP address field with the previous value.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command, then press ENTER. The “SAVED OK”
message displays indicating that the changes have been saved to memory.

4-6

Chassis Menu Screens

Chassis Configuration Screen

4.2.2

Setting the Subnet Mask

If the management workstation that is to receive SNMP traps from the 6C105 is located on a
separate subnet, the subnet mask for the 6C105 chassis must be changed from its default.
To change the subnet mask from its default, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Subnet Mask field.
2. Enter the subnet mask into this field using Decimal Dotted Notation (DDN) format.
For example: 255.255.255.0
3. Press ENTER. If the subnet mask is valid, the cursor returns to the beginning of the Subnet
Mask field. If the entry is not valid, the Event Message Line displays “INVALID SUBNET
MASK OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management does not alter the current value, but it
does refresh the Subnet Mask field with the previous value.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command, then press ENTER. The changes are
saved to memory.

4.2.3

Setting the Chassis Date

The chassis is year 2000 compliant, so the Chassis Date may be set beyond the year 1999. To set
the chassis date, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Chassis Date field.
2. Enter the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY
NOTE: It is not necessary to add separators between month, day, and year numbers.
For example, to set the date to 06/17/2000, type “06172000” in the Chassis Date field.

3. Press ENTER to set the system calendar to the date in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER.
If the date entered is a valid format, the Event Message Line at the top of the screen displays
“SAVED OK”. If the entry is not valid, Local Management does not alter the current value, but it
does refresh the Chassis Date field with the previous value.
NOTE: Upon saving the new chassis date, all interface modules installed in the chassis
recognize the new value as the current date.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-7

Chassis Configuration Screen

4.2.4

Setting the Chassis Time

To set the chassis clock, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Chassis Time field.
2. Enter the time in this 24-hour format: HH:MM:SS
NOTE: When entering the time in the system time field, separators between hours,
minutes, and seconds do not need to be added as long as each entry uses two numeric
characters. For example, to set the time to 6:45 A.M., type “064500” in the Chassis Time
field.

3. Press ENTER to set the system clock to the time in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER.
If the time entered is a valid format, the Event Message Line at the top of the screen displays
“SAVED OK”. If the entry is not valid, Local Management does not alter the current value and
refreshes the Chassis Time field with the previous value.
NOTE: Upon saving the new chassis time, all interface modules installed in the chassis
recognize the new value as the current time.

4.2.5

Setting a New Screen Refresh Time

The screen refresh time is set from 3 to 99 seconds with a default of 3 seconds. To set a new screen
refresh time, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Screen Refresh Time field.
2. Enter a number from 3 to 99.
3. Press ENTER to set the refresh time to the time entered in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER.
If the time entered is within the 3 to 99 seconds range, the Event Message Line at the top of the
screen displays “SAVED OK”. If the entry is not valid, Local Management does not alter the
current setting, but it does refresh the Screen Refresh Time field with the previous value, and the
valid range will be displayed.

4-8

Chassis Menu Screens

Chassis Configuration Screen

4.2.6

Setting the Screen Lockout Time

The screen lockout time can be set from 1 to 30 minutes with a default of 15 minutes. To set a new
lockout time, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Screen Lockout Time field.
2. Enter a number from 1 to 30.
3. Press ENTER to set the lockout time in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER.
If the time entered is within the 1 to 30 minutes range, the Event Message Line at the top of the
screen displays “SAVED OK”. If the entry is not valid, Local Management does not alter the
current setting, but it does refresh the Screen Lockout Time field with the previous value, and the
valid range will be displayed.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-9

SNMP Configuration Menu Screen

4.3

SNMP CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN

When to Use
To access the SNMP Community Names Configuration screen and the SNMP Traps Configuration
screen. These screens are used to modify SNMP community names and set SNMP traps.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SNMP CONFIGURATION MENU item on the Chassis
Menu screen and press ENTER. The SNMP Configuration Menu screen, Figure 4-3, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 4-3

SNMP Configuration Menu Screen

SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES CONFIGURATION
SNMP TRAPS CONFIGURATION

RETURN
4046_102

4-10

Chassis Menu Screens

SNMP Configuration Menu Screen

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-3 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 4-3

SNMP Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

SNMP
COMMUNITY
NAMES
CONFIGURATION

Used to enter new, change, or review the community names used as
access passwords for module management operation. Access is limited
based on the password level of the user. For details, refer to
Section 4.4.

SNMP TRAPS
CONFIGURATION

Provides display and configuration access to the table of IP addresses
used for trap destinations and associated community names. For
details, refer to Section 4.5.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-11

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen

4.4

SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To set the Local Management community names. Community names act as passwords to
Local/Remote Management and provide security access to the chassis. Access to the chassis is
controlled by enacting any of three different levels of security authorization (read-only, read-write,
and super-user).
NOTE: Super-User access gives the user full management privileges, allows existing
passwords to be changed, and all modifiable MIB objects for the Enterasys/Cabletron
Container MIB and Internet MIB-II to be edited.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES CONFIGURATION menu
item in the SNMP Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The SNMP Community Names
Configuration screen, Figure 4-4, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 4-4

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen

SAVE

Community Name

Access Policy

public

read-only

public

read-write

public

super-user

EXIT

RETURN
4046-35

4-12

Chassis Menu Screens

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-4 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 4-4

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Community Name
(Modifiable)

Enter the user-defined name used to access chassis management. Any
community name assigned here acts as a password to Local
Management.

Access Policy
(Read-Only)

See the access given each community name. Possible selections are as
follows:

4.4.1

read-only

This community name allows read-only access to the
6C105 MIB objects, and excludes access to
security-protected fields of read-write or super-user
authorization.

read-write

This community name allows read and write access to
the 6C105 MIB objects, excluding security protected
fields for super-user access only.

super-user

This community name permits read-write access to the
6C105 MIB objects and allows the user to change all
modifiable parameters including community names, IP
addresses, traps, and SNMP objects.

Establishing Community Names

The password used to access Local Management at the Password screen must have Super-User
access in order to view and edit the SNMP Community Names Configuration screen. Using a
password with read-only or read-write access does not allow the user to view or edit the SNMP
Community Names Configuration screen.
NOTE: Any community name assigned in the SNMP Community Names Configuration
screen is a password to its corresponding level of access to Local Management. The
community name assigned Super-User access is the only one that gives the user
complete access to Local Management.
All passwords assigned in the chassis SNMP Community Names Configuration screen
allow access to both the chassis Local Management screens, and the Local
Management screens of the interface modules that are installed in the chassis. To
configure the interface module to prevent access to the chassis Local Management
screens, refer to Section 5.4.
Chassis Menu Screens

4-13

SNMP Traps Configuration Screen

To establish community names, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Community Name field adjacent to the selected access
level.
2. Enter the password in the field (maximum 31 characters).
3. Press ENTER.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to modify the other community names.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight SAVE at the bottom of the screen and press ENTER. The
message “SAVED OK” displays. The community names are saved to memory and their access
modes implemented.

4.5

SNMP TRAPS CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To configure the chassis to establish which workstations are to receive trap alarms, the trap
message to be sent to the Network Management Station, and also set the trap function to on or off
as needed. Since the 6C105 chassis is an SNMP compliant device, it can send messages to multiple
Network Management Stations to alert users of status changes.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SNMP TRAPS CONFIGURATION menu item on the
SNMP Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The SNMP Traps Configuration screen,
Figure 4-5, displays.

4-14

Chassis Menu Screens

SNMP Traps Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 4-5

SNMP Traps Configuration Screen

Trap Destination

Trap Community Name

Enable Traps

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

EXIT

SAVE

RETURN
4046-36

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-5 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 4-5

SNMP Traps Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Trap Destination
(Modifiable)

Set the IP address of the workstation to receive trap alarms. Up to eight
different destinations can be defined.

Trap Community
Name
(Modifiable)

Enter the Community Name included in the trap message sent to the
Network Management Station with the associated IP address.

Enable Traps
(Toggle)

Enable transmissions of the trap to the network management station
with the associated IP address. This field toggles between YES
and NO.
Chassis Menu Screens

4-15

Chassis Environmental Information Screen

4.5.1

Configuring the Trap Table

To configure the Trap table, proceed as follows:
1. Using the arrow keys, highlight the appropriate Trap Destination field.
2. Enter the IP Address of the workstation that is to receive traps. IP address entries must follow
the DDN format (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).
3. Press ENTER. If an invalid entry is entered “INVALID IP ENTERED” is displayed in the
Event Message Line.
4. Using the arrow keys, highlight the Trap Community Name field. Enter the community name.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Using the arrow keys, highlight the Enable Traps field. Press the SPACE bar to choose either
YES (send alarms from the chassis to the workstation), or NO (prevent alarms from being sent).
7. Using the arrow keys, highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER. The message “SAVED
OK” displays on the screen. The designated workstations now receive traps from the 6C105
chassis.
NOTE: Exiting without saving causes a “NOT SAVED?” message to display in the Event
Message Field. Edits will be lost if they are not saved before exiting.

4.6

CHASSIS ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION SCREEN

When to Use
To view the current chassis environmental information concerning the redundancy status of the
chassis power supplies, and the operating status of the power supplies and the fans in the chassis
fan tray.

How to Access
To access the Chassis Environmental Information screen, use the arrow keys to highlight the
CHASSIS ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION menu item on the Chassis Menu screen and
press ENTER. The Chassis Environmental Information screen, Figure 4-6, displays.

4-16

Chassis Menu Screens

Chassis Environmental Information Screen

Screen Example
Figure 4-6

Chassis Environmental Information Screen

Chassis Power Redundancy

Not Available

Power Supply #1 Status

Normal

Power Supply #2 Status

Not Installed

Chassis Fan Status

Normal

EXIT

RETURN
4046_37

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-6 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 4-6

Chassis Environmental Information Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Chassis Power
Redundancy
(Read-Only)

Display the current redundancy status of the chassis power supplies.
This field will read either “Available” or “Not Available”.

Power Supply #X
Status (Read-Only)

Display the current status of the chassis power supplies 1 and 2. This
field will read either “Normal”, “Fault”, or “Not Installed”.

Chassis Fan Status
(Read-Only)

Display the current status of the chassis fan tray. This field will read
either “Normal”, “Fault”, or “Not Installed”.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-17

Redirect Configuration Menu Screen (Chassis)

4.7

REDIRECT CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN (CHASSIS)

When to Use
To access the Port Redirect Configuration and VLAN Redirect Configuration screens at the chassis
level. Any combination, up to 128, of port and/or VLAN redirect instances can be configured per
installed module, giving a maximum of 640 instances for a chassis with 5 modules. Up to 24
instances per module can be configured as remote instances to other modules in the chassis.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the REDIRECT CONFIGURATION MENU item on the
Chassis Menu screen, and press ENTER. The Redirect Configuration Menu screen (Figure 4-7)
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 4-7

Redirect Configuration Menu Screen

PORT REDIRECT CONFIGURATION
VLAN REDIRECT CONFIGURATION

EXIT

RETURN
4046_94

4-18

Chassis Menu Screens

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-7 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 4-7

Redirect Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

PORT REDIRECT
CONFIGURATION

Used to redirect traffic from a source switch port to a destination
switch port. For details, refer to Section 4.8.

VLAN REDIRECT
CONFIGURATION

Used to configure the device to direct traffic from a VLAN to a
particular switch port. This screen will not display if the chassis has no
modules in 802.1Q mode. For details, refer to Section 4.9.

4.8

PORT REDIRECT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To select a source module and port as well as a destination module and port to add a new Port
Redirect or to delete an existing one. Source and destination ports can only be used in one redirect
instance, and only installed and available modules and ports will appear in the selectable fields.
Frames received on the source port can be redirected in a particular frame format, and any frames
with errors can be either dropped or forwarded to the destination port. For example, port 1 can be
set as the source port with port 2 as the destination port. Frames from port 1 are then automatically
redirected to port 2 according to a particular frame format, and frames with errors can be either
forwarded or dropped according to the screen settings.
The port redirect function is extremely useful for troubleshooting purposes, as it allows traffic to
be sent to a particular port where, with the use of an analyzer or RMON probe, all current traffic
from the source port can be examined.
NOTE: Although all traffic from the source port (including, if desired, errored frames) is
sent to the destination port, normal switching is still performed for all frames on the
source port.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the PORT REDIRECT CONFIGURATION menu item on the
Redirect Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Port Redirect Configuration screen,
Figure 4-8, displays.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-19

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 4-8

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

Destination
------------------------

Source
---------------------Module

Module

Port

Frame Format
--------------------

Redirect Errors
--------------------

Port

1

1

2

1

NORMAL

ON

1

2

2

2

TAGGED

ON

1

3

2

3

UNTAGGED

ON

1

4

2

4

NORMAL

ON

1

5

2

5

NORMAL

ON

1

6

2

6

NORMAL

ON

1

7

2

7

NORMAL

ON

1

8

2

8

NORMAL

ON

Src Port

[ 2]

Src Module [ 1 ]
SAVE

Dest Port

[ 16 ]

Dest Module [ 2 ]
PREVIOUS

Frame Format

[UNTAGGED]

Status [DELETE]

Redirect Errors [OFF]
NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
RETURN
4046_26

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-8 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 4-8

Port Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Source Module
(Read-Only)

See which modules are currently set as source modules.

Source Port
(Read-only)

See which ports are currently set as source ports.

Destination Module
(Read-Only)

See which modules are currently set as destination modules.

Destination Port
(Read-only)

See which ports are currently set as destination ports. Only one
destination port may be assigned to a source port.

4-20

Chassis Menu Screens

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

Table 4-8

Port Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Frame Format
(Read-Only)

See the current frame format setting: NORMAL, TAGGED, or
UNTAGGED. The default is NORMAL.

• NORMAL – Frames are redirected in the format that they were
received or transmitted on the source port.

• TAGGED – Frames are transmitted on the destination port with a
VLAN tag inserted according to the frame classification.

• UNTAGGED – Frames are transmitted on the destination port
without a VLAN tag regardless of the format of the received frame.
Redirect Errors
(Read-Only)

See whether the corresponding source ports are configured ON to send
frames with errors to the destination ports, or OFF to drop all frames
with errors and only forward traffic without errored frames to the
destination ports. All redirected error frames display in the way they
were received or transmitted on the source port, regardless of the frame
format setting.

NOTE: See Section 4.8.1 for directions on how to change the settings for the
following fields.

Src Port [n]
(Selectable)

Select the port [n] that is to be changed to a source port. If a port is
currently being redirected, it will not display as a selectable port.

Src Module [n]
(Selectable)

Select the module [n] that is to be changed to a source module.

Dest Port [n]
(Selectable)

Select the port [n] that is to be changed to a destination port. If a port is
currently being redirected, it will not display as a selectable port.

Dest Module [n]
(Selectable)

Select the module [n] that is to be changed to a destination module.

Frame Format
(Selectable)

Select the frame format for the transmission of redirected frames on the
destination port. NORMAL, TAGGED, or UNTAGGED may be
selected. Refer to the previously described read-only Frame Format
field for details about each format. The default setting is NORMAL.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-21

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

Table 4-8

Port Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Redirect Errors
(Toggle)

Set each source port to either ON, to send errored frames to its
destination port, or OFF to drop errored frames, and send only valid
traffic to its destination port. The default setting is OFF.

Status
(Toggle)

Add or delete source and destination ports selected in the Source Port
[n] and Destination Port [n] fields.

4.8.1

Changing Source and Destination Ports

To add or delete source port and destination port entries and set the Frame Format and Redirect
Errors functions, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Src Port field near the bottom of the screen.
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key one or more times to increment or decrement the
port number displayed in the brackets [n] until the appropriate port number displays.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Src Module field near the bottom of the screen.
4. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the appropriate module number for the
destination module.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Dest Port field near the bottom of the screen.
6. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key one or more times to increment or decrement the
port number displayed in the brackets [n] until the appropriate port number displays.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Dest Module field near the bottom of the screen.
8. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the appropriate module number for the
destination module.
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Frame Format field near the bottom of the screen.
10. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the appropriate frame format setting
(NORMAL, TAGGED, or UNTAGGED) for the selected Destination Port.
11. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Redirect Errors field near the bottom of the screen.
12. Use the SPACE bar to select either the ON or OFF option and press ENTER. ON forces the
source port to forward errored frames to the destination port(s). OFF forces the errors to be
dropped before forwarding traffic.
13. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Status field.

4-22

Chassis Menu Screens

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

14. Use the SPACE bar to select either the ADD or DELETE option. Press ENTER. This adds or
deletes the selections for the Source Port, Destination Port, Frame Format, and Redirect Errors
made in steps 1 through 12 and also updates the screen.
TIP: If more than one port is being redirected, repeat steps 1 through 14 for each
additional setting. Then go to step 15 to save all the new settings at once.
If an entry is to be changed, delete the entry, save the screen, then recreate the entry
with its new settings.
Any combination of port redirect instances (configured on the Port Redirect
Configuration screen) and/or VLAN redirect instances (configured on the VLAN Redirect
Configuration screen) can be configured, up to 128 instances total per module. A
maximum of 640 instances can be configured on a fully loaded (5 module) chassis. Up
to 24 instances can be configured as remote instances to other modules in the chassis.
Remote instances are instances that are mapped from one module to another within the
same chassis.

15. Use the arrow keys to highlight SAVE at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER. The message
“SAVED OK” displays. This saves the new settings and updates the Source Port and Module,
and the Destination Port and Module read-only fields.

4.9

VLAN REDIRECT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To select a source module and VLAN ID and a destination module and port as well to add a new
VLAN Redirect or delete an existing one. For example, VLAN ID 1 can be set as the source
VLAN ID with port 2 as the destination port. Traffic from VLAN 1 is then automatically
redirected to port 2 according to the Frame Format setting for that source VLAN. The Frame
Format setting determines the format in which the frames received belonging to the source VLAN
are redirected to the destination port. The frames can be forwarded in the frame format as received,
tagged, or untagged.
The VLAN redirect function is very useful for troubleshooting purposes, as it allows traffic
associated with a particular VLAN to be sent to a particular port where, with the use of an analyzer
or RMON probe, all current traffic from the source VLAN can be examined.
NOTE: Although traffic associated with a particular VLAN is sent to the destination port,
normal switching is still performed for all frames on the source port.
The Redirect Errors function is not supported on this screen.

Chassis Menu Screens

4-23

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN REDIRECT CONFIGURATION menu item on the
Redirect Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The VLAN Redirect Configuration
screen, Figure 4-9, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 4-9

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

Destination
------------------------

Source
---------------------Module

Module

VLAN ID

Redirect Errors
--------------------

Frame Format
--------------------

Port

1

1

2

1

NORMAL

ON

1

2

2

2

TAGGED

ON

1

3

2

3

UNTAGGED

ON

1

4

2

4

NORMAL

ON

1

5

2

5

NORMAL

ON

1

6

2

6

NORMAL

ON

1

7

2

7

NORMAL

ON

1

8

2

8

NORMAL

ON

Src VLAN ID

[ 2 ]

Dest Port

Src Module

[ 1 ]

Dest Module [ 2 ]

SAVE

[ 2 ]

PREVIOUS

Frame Format [UNTAGGED]

Status [ADD]

Redirect Errors UNSUPPORTED
NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
RETURN
4046_27

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 4-9 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 4-9

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Source Module
(Read-Only)

See which modules are currently set as source modules.

Source VLAN ID
(Read-Only)

See the VLAN ID of the VLANs that are currently set as source
VLANs.

4-24

Chassis Menu Screens

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

Table 4-9

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Destination Module
(Read-Only)

See which modules are currently set as destination modules.

Destination Port
(Read-Only)

See which ports are currently set as destination ports. Multiple
VLAN IDs may be assigned to a destination port.

Frame Format
(Read-Only)

Display the current frame format setting: RECEIVED, TAGGED, or
UNTAGGED. The default is RECEIVED.

• RECEIVED – Frames are redirected in the format that they were
received by the switch module.

• TAGGED – Frames are transmitted on the destination port with a
VLAN tag inserted according to the frame classification of the
receiving port.

• UNTAGGED – Frames are transmitted on the destination port
without a VLAN tag regardless of the format of the received frame.
NOTE: See Section 4.9.1 to change the settings in the following fields.

Src VLAN ID [n]
(Modifiable)

Enter the VLAN ID of the VLAN that is to be redirected to a port. A
VLAN can not be redirected to more than one port at a time.

Src Module [n]
(Selectable)

Select the module [n] that is to be changed to a source module.

Dest Port [n]
(Selectable)

Select the port [n] that is to be changed to a destination port. If a port is
currently being redirected, it will not display as a selectable port.

Dest Module [n]
(Selectable)

Select the module [n] that is to be changed to a destination module.

Frame Format
(Selectable)

Select the frame format for the transmission of redirected frames on the
destination port. RECEIVED, TAGGED, or UNTAGGED may be
selected. Refer to the previously described read-only Frame Format
field for details about each format. The default setting is RECEIVED.

Redirect Errors

Unsupported (only valid frames can be classified into a VLAN).

Status
(Toggle)

Add or delete source and destination ports selected in the Source
VLAN [n] and Destination Port [n] fields.
Chassis Menu Screens

4-25

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

4.9.1

Changing Source VLAN and Destination Ports

To add or delete source VLAN and destination port entries and set the Frame Format and Redirect
Errors functions, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Src VLAN ID field near the bottom of the screen.
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key one or more times to increment or decrement the
VLAN ID number displayed in the brackets [n] until the desired VLAN ID number displays.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Src Module field near the bottom of the screen.
4. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the desired module number for the
destination module.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Dest Port field near the bottom of the screen.
6. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key one or more times to increment or decrement the
port number displayed in the brackets [n] until the desired VLAN ID number displays.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Dest Module field near the bottom of the screen.
8. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the desired module number for the
destination module.
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Frame Format field near the bottom of the screen.
10. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the desired frame format setting
(RECEIVED, TAGGED, or UNTAGGED) for the selected Destination Port.
11. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Status field.
12. Use the SPACE bar to select either the ADD or DELETE option. Press ENTER. This adds or
deletes the selections for the Source VLAN, Destination Port, and Frame Format made in steps
1 through 10 and also updates the screen. If an entry is being changed, delete the entry, save the
screen, then recreate the entry with its new settings.
TIP: If more than 1 port is being redirected, repeat steps 1 through 12 for each
additional setting. Then go to step 13 to save all the new settings at once.
If an entry is to be changed, delete the entry, save the screen, then recreate the entry
with its new settings.
Any combination, up to 128, of port redirect instances (configured on the Port Redirect
Configuration screen) and/or VLAN redirect instances (configured on the VLAN Redirect
Configuration screen) can be configured.

13. Use the arrow keys to highlight SAVE at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER. The message
“SAVED OK” displays. This saves the new settings and updates the Source VLAN and
Destination Port read-only fields.
4-26

Chassis Menu Screens

5
Module Configuration Menu Screens
The chapter describes the Module Configuration Menu screen and the following screens that can
be selected:

• General Configuration screen (Section 5.2)
• SNMP Configuration Menu screen (Section 5.3)
• SNMP Community Names Configuration screen (Section 5.4)
• SNMP Traps Configuration screen (Section 5.5)
• Access Control List screen (Section 5.6)
• System Resources Information screen (Section 5.7)
• Flash Download Configuration screen (Section 5.8)
• Port Configuration Menu screen (Chapter 6)
• 802.1 Configuration Menu screen (Chapter 7)
• Layer 3 Extensions Menu (Chapter 10)

Screen Navigation Paths
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-1

Module Configuration Menu Screen

5.1

MODULE CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN

When to Use
To access a series of Local Management screens used to establish an Access Control List for
SNMP to provide additional security, configure and monitor operating parameters, modify SNMP
community names, set SNMP traps, configure switch parameters and configure the switch module
ports.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the MODULE CONFIGURATION MENU item on the Module
Menu screen, and press ENTER. The Module Configuration Menu screen, Figure 5-1, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 5-1

Module Configuration Menu Screen

GENERAL CONFIGURATION
SNMP CONFIGURATION MENU
SYSTEM RESOURCES INFORMATION
FLASH DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION
PORT CONFIGURATION MENU
802.1 CONFIGURATION MENU
LAYER 3 EXTENSIONS MENU

EXIT

RETURN
25045_66w

5-2

Module Configuration Menu Screens

Module Configuration Menu Screen

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 5-1 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 5-1

Module Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

GENERAL
CONFIGURATION

Used to monitor and configure the switch module operating
parameters. For details, refer to Section 5.2.

SNMP
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Used to access the SNMP Community Names Configuration, SNMP
Traps Configuration, and Access Control List screens. These screens
are used to modify SNMP community names, set SNMP traps and
provide additional security while managing the modules. For details,
refer to Section 5.3.

SYSTEM
RESOURCES
INFORMATION

Displays the CPU type used in the module and its operating speed;
displays the size of each memory system used (FLASH memory,
DRAM and NVRAM) in the module and the unused portion of each
memory; and displays the current CPU (switch) utilization and the
peak switch utilization. For details, refer to Section 5.7.

FLASH
DOWNLOAD
CONFIGURATION

Used to force the switch module to download a new image file from a
TFTP server to its FLASH memory. For details, refer to Section 5.8.

PORT
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Used to select the screens for configuring the switch module ports. For
details, refer to Section 6.1.

802.1
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Provides access to the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen, the
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen, and the 802.1p Priority
Configuration Menu screen. For details, refer to Section 7.1.

LAYER 3
EXTENSIONS
MENU

Provides access to the IGMP/VLAN Configuration screen to configure
ports and VLANs to operate according to the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP). For details, refer to Chapter 10.

To prevent passwords from being downloaded and overwriting the
current passwords in memory, refer to the Security screen information
described in Section 3.7.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-3

General Configuration Screen

5.2

GENERAL CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To set the system date and time, IP address and subnet mask, the default gateway, the TFTP and
gateway IP address. This screen can also be used to clear the NVRAM, set the screen refresh time,
the screen lockout time, the IP fragmentation, the COM port configuration, and monitor the total
time (uptime) that the module has been running.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the GENERAL CONFIGURATION menu item on the Module
Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The General Configuration screen, Figure 5-2,
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 5-2

General Configuration Screen

MAC Address:

00-00-ID-00-00-00

Module Date:

XX/XX/XXXX

IP Address:

0.0.0.0

Module Time:

14:23:00

Subnet Mask:

255.255.0.0

Screen Refresh Time:

30 sec.

Default Gateway:

NONE DEFINED

Screen Lockout Time:

15 min.

TFTP Gateway IP Addr:

0.0.0.0

Module Uptime XX D XX H XX M

Module Name:

sysName
Management Mode: [DISTRIBUTED]

Operational Mode: [802.1Q SWITCHING]
Com: [ENABLED]
Clear NVRAM:
WebView:

Application:
[NO]

[ENABLED]

[LM]

IP Fragmentation: [ENABLED]
Telnet: [ENABLED]

SAVE

Agg Mode: [SMARTTRUNKING]
EXIT

RETURN
352802_12

5-4

Module Configuration Menu Screens

General Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 5-2 for a functional description of each screen field.
.

Table 5-2

General Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

MAC Address
(Read-Only)

See the base physical address of the switch module.

IP Address
(Modifiable)

See the IP address for the switch module. To set the IP address, refer to
Section 5.2.1. The IP address can also be set through Runtime IP
Address Discovery.
Runtime IP Address Discovery enables the switch module to
automatically accept an IP address from a Boot Strap Protocol (BootP)
server on the network without requiring a user to enter an IP address
through Local Management.

Subnet Mask
(Modifiable)

See the subnet mask for the switch module. A subnet mask “masks
out” the network bits of the IP address by setting the bits in the mask to
1 when the network treats the corresponding bits in the IP address as
part of the network or subnetwork address, or to 0 if the corresponding
bit identifies the host. When an IP address is entered in the IP Address
field, the Subnet Mask field automatically changes to the default subnet
mask for that IP address. For details about how to change the subnet
mask from its default value, refer to Section 5.2.2.

Default Gateway
(Modifiable)

See the default gateway for the switch module. This field is not defined
until an appropriate value is entered. For details about why and how to
set the Default Gateway, refer to Section 5.2.3.

TFTP Gateway IP
Addr (Modifiable)

See the TFTP Gateway IP address for the switch module. To set the
TFTP Gateway IP address, refer to Section 5.2.4.

Module Name

Enter a new system name. To enter a new name, refer to Section 5.2.5.

Module Date
(Modifiable)

Enter a new module date. To enter a new date, refer to Section 5.2.6.

Module Time
(Modifiable)

Enter a new module time. To enter a new time, refer to Section 5.2.7.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-5

General Configuration Screen

Table 5-2

General Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Screen Refresh
Time
(Modifiable)

Enter a new update time. This setting determines how frequently (in
seconds) information is updated on the screen. To enter the refresh
time, refer to Section 5.2.8.

Screen Lockout
Time
(Modifiable)

Enter a new lockout time. This is maximum number of minutes that the
Local Management application displays a screen while awaiting input
or action from a user. For example, if the number 5 is entered in this
field, the user has up to five minutes to respond to each of the specified
module’s Local Management screens.
In this example, after five minutes of no input or action, the terminal
“beeps” five times, the Local Management application terminates the
session, and the display returns to the Local Management Password
screen.
To enter the screen lockout time, refer to Section 5.2.9.

Module Uptime
(Read-Only)

See the total time that the module has been operating.

Operational Mode
(Read-Only)

Display “802.1Q SWITCHING” and cannot be changed.

Management Mode
(Toggle)

Set the switch module to operate in either DISTRIBUTED or
STANDALONE management mode. DISTRIBUTED mode is the
default setting.
NOTE: This field is only available when the switch module is
installed in a 6C105 chassis.
It is recommended that you set all modules in the chassis to
either DISTRIBUTED or STANDALONE management mode.

When this field is set to DISTRIBUTED management mode, you can
access all modules in the chassis using only one IP address set using
the Chassis Configuration screen described in Section 4.2. The
DISTRIBUTED management mode also allows you to use the COM
port on any of the switches set to the DISTRIBUTED management
mode to access the Local Management of each switch module.
In STANDALONE management mode, the switch can be configured
with its own IP address and operate as an independent switch within
the chassis.
5-6

Module Configuration Menu Screens

General Configuration Screen

Table 5-2

General Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Com
(Toggle)

Enable or disable the COM port. The selection toggles between
ENABLED and DISABLED. The default is ENABLED. For details
about setting up the COM port, refer to Section 5.2.10.

Application
(Toggle)

Set the application that the COM port will support. The field toggles
between LM (Local Management) and UPS (Uninterruptible Power
Supply). The default is LM.
The UPS setting allows the COM port to be used to monitor an
American Power Conversion (APC) Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS).
The baud rate setting for LM is automatically sensed. For UPS, the
baud rate is automatically set to 2400.
For details about how to configure the COM port for various
applications, refer to Section 5.2.10.

Clear NVRAM
(Toggle)

Reset NVRAM to the factory default settings. All user-entered
parameters, such as IP address and Community Names, are then
replaced with the switch module default configuration settings. For
details, refer to Section 5.2.11.

IP Fragmentation
(Toggle)

Enable or disable IP Fragmentation. The default setting for this field is
ENABLED.
If the switch module is to be bridged to an FDDI ring using an
HSIM-F6, IP Fragmentation should be enabled. If IP Fragmentation is
disabled, all FDDI frames that exceed the maximum Ethernet frame
size are discarded if they are destined for a small frame size port, such
as Ethernet, WAN, Gigabit Ethernet, and ATM (at the time of this
printing). Even if IP Fragmentation is disabled, large frames will still
be forwarded out the ports if necessary. Check the release notes for
changes. For details on enabling IP Fragmentation, refer to
Section 5.2.12.

WebView
(Toggle)

Enable or disable WebView to configure or manage the switch via the
HTTP agent. The default setting is ENABLED.

Telnet
(Toggle)

Enable or disable the ability to Telnet to the switch to access Local
Management. The default setting is ENABLED.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-7

General Configuration Screen

Table 5-2

General Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Agg Mode
(Toggle)

Select the trunking method that the switch will use to create a trunk
consisting of a group of ports to increase the bandwidth between
switches.
You can select either the Enterasys Networks’ SmartTrunking
(Huntgroup) or the IEEE 802.3ad protocol. This field toggles between
HUNTGROUP and IEEE8023ad. The default is HUNTGROUP.
NOTE: When the Agg Mode is set to 8023ad, the Port
Configuration menu item SMARTTRUNK CONFIGURATION
is replaced with LINK AGGREGATION MENU. This menu
screen provides access to other screens to display Port,
Aggregator and System information, view and configure all
the port-related LACP parameters, and display a summary of
all the available aggregators and other related information.

For more information, refer to Section 6.1.

5.2.1

Setting the IP Address
NOTE: If the 6C105 or 6C107 chassis has been assigned an IP address, it is not
necessary to assign an IP address to the switch module. All installed modules have the
same IP address as the chassis. If a separate IP address for the switch module is
needed, proceed as follows.

To set the IP address, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IP Address field.
2. Enter the IP address into this field using Dotted Decimal Notation (DDN) format.
For example: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
3. Press ENTER. If the IP address is a valid format, the cursor returns to the beginning of the IP
address field. If the entry is not valid, the screen displays the message “INVALID IP ADDRESS
OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management does not alter the current value and refreshes
the IP address field with the previous value.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command, then press ENTER. The warning screen
shown in Figure 5-3 displays.

5-8

Module Configuration Menu Screens

General Configuration Screen

Figure 5-3

Configuration Warning Screen, IP Address

WARNING!
YOU HAVE ELECTED TO SAVE ONE OR MORE CONFIGURATION
ITEMS THAT REQUIRE RESETTING THIS DEVICE.
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO CONTINUE?
NO

YES

19601-84

5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the YES command, then press ENTER. The changes are saved
and the module reboots.

5.2.2

Setting the Subnet Mask

If the management workstation that is to receive SNMP traps from the switch module is located on
a separate subnet, the subnet mask for the switch module may need to be changed from its default
value.
To change the subnet mask from its default, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Subnet Mask field.
2. Enter the subnet mask into this field using Dotted Decimal Notation (DDN) format.
For example: 255.255.0.0
3. Press ENTER. If the subnet mask is valid, the cursor returns to the beginning of the Subnet Mask
field. If the entry is not valid, the screen displays the message “INVALID SUBNET MASK OR
FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management does not alter the current value, but it does refresh
the Subnet Mask field with the previous value.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-9

General Configuration Screen

4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command, then press ENTER. The warning screen
shown in Figure 5-4 displays.
Figure 5-4

Configuration Warning Screen, Subnet Mask

WARNING!
YOU HAVE ELECTED TO SAVE ONE OR MORE CONFIGURATION
ITEMS THAT REQUIRE RESETTING THIS DEVICE.
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO CONTINUE?
YES

NO

19601-84

5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the YES command, then press ENTER. The changes are saved
and the module reboots.

5.2.3

Setting the Default Gateway

If the SNMP management station is on a different IP subnet than the module, a default gateway
must be specified. When an SNMP Trap is generated, the switch module sends out an ARP request
to the default gateway, which responds with its MAC address. The switch module then sends the
trap using the IP address from the Trap Table and the MAC address of the default gateway. To set
the default gateway, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Default Gateway field.
2. Enter the IP address of the default gateway using the DDN format.
For example: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

5-10

Module Configuration Menu Screens

General Configuration Screen

3. Press ENTER. If the default gateway entered is in the correct format, the cursor returns to the
beginning of the Default Gateway field. If the format is not correct, the screen displays
“INVALID DEFAULT GATEWAY OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management does not
alter the current value, but it does refresh the Default Gateway field with the previous value.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command.
5. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays at the top of the screen.

5.2.4

Setting the TFTP Gateway IP Address

If the network TFTP server is located on a different IP subnet than the switch module, a Gateway
IP address should be specified. To set the TFTP Gateway IP address, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the TFTP Gateway IP Addr field.
2. Enter the IP address of the TFTP gateway using the DDN format.
For example: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
3. Press ENTER. If the TFTP gateway IP address entered is a valid format, the cursor returns to the
beginning of the TFTP Gateway IP Address field. If the entry is not valid, the screen displays
“INVALID TFTP GATEWAY IP ADDRESS OR FORMAT ENTERED”. Local Management
does not alter the current value, but it does refresh the TFTP Gateway IP Address field with the
previous value.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command.
5. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-11

General Configuration Screen

5.2.5

Setting the Module Name

To set the module name, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Module Name field.
2. Enter the name of your system (maximum of 19 characters).
3. Press ENTER to set the name in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER. The message “SAVED
OK” displays on the screen.

5.2.6

Setting the Module Date
NOTE: If the 6C105 or 6C107 chassis has been assigned a chassis date, it is not
necessary to assign a module date to the switch module. All installed modules
recognize the chassis date.

The switch module is year 2000 compliant so that the Module Date field can be set beyond the
year 1999.
To set the system date, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Module Date field.
2. Enter the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY
NOTE: It is not necessary to add separators between month, day, and year numbers, as
long as each entry has the correct number of numeric characters. For example, to set
the date to 03/17/2000, type “03172000” in the Module Date field.

3. Press ENTER to set the system calendar to the date in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER.
If the date entered is a valid format, the message displays “SAVED OK” at the top of the screen. If
the entry is not valid, Local Management does not alter the current value, but it does refresh the
Module Date field with the previous value.

5-12

Module Configuration Menu Screens

General Configuration Screen

5.2.7

Setting the Module Time
NOTE: If the 6C105 or 6C107 chassis has been assigned a chassis time, it is not
necessary to assign a module time to the switch module. All installed modules recognize
the chassis time.

To set the switch module time, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Module Time field.
2. Enter the time in this 24-hour format: HH:MM:SS
NOTE: When entering the time in the system time field, separators between hours,
minutes, and seconds are not needed as long as each entry uses two numeric
characters. For example, to set the time to 6:45 P.M., type “184500” in the Module Time
field.

3. Press ENTER to set the system clock to the time in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER.
If the time entered is a valid format, the message displays “SAVED OK” at the top of the screen. If
the entry is not valid, Local Management does not alter the current value and refreshes the Module
Time field with the previous value.

5.2.8

Entering a New Screen Refresh Time

The screen refresh time can be set from 3 to 99 seconds with a default of 3 seconds. To set a new
screen refresh time, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Screen Refresh Time field.
2. Enter a number from 3 to 99.
3. Press ENTER to set the refresh time to the time entered in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER.
If the time entered is within the 3 to 99 seconds range, the message “SAVED OK” displays at the
top of the screen. If the entry is not valid, Local Management does not alter the current setting, but
it does refresh the Screen Refresh Time field with the previous value.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-13

General Configuration Screen

5.2.9

Setting the Screen Lockout Time

The screen lockout time can be set from 1 to 30 minutes with a default of 15 minutes. To set a new
lockout time, perform the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Screen Lockout Time field.
2. Enter a number from 1 to 30.
3. Press ENTER to set the lockout time in the input field.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER.
If the time entered is within the 1 to 30 minutes range, the message “SAVED OK” displays at the
top of the screen. If the entry is not valid, Local Management does not alter the current setting, but
it does refresh the Screen Lockout Time field with the previous value.

5.2.10 Configuring the COM Port
Upon power up, the COM port is configured to the default settings of ENABLED and LM.
CAUTION: Before altering the COM port settings, ensure that the switch module or
chassis is set with a valid IP address. (Refer to Section 5.2.1.) Read this entire COM
port configuration section before changing the settings of the COM port.

The COM port supports the following applications:

• Local Management connections
• American Power Conversion (APC) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) connections
To configure the COM port, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Com field.
CAUTION: Do NOT disable or alter the settings of the COM port while operating the
current Local Management connection through a terminal. Altering the COM port
settings disconnects the Local Management terminal from the port, and ends the Local
Management session. If the switch module was previously assigned a valid IP address,
reenter Local Management by establishing a Telnet connection to the module. If the
module does not have a valid IP address and the COM port has been disabled or the
settings changed, reset NVRAM on the switch module using Mode Switch 7 to
reestablish COM port communications. For details about Switch 7 and its operation.
refer to the switch module hardware user’s guide shipped with your switch module.

5-14

Module Configuration Menu Screens

General Configuration Screen

2. Press the SPACE bar to choose either ENABLED or DISABLED. The COM port must be
ENABLED for the LM or UPS application. Selecting DISABLED prevents a connection via
the COM port thus providing additional module security.
CAUTION: If the COM port is reconfigured without a valid IP address set on the switch
module or chassis, the message shown in Figure 5-5 displays.
Do not continue unless the outcome of the action is fully understood.
Figure 5-5

COM Port Warning

WARNING
THE COM PORT HAS BEEN RECONFIGURED AND THERE IS NO IP
ADDRESS SET FOR THIS DEVICE. YOU WILL NO LONGER BE ABLE
TO MANAGE THIS BOARD. DO YOU STILL WISH TO RECONFIGURE
THIS COM PORT?

NO

YES

174252

NOTE: If the 6C105 or 6C107 chassis has been configured with a valid IP address this
screen will not display. When the chassis is assigned a valid IP address, all the switch
modules installed in the chassis share this same address.

3. Use the arrow keys to highlight YES. Press ENTER.
4. If the port was ENABLED, the message “SAVED OK” displays, and the edits are saved. If the
port was DISABLED, use the arrow keys to highlight SAVE at the bottom of the screen, then
press ENTER.
NOTE: Exiting without saving causes the message “NOT SAVED -- PRESS SAVE TO
KEEP CHANGES” to display. Exiting without saving causes all edits to be lost.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-15

General Configuration Screen

5.2.10.1 Changing the COM Port Application
After enabling the COM port as described in Section 5.2.10, one of the applications supported by
the COM port (LM or UPS) can be selected. The default application is LM.
To change the COM port application:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Application field.
2. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the desired setting. Table 5-3 lists the
available settings and their corresponding applications.
Table 5-3

COM Port Application Settings

Setting

Application

LM

Local Management Session

UPS

APC Power Supply SNMP Proxy

3. Press ENTER to accept the application.
CAUTION: When the COM port is configured to perform the UPS application, all future
Local Management connections must be made by establishing a Telnet connection to
the switch module. Ensure that the switch module has a valid IP address before saving
changes to the COM port application. If the switch module does not have a valid IP
address and the changes are saved, refer to your switch module hardware/user’s guide
for instructions on clearing NVRAM to reestablish COM port communications.

4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen, then press the
ENTER key. The message “SAVED OK” displays, indicating that the edits are saved.

5.2.11 Clearing NVRAM
CAUTION: Clearing NVRAM results in the loss of all user-entered parameters. Do not
proceed unless the following procedure is completely understood.

Clearing NVRAM is used to clear all user-entered parameters, such as the IP address and
Community Names from NVRAM.
To clear NVRAM, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Clear NVRAM field.
2. Use the SPACE bar to toggle the field to YES.
5-16

Module Configuration Menu Screens

General Configuration Screen

3. Use the arrow keys to highlight SAVE at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The warning shown in Figure 5-6 displays.
Figure 5-6

Clear NVRAM Warning

WARNING
YOU HAVE ELECTED TO CLEAR NVRAM. THIS WILL CLEAR
ALL SYSTEM DEFAULTS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
IP ADDRESS, INTERFACE CONFIGURATION, AND COM PORT
CONFIGURATION, THEN REBOOT THIS DEVICE.
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO CLEAR NVRAM?

NO

YES

17426_1

5. To clear the NVRAM, use the arrow keys to select YES and press ENTER. The message
“CLEARING NVRAM. REBOOT IN PROGRESS...” displays. The switch module clears
NVRAM and reboots. All user-entered parameters default to factory default settings.

5.2.12 Enabling/Disabling IP Fragmentation
To enable or disable IP Fragmentation, proceed as follows:
CAUTION: If the switch module is being bridged to an FDDI ring (for example, via an
optional HSIM-F6), IP Fragmentation should be enabled. If it is disabled, all FDDI
frames that exceed the maximum Ethernet frame size are discarded.

1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IP Fragmentation field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to choose either ENABLED or DISABLED.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.
Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-17

SNMP Configuration Menu Screen

5.3

SNMP CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN

Screen Navigation Paths
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
SNMP Configuration Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > SNMP
Configuration Menu

When to Use
To provide access to the SNMP Community Names Configuration, SNMP Traps Configuration,
and Access Control List screens. These screens are used to modify SNMP community names, set
SNMP traps, and establish an Access Control List to provide additional security.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SNMP CONFIGURATION MENU item on the Module
Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The SNMP Configuration Menu screen,
Figure 5-7, displays.

5-18

Module Configuration Menu Screens

SNMP Configuration Menu Screen

Screen Example
Figure 5-7

SNMP Configuration Menu Screen

SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES CONFIGURATION
SNMP TRAPS CONFIGURATION
ACCESS CONTROL LIST

SAVE

RETURN

EXIT

4046_107w

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 5-4 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 5-4

SNMP Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

SNMP
COMMUNITY
NAMES
CONFIGURATION

Used to enter new, change, or review the community names used as
access passwords for module management operation. Access is limited
based on the password level of the user. For details, refer to
Section 5.4.

SNMP TRAPS
CONFIGURATION

Provides display and configuration access to the table of IP addresses
used for trap destinations and associated community names. For
details, refer to Section 5.5.

ACCESS
CONTROL LIST

Enables the system administrator to create an Access Control List
(ACL) to restrict module access to a maximum of 16 single IP
addresses and/or ranges of IP addresses. For details, refer to
Section 5.6.
Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-19

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen

5.4

SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To set SNMP Management community names. Community names act as passwords to
Local/Remote Management and are agents of security access to the switch module. Access is
controlled by enacting any of three different levels of security authorization (read-only, read-write,
and super-user).
NOTE: If the 6C105 has been assigned community names, it is not necessary to assign
community names to the individual switch modules installed in the chassis unless you
wish to limit access to 6C105 chassis screens by assigning different community names
to the switch module(s). When this is done, the CHASSIS menu item of the Main Menu
screen will not display, and access will be limited to the screens specific to the switch
module attached to the terminal.
Super-user access gives you full management privileges, allows existing passwords to
be changed, and all modifiable MIB objects to be edited.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SNMP COMMUNITY NAMES CONFIGURATION menu
item on the SNMP Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The SNMP Community Names
Configuration screen, Figure 5-8, displays.

5-20

Module Configuration Menu Screens

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 5-8

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen

Community Name

Access Policy

public

read-only

public

read-write

public

super-user

SAVE

RETURN

EXIT

2504-16w

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 5-5 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 5-5

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Community Name
(Modifiable)

Display the user-defined name through which a user accesses the
switch module SNMP Management. Any community name assigned
here acts as a password to Local Management.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-21

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen

Table 5-5

SNMP Community Names Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Access Policy
(Read-Only)

Indicate the access accorded each community name. The available
access levels are as follows:

5.4.1

read-only

This community name gives the user read-only access
to the switch module MIB objects, and excludes access
to security-protected fields of read-write or super-user
authorization.

read-write

This community name gives the user read-write access
to the switch module MIB objects, excluding security
protected fields for Super-User access only.

super-user

This community name gives the user read-write access
to the switch module MIB objects and allows the user
to change all modifiable parameters including
community names, IP addresses, traps, and SNMP
objects.

Establishing Community Names

The password used to access Local Management at the Password Screen must have super-user
access to view and edit the SNMP Community Names Configuration screen. Using a password
with read-only or read-write access does not allow the viewing or editing of the SNMP
Community Names Configuration screen.
To establish community names, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Community Name field adjacent to the selected access
level.
2. Enter the password in the field (maximum 31 characters).
3. Press ENTER.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to modify the other community names.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays. The community names are saved to memory and
their access modes implemented.
NOTE: Exiting without saving causes a “NOT SAVED?” message to display at the top
left of the screen. Edits are lost if they are not saved before exiting.

5-22

Module Configuration Menu Screens

SNMP Traps Configuration Screen

5.5

SNMP TRAPS CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To assign SNMP traps to eight different IP addresses. Since the switch module is an SNMP
compliant module, it can send messages to multiple Network Management Stations to alert users
of status changes.
NOTE: It is only necessary to assign SNMP traps when the user needs the traps sent
to different addresses than those assigned for the chassis. Refer to Section 4.4, which
details how to set SNMP Traps for the 6C105 chassis.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SNMP TRAPS CONFIGURATION menu item on the
SNMP Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The SNMP Traps Configuration screen,
Figure 5-9, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 5-9

SNMP Traps Configuration Screen

Trap Destination

Trap Community Name

Enable Traps

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

0.0.0.0

public

[NO]

SAVE

EXIT

RETURN
4046_17

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-23

SNMP Traps Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 5-6 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 5-6

SNMP Traps Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Trap Destination
(Modifiable)

Display/enter the IP address of the workstation to receive trap alarms.
Up to eight different destinations can be defined.

Trap Community
Name
(Modifiable)

Display/enter the Trap Community Name included in the trap message
along with the IP address of the Network Management Station to
receive the trap alarm.

Enable Traps
(Toggle)

Enable/disable the transmission of traps to the network management
station with the associated IP address. This field toggles between YES
and NO.

5.5.1

Configuring the Trap Table

To configure the Trap table, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate Trap Destination field.
2. Enter the IP address of the workstation that is to receive traps. IP address entries must follow the
DDN format.
For example: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
3. Press ENTER. If an invalid entry is entered, the message “INVALID IP ENTERED” displays
in the Event Message Line.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Trap Community Name field. Enter the community name.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Enable Traps field. Press the SPACE bar to choose either
YES (send alarms from the switch module to the workstation), or NO (prevent alarms from
being sent).

5-24

Module Configuration Menu Screens

Access Control List Screen

7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER. The message “SAVED
OK” displays on the screen.
NOTE: Exiting without saving causes a “NOT SAVED?” message to display above the
SAVE command. Edits are lost if they are not saved before exiting.

The designated workstations will now receive traps from the switch module as long as the
communication path to the designated workstations are not inhibited (for example, by subnets or
VLANs).

5.6

ACCESS CONTROL LIST SCREEN

When to Use
To view, enable, or disable the Access Control List (ACL) and configure address filtering to
provide additional security. You can limit user access to the switch module according to their
IP addresses. Up to 16 single IP addresses and/or range of addresses can be configured.
To manage an ACL enabled switch module, the management station must be a member of the ACL
and authenticated according to traditional SNMP rules.
NOTE: Clearing NVRAM will remove all IP address entries and return the access
control state to DISABLED.

When the ACL is disabled, host access is not restricted.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the ACCESS CONTROL LIST menu item on the SNMP
Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The Access Control List screen, Figure 5-10,
displays.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-25

Access Control List Screen

Screen Example
Figure 5-10 Access Control List Screen

Access Control Lists: [ENABLED]

IP Addr

Mask

IP Addr

Mask

131.130.12.0
182.15.2.1
12.1.6.1
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

255.255.255.0
255.255.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255

180.150.200.3
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255

SAVE

EXIT

RETURN
3528_01_108

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 5-7 for a functional description of each screen field.

5-26

Module Configuration Menu Screens

Access Control List Screen

Table 5-7

Access Control List Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Access Control Lists
(Toggle)

Enable or disable ACL to restrict SNMP/IP access to a limited number
of IP addresses. This field toggles between ENABLED and
DISABLED. DISABLED is the default setting.
When ACL is enabled, all module access is limited to the 16 IP
addresses and /or range of addresses as shown in the screen example.
The limited access applies to all IP access including, but not limited to,
SLIP/PPP connections, Telnet, Ping, SNMP and HTTP. When locally
connected to the COM port of the host switch module), ACL does not
restrict access to local management.
ACL cannot be enabled unless a valid IP address is listed.
When ACL is disabled, host access is not restricted to the devices with
an IP address in the Access Control List.

IP Addresses
(Modifiable)

Enter a new IP address of the devices that you want to have access to
SNMP/IP management. The default value is “0.0.0.0”.
Up to 16, individual user IP addresses and/or range of user IP addresses
can be entered. For individual IP address settings, the mask value must
be “255.255.255.255”.
For a range of IP addresses, both the IP address and appropriate Mask
value must be entered to indicate the range of IP addresses.
Only a user with a Super User status can view and modify the ACL.
NOTE: Clearing NVRAM will remove all IP address entries
and return the access control state to DISABLED.

For details on entering IP addresses, refer to Section 5.6.1.
MASK
(Modifiable)

Enter a mask value to establish an IP address range based on the IP
address in the associated IP address field. For example, in the screen
example in Figure 5-10, the IP address and Mask entries 182.15.2.1
and 255.255.0.0 sets the switch module to allow access to all users with
addresses starting with 182.15.x.x (x = I don’t care.) Address ranges
may overlap without any consequences.
The default value is “255.255.255.255”. For details, refer to
Section 5.6.1.
Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-27

Access Control List Screen

5.6.1

Entering IP Addresses

To enter a single or range of IP addresses into the ACL, proceed as follows:
Entering Single Addresses
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight one of the place holders (0.0.0.0) under IP Addresses.
2. Enter the IP address of a device that you want to have access to Local Management using the
following format: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn (where n is an alphanumeric character).
3. In the adjacent Mask column, the value must be the default value of 255.255.255.255. If not, use
the arrow keys to highlight the Mask field and type in: 255.255.255.255
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 if more than one single address is being entered. Up to 16 IP addresses
including those used for entering IP address ranges. If an invalid format is used to enter an IP
address, the message “INVALID IP FORMAT ENTERED” displays in the Event Message Line.
Then the field returns to 0.0.0.0.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Access Control Lists field.
6. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the field to ENABLED.
7. Press ENTER.
8. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER. The message “SAVED
OK” displays on the screen.
NOTE: Exiting without saving causes a “NOT SAVED?” message to display above the
SAVE command. Edits are lost if they are not saved before exiting.

The designated devices associated with the IP addresses in the ACL will now have remote access
to Local Management. Access to Local Management using the COM port is not affected.
Entering Ranges of Addresses
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight one of the place holders (0.0.0.0) under IP Addresses.
2. Enter the IP address of a device that you want to have access to Local Management using the
following format: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn (where n is an alphanumeric character).
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Mask field and type in the appropriate Mask value to
establish a range of addresses based on the IP address entered. For example, if an IP address of
123.123.20.25 and a mask value of 255.0.0.0 was entered, all IP addresses starting with 123
would have access to Local Management.

5-28

Module Configuration Menu Screens

Access Control List Screen

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 if more than one range of addresses is being entered. Up to 16 ranges
of IP addresses, including any single IP Addresses entered. If an invalid format is used to enter
an IP address, one of the following messages may display in the Event Message Line:

• “INVALID IP FORMAT” if more than 3 periods are used,
• “INVALID IP” if numbers > 255 are used.
• “DUPLICATE IP” if the same IP is entered.
• “INTERNAL IP” if the module’s IP is entered.
Then the field returns to 0.0.0.0.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Access Control Lists field.
6. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the field to ENABLED.
7. Press ENTER.
8. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER. The message “SAVED
OK” displays on the screen.
NOTE: Exiting without saving causes a “NOT SAVED?” message to display above the
SAVE command. Edits are lost if they are not saved before exiting.

The designated devices associated with the range of IP addresses in the ACL will now have remote
access to Local Management. Access to Local Management using the COM port is not affected.

5.6.2

Enable/Disable ACL

To just enable or disable ACL, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Access Control Lists field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the field to either ENABLED or DISABLED.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER. The message “SAVED
OK” displays on the screen.
NOTE: Exiting without saving causes a “NOT SAVED?” message to display above the
SAVE command. Edits are lost if they are not saved before exiting.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-29

System Resources Information Screen

5.7

SYSTEM RESOURCES INFORMATION SCREEN

When to Use
To monitor the current switch utilization and the peak switch utilization. This screen provides
information concerning the processor used in the switch module and the amount of FLASH
memory, DRAM, and NVRAM that is installed and how much of that memory is available.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SYSTEM RESOURCES INFORMATION menu item on the
Module Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The System Resources Information
screen, Figure 5-11, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 5-11

System Resources Information Screen

CPU Type: i960 HX 66 Mhz
Flash Memory Installed: 4 MB

Available:

XXXXX Bytes

DRAM Installed:

16 MB

Available:

XXXXX Bytes

NVRAM Installed:

XX KB

Available:

XXXXX Bytes

Current Switch Utilization: 66%
Peak Switch Utilization: 75%
Reset Peak Switch Utilization: [NO]

SAVE

EXIT

RETURN
RETURN
2504-23w

5-30

Module Configuration Menu Screens

System Resources Information Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 5-8 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 5-8

System Resources Information Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

CPU Type
(Read-Only)

See which microprocessor is used in the switch module.

Flash Memory
Installed
(Read-Only)

See the amount of FLASH memory that is installed in the switch
module and how much is currently available.

DRAM Installed
(Read-Only)

See the amount of DRAM installed in the switch module and how
much of it is currently available.

NVRAM Installed
(Read-Only)

See the amount of NVRAM that is installed in the switch module and
how much of it is currently available.

Current Switch
Utilization
(Read-Only)

See what percentage of the module switching capacity is currently
being used.

Peak Switch
Utilization
(Read-Only)

See the peak percentage of module switching capacity used, since the
last reset.

Reset Peak Switch
Utilization
(Toggle)

Reset the Peak Switch Utilization field. The switch may be set to either
YES or NO as described in Section 5.7.1. YES resets the Peak Switch
Utilization field to the current system utilization.

5.7.1

Setting the Reset Peak Switch Utilization

To set the Reset Peak Switch Utilization field to YES or NO, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Reset Peak Switch Utilization field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to select YES or NO.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the Reset Peak Utilization counter
resets to zero.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-31

FLASH Download Configuration Screen

5.8

FLASH DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION SCREEN
Important Notice

There are restrictions on the version of firmware required for 6H302-48 modules with a serial
number starting with 3655xxxxxx. The serial number is visible on the top ejector tab of the switch,
or by querying the PIC MIB. For firmware in the 5.x track, version 5.03.05 or higher must be used
on 6H302-48 modules with a serial number starting with 3655. For the 4.x firmware track, 4.08.41
or higher must be used on 6H302-48 modules with a serial number starting with 3655.

When to Use
To perform the following:

• Download a new firmware image file from a TFTP server to the switch module,
• Download a configuration file from a TFTP server to the switch module, or
• Upload the configuration file from the switch module to a TFTP server.
NOTE: You can also force an image download by changing the position of Switch 6
located inside the module. Use this as a last resort as it involves removing the switch
module from the chassis. If it is necessary to set Switch 6, refer to your switch module
installation/user’s guide for instructions on how to remove the switch module and set
Switch 6.
Using FLASH DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION does not affect the current IP and subnet
mask.

Before downloading an image to the switch module, copy the image to the network TFTP server.
NOTE: For information on how to set up a workstation as a TFTP server, refer to the
specific workstation documentation or contact support on the web at:
www.enterasys.com/support/ or refer to Tech Bulletin TK0020-9
(http://www.enterasys.com/support/techtips/tk0020-9.html).

The download and upload configuration capability enables customer configurable settings to be
copied from one switch module to another via the TFTP server, according to the rules described in
this section. The configuration file can also be stored on the TFTP server to prevent loosing the
configuration values while performing maintenance on the switch module. After the maintenance
is completed, the configuration values can be downloaded to the same switch module.

5-32

Module Configuration Menu Screens

FLASH Download Configuration Screen

NOTE: Configuration files cannot be downloaded or uploaded directly from one switch
module to another.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the FLASH DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION menu item on
the Module Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The Flash Download Configuration
screen, Figure 5-12, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 5-12

Flash Download Configuration Screen

Download Method:
Reboot After Download:

[YES]

TFTP Gateway IP Addr:

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Download Server IP:

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Download File Name:

/tftpboot/SS2200.fls

Last Image Server IP:

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Last Image File Name:
Transfer Status:
EXECUTE

[RUNTIME]

/tftpboot/SS2200.fls
Download Successful

EXIT

RETURN
25044-49w

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 5-9 for a functional description of each screen field.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-33

FLASH Download Configuration Screen

Table 5-9 Flash Download Configuration Screen Field Descriptions
Use this field…

To…

Download Method
(Selectable)

Select a method (RUNTIME, DOWNLOAD CONFIG, or UPLOAD
CONFIG) to download (receive) an image file from a TFTP server, or
upload (transmit) or download a configuration file to/from a TFTP
server. The uploading and downloading of a configuration file is
accomplished according to the IP address and the file name entered in
the Download Server IP and Download File Name fields, respectively.
RUNTIME – Used to download a new image from a TFTP server.
This allows the replacement of the image file currently stored in the
switch module. Section 5.8.1 describes how to download using
Runtime.
DOWNLOAD CONFIG – Used to download a configuration file from
a TFTP server to a switch module. The configuration file must be one
that was uploaded to the TFTP server from a switch module of the
same model with the same optional hardware, and running firmware
revision 3.10.7 or higher.
The switch module automatically reboots after a successful download.
Section 5.8.2 describes how to download a configuration file.
UPLOAD CONFIG – Used to upload a configuration file from a
switch module to a TFTP server. The configuration file must be one
that was downloaded to a switch module of the same model with the
same optional hardware, and running firmware revision 3.10.7 or
higher.
Section 5.8.3 describes how to download using TFTP.

5-34

Module Configuration Menu Screens

FLASH Download Configuration Screen

Table 5-9

Flash Download Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Reboot After
Download
(Toggle)

Set the switch module so it will either reboot or not reboot after
completing the download of an image. This field toggles between YES
and NO, when the Download Method field is set to RUNTIME.
If YES is selected, the module reboots after the download is completed.
If NO is selected, the module continues using the existing firmware
image and stores the new firmware image in FLASH memory. The next
time the switch module is reset or powered-up, the module boots from
FLASH memory using the new image.
When the Download Method field is set to DOWNLOAD CONFIG,
the setting defaults to YES and cannot be changed. In UPLOAD
CONFIG, the setting defaults to NO and cannot be changed.

TFTP Gateway IP
Addr
(Modifiable)

Enter the IP address of the TFTP gateway server defined on the
General Configuration screen in Section 5.2.4.

Download Server IP
(Modifiable)

Select the IP address of the TFTP server to be used for the download or
upload.

Download File
Name
(Modifiable)

Select the complete TFTP server path and file name of the new image
or configuration file.

Last Image Server
IP
(Read-Only)

See the IP address of the server used for the previous download or
upload.

Last Image File
Name
(Read-Only)

See the complete path and file name of the last downloaded image.

Transfer Status
(Read-Only)

See the status of the current or most recent download or upload.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-35

FLASH Download Configuration Screen

5.8.1

Image File Download Using Runtime

To download a firmware image file to the switch module using Runtime, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Reboot After Download field.
2. Use the SPACE bar to select either YES or NO. Select YES if you want the module to reboot
after the download is completed. Select NO if you want the switch module to store the new
image in FLASH memory until the module is reset or during the next power-up.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the TFTP Gateway IP Addr field.
4. Set the IP address of the TFTP gateway (this defaults to the same IP address as that set in the
TFTP Gateway IP Addr field on the General Configuration screen).
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download Server IP field.
6. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server using the DDN format.
For example: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download File Name field.
8. Enter the complete pathway and file name of the image stored on the download server.
For example: /tftpboot/SS2200.fls
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight EXECUTE at the bottom of the screen and press ENTER. If
Reboot After Download is set to NO in step 2, the message “RUNTIME DOWNLOAD IN
PROGRESS” displays in the event message line at the top of the screen and the new image is
downloaded into FLASH memory. If Reboot After Download is set to YES in step 2, the
message “REBOOT WILL OCCUR AFTER DOWNLOAD COMPLETES” displays.
During the downloading process, the screen displays the Download Block Count (the number of
frames received).

5-36

Module Configuration Menu Screens

FLASH Download Configuration Screen

5.8.2

Configuration File Download Using TFTP

To download a configuration file from a TFTP server to the switch module, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download Method field.
2. Use the SPACE bar to select DOWNLOAD CONFIG.
NOTE: When DOWNLOAD CONFIG is selected, the Reboot After Download field is
automatically set to YES (and cannot be changed), so that the switch module
automatically reboots after a successful download.

3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the TFTP Gateway IP Addr field.
4. Set the IP address of the TFTP gateway (this defaults to the same IP address as that set in the
TFTP Gateway IP Addr field on the General Configuration screen).
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download Server IP field.
6. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server using the DDN format.
For example: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download File Name field.
8. Enter the complete pathway and file name of the image stored on the download server.
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight EXECUTE at the bottom of the screen and press ENTER. The
message “DOWNLOADING CONFIGURATION. REBOOT WILL OCCUR WHEN
DOWNLOAD COMPLETES.” displays in the event message line at the top of the screen and
the configuration file is downloaded to the switch module from the TFTP server.

Module Configuration Menu Screens

5-37

FLASH Download Configuration Screen

5.8.3

Configuration File Upload Using TFTP

To upload a configuration file to a TFTP server, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download Method field.
2. Use the SPACE bar to select UPLOAD CONFIG.
NOTE: When UPLOAD CONFIG is selected, the Reboot After Download field is
automatically set to NO (and cannot be changed).

3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the TFTP Gateway IP Addr field.
4. Set the IP address of the target TFTP server which is to receive a copy of the switch module
configurable settings.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download Server IP field.
6. Enter the IP address of the target TFTP server using the DDN format.
For example: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Download File Name field.
8. Enter the complete pathway and file name of the configuration file in the switch module.
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight EXECUTE at the bottom of the screen and press ENTER. The
message “UPLOAD CONFIGURATION IN PROGRESS” displays in the event message at
the top of the screen and the switch module configuration file is uploaded to the TFTP server.
NOTE: The uploading of Passwords can be disabled in the case of sensitive
environments. If this capacity is enabled, no passwords will be saved to the
configuration file.

5-38

Module Configuration Menu Screens

6
Port Configuration Menu Screens
This chapter describes the Port Configuration Menu screen and the following screens that can be
selected:

• Ethernet Interface Configuration screen (Section 6.2)
• Ethernet Port Configuration screen (Section 6.3)
• HSIM/VHSIM Configuration screen (Section 6.4)
• Redirect Configuration Menu screen (Section 6.5)
• Port Redirect Configuration screen (Section 6.6)
• VLAN Redirect Configuration screen (Section 6.7)
• SmartTrunk Configuration screen (Screens are described in the SmartTrunk User’s Guide.)
• Link Aggregation Menu screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen) (Section 6.8)
• Port Screen (Section 6.8.1)
• Aggregator screen (Section 6.8.2)
• System screen (Section 6.8.3)
• Broadcast Suppression Configuration screen (Section 6.9)

Screen Navigation Paths
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
Port Configuration Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > Port
Configuration Menu

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-1

Port Configuration Menu Screen

6.1

PORT CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN

When to Use
To select screens to perform port configuration tasks on the switch module.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the PORT CONFIGURATION MENU item on the Module
Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Port Configuration Menu screen, Figure 6-1,
displays. The list of menu items differs depending on the Aggregation (Agg) Mode selected in the
General Configuration screen described in Section 5.2.
If the Agg Mode “HUNTGROUP” is selected in the General Configuration Menu screen, the Port
Configuration screen shown in Figure 6-1, displays.
If the Agg Mode “IEEE8023ad” is selected in the General Configuration Menu screen, the Port
Configuration screen shown in Figure 6-2, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 6-1 Port Configuration Menu Screen (in Agg Mode, HUNTGROUP)

ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
HSIM/VHSIM CONFIGURATION
REDIRECT CONFIGURATION MENU
SMARTTRUNK CONFIGURATION
BROADCAST SUPPRESSION CONFIGURATION

EXIT

RETURN
25045-20w

6-2

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Port Configuration Menu Screen

Figure 6-2

Port Configuration Menu Screen (in Agg Mode, IEEE8023ad)

ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
HSIM/VHSIM CONFIGURATION
REDIRECT CONFIGURATION MENU
LINK AGGREGATION MENU
BROADCAST SUPPRESSION CONFIGURATION

EXIT

RETURN
3650_13

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-1 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 6-1

Port Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

ETHERNET
INTERFACE
CONFIGURATION

Used to display the link status and current operating mode of each
Ethernet port, and provide access to the Ethernet Port Configuration
screen, which allows the configuration of the switch module Ethernet
ports. For details, refer to Section 6.2.

HSIM/VHSIM
CONFIGURATION

Provides access to the HSIM or VHSIM setup screen, depending on the
one installed in the switch module. The screens for optional
non-Ethernet HSIMs and VHSIMs are described in their respective
user’s guides. For details, refer to Section 6.4.

REDIRECT
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Provides access to the Port Redirect Configuration and VLAN Redirect
Configuration screens. For details, refer to Section 6.5.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-3

Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen

Table 6-1 Port Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions (Continued)
Menu Item

Screen Function

SMARTTRUNK
CONFIGURATION

Used to logically group interfaces together to permit aggregation of
multiple links. This menu item appears when the Agg Mode field is set
to “HUNTGROUP” in the General Configuration screen. Refer to the
SmartTrunk User’s Guide for information about how to access and use
the SmartTrunk screens.

LINK
AGGREGATION
MENU

Used to logically group interfaces together to create a greater
bandwidth uplink according to the IEEE 802.3ad standard. This menu
item appears when the Agg Mode field is set to “IEEE8023ad” in the
General Configuration screen. Refer to the Section 6.8 for information
about how to access and use the SmartTrunk screens.

BROADCAST
SUPPRESSION
CONFIGURATION

Used to set a desired limit of received broadcast frames that are
forwarded out other interfaces. For details, refer to Section 6.9.

6.2

ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To display the link status and current operating mode of each Ethernet port. This screen also
provides access to the Ethernet Port Configuration screen, which allows configuration of the
Ethernet port.
In normal operation, all front panel ports of the switch module automatically establish a link with
the device at the other end of the segment without requiring user setup. However, the Ethernet
Interface Configuration screen can be used to access the Ethernet Port Configuration screen to
select a port and display its characteristics. The Ethernet Port Configuration screen is used to
change the operating mode of the port and enable or disable the advertisement to another device.
Refer to Section 6.3 for details.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION menu item
on the Port Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Ethernet Interface Configuration
screen, Figure 6-3, displays.

6-4

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 6-3

Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen

Intf

Port

PortType

Link

Speed

Duplex

Config

FDX FC

HDX FC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX
FE-100TX

No Link
No Link
No Link
No Link
Link
No Link
No Link
Link
Link
Link
Link
Link

100
10
100
10
10
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

Full
Half
Full
Half
Full
Full
Full
Half
Full
Full
Full
Full

Manual
AutoNeg
AutoNeg
AutoNeg
AutoNeg
Manual
Manual
AutoNeg
AutoNeg
AutoNeg
AutoNeg
AutoNeg

Off
Sym
Sym
Off
Sym
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

On
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
25041-92w

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-2 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 6-2

Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Intf
(Read-Only)

See the interface number.

Port
(Read-Only)

See the number of the physical port on the interface. For the front panel
ports on the switch module, this will always be 1.

PortType
(Read-Only)

See the type of interface using the name of the physical port type. For
the Ethernet 10/100 Mbps ports in the switch module, FE-100TX will
be displayed. If a Fast Ethernet port is installed via an optional HSIM,
the interface displayed may be FE-100TX or FE100-FX. If a Gigabit
port is installed via an optional VHSIM, the interface displayed may be
GE-1000SX, GE-1000LX, or GE-1000CX.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-5

Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen

Table 6-2 Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)
Use this field…

To…

Link
(Read-Only)

See whether or not there is a physical connection from the port to
another device. One of the following values is displayed:
Link – There is a link signal present and a valid physical connection to
another device.
No Link – There is no link signal present and there is no valid physical
connection to another device.

Speed
(Read-Only)

See the current operational speed in Mbps (10, 100 or 1000). If the port
has not completed its auto-negotiation, “NA” displays.

Duplex
(Read-Only)

See the current duplex setting as follows:
Half – the port is operating in half duplex mode.
Full – the port is operating in full duplex mode.
NA – the port has not completed its auto-negotiation.

Config
(Read-Only)

See whether Auto-Negotiation (AutoNeg) or Manual is enabled. In
normal operation, the port with an FE-100TX interface is capable of
auto-negotiating the operational mode and no further user setup is
required.
NOTE: In normal operation, the front panel ports of the
switch module automatically establish a link with the device at
the other end of the segment without requiring user setup.
However, Local Management provides the user with the
option of manually configuring that port.

FDX FC
(Read-Only)

6-6

See the current full duplex flow control setting. Flow control is used to
manage the transmission between two devices as specified by
IEEE 802.3x to prevent receiving ports from being congested by
frames from transmitting devices. One of the following values is
displayed: Sym, AsymRx, AsymTx, Off, or NA. NA (Not Applicable)
is displayed when the port does not support flow control. Detailed
explanations of the other selections are in Section 6.3, under the Full
Duplex Flow Control definition.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen

Table 6-2

Ethernet Interface Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

HDX FC
(Read-Only)

See the current half duplex flow control setting. Half duplex flow
control, also known as back pressure, is a collision based flow control
mechanism used in half duplex configurations. The port will display
On, Off, or NA. NA is displayed when the port does not support flow
control.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-7

Ethernet Port Configuration Screen

6.3

ETHERNET PORT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To change the operating mode of a specific Ethernet interface, such as the speed, duplex,
auto-negotiation, advertised ability, and the flow control settings. Configuring optional Fast
Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet ports is also done on this screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired Ethernet port on the Ethernet Interface Configuration
screen and press ENTER. The Ethernet Port Configuration screen, Figure 6-4, displays for the
selected port.

Screen Example
Figure 6-4 Ethernet Port Configuration Screen

Interface: 25

Physical Port: 1

Default Speed:

[ 100]

Default Duplex:

[ Full]

Auto-Negotiation State:

[Enabled ]

Advertised Ability:

[100Base-TXFD]

[Enabled]

Full Duplex Flow Control: [Auto-Negotiate]
Half Duplex Flow Control: [On]

SAVE

SAVE TO ALL PORTS

EXIT

RETURN
25041-93w

6-8

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Ethernet Port Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-3 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 6-3

Ethernet Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Interface
(Read-Only)

See the Interface number.

Physical Port
(Read-Only)

See the number of the physical port on the interface.

Default Speed
(Selectable)

See the current operational speed in Mbps. Display options are 10, 100,
and 1000. If Auto-Negotiation is disabled for the port, then the port
defaults to operate in the setting displayed. To select a Default Speed,
refer to Section 6.3.1.

Default Duplex
(Toggle)

Choose the default duplex mode: Half, for half duplex, or Full, for full
duplex. If Auto-Negotiation is disabled for the port, then the port
defaults to operate in the setting displayed. To choose the Default
Duplex, refer to Section 6.3.1.

Auto-Negotiation
State
(Toggle)

Determine whether Auto-Negotiation is Enabled or Disabled for the
specific port. During Auto-Negotiation, the port “tells” the device at
the other end of the segment what its capabilities are. If
Auto-Negotiation is disabled, the port reverts to the speed, duplex and
flow control settings specified by Default Speed, Default Duplex, Half
Duplex Flow Control and Full Duplex Flow Control fields respectively.
To choose the Auto-Negotiation State, refer to Section 6.3.1.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-9

Ethernet Port Configuration Screen

Table 6-3 Ethernet Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)
Use this field…

To…

Advertised Ability
(Selectable)

Select the port “advertised” mode of operation. In normal operation,
with all capabilities enabled, the port “advertises” that it has the ability
to operate in any mode. The user may choose to set up the port so that
only a portion of the available capabilities are advertised and the others
are disabled. The left field displays the advertised ability of the port,
but only becomes active on ports that have Auto-Negotiation enabled.
The status of a particular ability is displayed in the right field. The “T”
in an ability stands for twisted pair. The possible abilities are listed
below. Only those abilities that are supported will be available.
10Base-T – 10 Mbps operation
10Base-TFD – 10 Mbps full duplex operation
100Base-TX – 100 Mbps operation
100Base-TXFD – 100 Mbps full duplex operation
1000Base-X – 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX Gigabit Ethernet
1000Base-T – 1000 Base-T Gigabit Ethernet
1000Base-XFD – 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX Full Duplex Gigabit
Ethernet
1000Base-TFD – 1000Base-T Full Duplex Gigabit Ethernet
FDX PAUSE – Symmetric PAUSE operation for 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
ports in full duplex
FDX APAUSE – Asymmetric PAUSE operation for full-duplex links in
Gigabit Ethernet
FDX SPAUSE – Symmetric PAUSE operation for full-duplex links in
Gigabit Ethernet
FDX BPAUSE – Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE operation for full
duplex links in Gigabit Ethernet
Rem Fault 1 – simple fault or error detection is supported
Rem Fault 2 – simple fault or error detection is supported
To enable or disable advertised modes, refer to Section 6.3.2.

6-10

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Ethernet Port Configuration Screen

Table 6-3

Ethernet Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Full Duplex Flow
Control
(Selectable)

Set the flow control feature on each port for a specific mode. The
choices are as follows:
Symmetric – the port operates in Symmetric mode, causing the port to
interpret received PAUSE frames and allow the port to transmit PAUSE
frames when necessary at any speed connection.
Asymmetric Rx – the port operates in Asymmetric Rx mode, causing
the port to interpret received PAUSE frames and prevent the port from
transmitting PAUSE frames. This option is for Gigabit only.
Asymmetric Tx – the port operates in Asymmetric Tx mode, causing
the port to ignore PAUSE frames and allow the port to transmit PAUSE
frames when necessary. This option is for Gigabit only.
Disabled – full duplex flow control is off, causing the port to ignore
received PAUSE frames and prevent the port from transmitting PAUSE
frames at any speed connection.
Auto-Negotiate – when supported, the maximum flow control
capabilities of the port are reflected in the PAUSE bits of the
Auto-Negotiation registers. The ports’ flow control operational state is
determined by the results of Auto-Negotiation. This option is not
displayed if Auto-Negotiation is not supported on this port.
To change the settings for full duplex flow control, refer to
Section 6.3.1.

Half Duplex Flow
Control
(Toggle)

Enable the half duplex flow control mode. Back pressure half duplex
flow control is enabled when the port is set to On, and disabled when
the port is set to Off. To change the settings, refer to Section 6.3.1.

SAVE TO ALL
PORTS
(Command)

Apply the currently displayed settings on the screen to all ports. To
save the settings to all ports, highlight this command and press
ENTER.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-11

Ethernet Port Configuration Screen

6.3.1

Selecting Field Settings

All selectable or toggle fields other than Advertised Ability can be changed by following this
procedure:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the field to be changed.
2. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step or toggle through the selections.
3. Press the ENTER key when the desired selection is displayed.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER.
The selection is saved for that interface. If the setting is to apply to all ports, use the arrow keys
to highlight SAVE TO ALL PORTS command and press ENTER. The setting is saved and
applied to all ports.

6.3.2

Setting the Advertised Ability

During normal operation, all front panel ports auto-negotiate to the highest speed possible. Under
some circumstances, the Network Administrator may want the port to advertise only some of the
available modes and not operate in other modes.
To set the advertised ability, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Advertised Ability field.
2. Use the SPACE bar to select the desired mode.
3. Use the arrow keys to move to the Enabled/Disabled field.
4. Use the SPACE bar to select Enabled or Disabled. Press ENTER. If the setting is to apply to
all ports, use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE TO ALL PORTS command and press
ENTER. The setting is saved and applied to all ports.
5. Use the arrow keys to move back to the Advertised Ability selection and use the SPACE bar to
select the next mode to enable or disable.
6. Continue this process until enabling or disabling the advertised modes is completed.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED
OK” displays and Local Management saves the configuration.

6-12

Port Configuration Menu Screens

HSIM/VHSIM Configuration Screen

6.4

HSIM/VHSIM CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To configure an optional HSIM or VHSIM.
NOTE: The HSIM/VHSIM Configuration menu item can only be selected when a
non-Ethernet HSIM or VHSIM is installed in the switch module. The applicable setup
screen for that interface displays. This only applies to HSIMs and VHSIMs that can
support WAN, FDDI or ATM. Refer to the appropriate HSIM or VHSIM user’s guide to set
its operating parameters.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the HSIM/VHSIM CONFIGURATION menu item on the Port
Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The applicable HSIM or VHSIM setup screen
displays. Refer to the appropriate HSIM or VHSIM user’s guide for instructions on using the Local
Management screens for that interface.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-13

Redirect Configuration Menu Screen

6.5

REDIRECT CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN

For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
Port Configuration Menu > Redirect Configuration Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > Port
Configuration Menu > Redirect Configuration Menu

When to Use
To access the Port Redirect Configuration and VLAN Redirect Configuration screens. Any
combination, up to 128, of port and/or VLAN redirect instances can be configured from these
screens. The feature is useful in troubleshooting. It enables you to monitor traffic at a destination
port using analyzers, RMON probes, and IDS sensors.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the REDIRECT CONFIGURATION MENU item on the Port
Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Redirect Configuration Menu screen,
Figure 6-5, displays.

6-14

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Redirect Configuration Menu Screen

Screen Example
Figure 6-5

Redirect Configuration Menu Screen

PORT REDIRECT CONFIGURATION
VLAN REDIRECT CONFIGURATION

EXIT

RETURN
2504_94w

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-4 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 6-4

Redirect Configuration Menu Screen Field Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

PORT REDIRECT
CONFIGURATION

Used to redirect traffic from a source switch port to a destination
switch port. For details, refer to Section 6.6.

VLAN REDIRECT
CONFIGURATION

Used to configure the switch module to direct traffic from a VLAN to a
particular switch port. For details, refer to Section 6.7.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-15

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

6.6

PORT REDIRECT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use (for 6C105 Chassis)
To redirect frames from one source port to many destination ports or many source ports to one
destination port on a switch module in a 6C105 chassis. Frames received on a source port can be
redirected and transmitted in the frame format in which they are received (normal), or they can be
redirected with a VLAN Tag (TAGGED) or without a VLAN Tag (UNTAGGED). Also, any
errored frames received can be either dropped or forwarded to a destination port.
For example, port 1 can be set as the source port with ports 2 and 5 as the destination ports. Frames
from port 1 are then automatically redirected to ports 2 and 5 according to the configured frame
format, and frames with errors can be either forwarded or dropped according to the screen settings.
NOTE: The switch module supports a maximum of 128 redirect entries configured
including VLAN redirect, port redirect and, if the module has an optional ATM interface
installed, any ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) redirect entries.

The port redirect function is useful for troubleshooting purposes. It allows all inbound and
outbound traffic from one or more source ports to be sent to a destination port where all current
traffic from the source ports can be examined using analyzers, RMON probes, or IDS sensors.
NOTE: Although all redirected traffic (including, if desired, errored frames) from a
source port are sent to the destination port, normal switching is still performed for all
frames on the source ports.

When to Use (for 6C107 Chassis)
To redirect frames in modules installed in a 6C107 chassis. The information above applies to
modules installed in the 6C105 chassis. However, when configuring 6000 series modules installed
in a 6C107 chassis, there are special considerations to take into account when redirecting many
ports to one port, or one port to many ports.
When installing 6X2XX modules into the 6C107 chassis, note the following:

• There are no restrictions when all modules in the 6C107 chassis are 6X3XX series and 6X2XX
series modules

• Redirecting ports between 6X3XX series and 6X2XX series modules is only possible when all
modules are installed in slots one through five.

6-16

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

• You can redirect frames between any Ethernet 6X2XX series module ports and any other
Ethernet ports.

• The VLAN tag in the frame, as it is being mirrored, is maintained and forwarded to the
destination mirrored port.

• You can add a new port redirect entry to a destination port that is already saved and active.
However, this will cause a Local Management warning to appear at the top left corner of the
screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the PORT REDIRECT CONFIGURATION menu item on the
Redirect Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Port Redirect Configuration screen,
Figure 6-6, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 6-6

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

Source Port
-------------------3

Destination Port
---------------------7

Frame Format
--------------------NORMAL

Redirect Errors
--------------------ON

4

7

TAGGED

ON

6

7

UNTAGGED

OFF

12

10

TAGGED

ON

12

12

TAGGED

ON

12

15

TAGGED

ON

12

20

UNTAGGED

ON

--

--

Source Port

[12]

Destination Port [20]
SAVE

--

Frame Format

[UNTAGGED]

Redirect Errors

[ON]

PREVIOUS

NEXT

--

Status

EXIT

[ADD]

RETURN
RETURN
3528-22

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-5 for a functional description of each screen field.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-17

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

Table 6-5 Port Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions
Use this field…

To…

Source Port
(Read-Only)

See which ports are currently set as source ports.

Destination Port
(Read-Only)

See which ports are currently set as destination ports.

Frame Format
(Read-Only)

See the current frame format setting: NORMAL, TAGGED, or
UNTAGGED. The default is NORMAL.
NORMAL – Frames are redirected in the format that they were
received or transmitted on the source port.
TAGGED – Frames are transmitted on the destination port with a
VLAN tag inserted according to the frame classification.
UNTAGGED – Frames are transmitted on the destination port without
a VLAN tag regardless of the format of the received frame.

Redirect Errors
(Read-Only)

See whether the corresponding source ports are configured ON to send
errored frames to the destination ports, or OFF to drop all errored
frames and only forward valid frames to the destination ports. All
redirected error frames display in the way they were received or
transmitted on the source port, regardless of the frame format setting.

Source Port [n]
(Selectable)

Select the port [n] that is to be changed to a source port. More than one
source port can be redirected to one destination port. For details, refer
to Section 6.6.1.

Destination Port [n]
(Selectable)

Select the port [n] that is to be changed to a destination port. More than
one destination port can be redirected to one source port. For details,
refer to Section 6.6.1.

Frame Format
(Selectable)

Select the frame format for the transmission of redirected frames on the
destination port. NORMAL, TAGGED, or UNTAGGED may be
selected. Refer to the previously described read-only Frame Format
field for details about each format. The default setting is NORMAL.

6-18

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Port Redirect Configuration Screen

Table 6-5

Port Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Redirect Errors
(Toggle)

Set each source port to either ON, to send errored frames to its
destination port, or OFF to drop errored frames and send only valid
traffic to its destination port. The default setting is OFF.

Status
(Toggle)

Add or delete source and destination ports selected in the Source Port
[n] and Destination Port [n] fields.

6.6.1

Changing Source and Destination Ports

To add or delete source port and destination port entries and set the Frame Format and Redirect
Errors functions, proceed as follows:
NOTE: Before entering any port redirect information, refer to When to Use (for 6C105
Chassis) and When to Use (for 6C107 Chassis) in Section 6.6 for details and special
configuration considerations.

1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Source Port field near the bottom of the screen.
2. Press the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key one or more times to increment or decrement the
port number displayed in the brackets [n] until the appropriate port number displays.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Destination Port field near the bottom of the screen.
4. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the appropriate port number for the
destination port.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Frame Format field near the bottom of the screen.
6. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the appropriate frame format setting
(NORMAL, TAGGED, or UNTAGGED) for the selected Destination Port.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Redirect Errors field near the bottom of the screen.
8. Use the SPACE bar to select either the ON or OFF option and press ENTER. ON forces the
source port to forward errored frames to the destination port(s). OFF forces the errored frames
to be dropped before forwarding traffic.
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Status field.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-19

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

10.Use the SPACE bar to select either the ADD or DEL (delete) option. Press ENTER. This adds
or deletes the selections for the Source Port, Destination Port, Frame Format, and Redirect
Errors made in steps 1 through 8 and also updates the screen.
TIP: If more than 1 port is being redirected, repeat steps 1 through 10 for each
additional setting. Then go to step 11 to save all the new settings at once.
If an entry is to be changed, delete the entry, save the screen, then recreate the entry
with its new settings.
NOTES: Any combination, up to 128 total, of port redirect instances can be configured
on the Port Redirect Configuration screen, and/or VLAN redirect instances on the VLAN
Redirect Configuration screen. Up to 24 instances can be configured as remote
instances to other modules in the chassis. Remote instances are instances that are
mapped from one module to another within the same chassis.
If the module has an optional ATM interface installed, ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits
(PVCs) redirect entries should also be considered as part of the 128 maximum redirect
entries for the module.

11.Use the arrow keys to highlight SAVE at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER. The message
“SAVED OK” displays. This saves the new settings and updates the Source Port and Destination
Port read-only fields.

6.7

VLAN REDIRECT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To redirect frames in a 6C105 chassis from one or more source VLANs to one destination port on
the switch module. Frames received on a source VLAN can be redirected and transmitted in the
frame format in which they are received (normal), or they can be redirected with a VLAN Tag
(TAGGED) or without a VLAN Tag (UNTAGGED). Also, any errored frames received dropped.
For example, VLAN 1 can be set as the source VLAN with VLANs 2 and 5 as the destination

VLANs. Frames from VLAN 1 are then automatically redirected to VLANs 2 and 5 according to
the configured frame format, and VLAN frames with errors are dropped.
NOTE: The switch module supports a maximum of 128 redirect entries configured
including VLAN redirect, and port redirect. This also includes any ATM Permanent
Virtual Circuits (PVCs) redirect entries if the module has an optional ATM interfaces
installed.

6-20

Port Configuration Menu Screens

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

The VLAN redirect function is very useful for troubleshooting purposes. It allows all inbound and
outbound traffic from one or more source VLANs to be sent to a destination VLAN where all
current traffic from the source VLANs can be examined using analyzers, RMON probes, or IDS
sensors.
NOTE: Although traffic associated with a particular VLAN is sent to the destination port,
normal switching is still performed for all frames on the source port.
The Redirect Errors function is not supported on this screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN REDIRECT CONFIGURATION menu item on the
Redirect Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The VLAN Redirect Configuration
screen, Figure 6-7, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 6-7

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

Source VLAN
--------------------1

Destination Port
---------------------2

3

2

TAGGED

UNSUPPORTED

6

9

UNTAGGED

UNSUPPORTED

2

7

TAGGED

UNSUPPORTED

5

7

TAGGED

UNSUPPORTED

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Source VLAN

[1]

Destination Port [1]
SAVE

Frame Format
-------------------RECEIVED

Frame Format

[UNTAGGED]

Redirect Errors

Unsupported

PREVIOUS

NEXT

Redirect Errors
--------------------UNSUPPORTED

Status

EXIT

[ADD]

RETURN
RETURN
3528-23

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-21

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-6 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 6-6 VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen Field Descriptions
Use this field…

To…

Source VLAN
(Read-Only)

See the VLAN ID of the VLANs that are currently set as source
VLANs. (Multiple VLANs may be assigned to one destination port.)

Destination Port
(Read-Only)

See which ports are currently set as destination ports. There can be
only one destination port associated with one or more VLANs.

Frame Format
(Read-Only)

See the current frame format setting: RECEIVED, TAGGED, or
UNTAGGED. The default is RECEIVED.

• RECEIVED – Frames are redirected in the format that they were
received by the switch module.

• TAGGED – Frames are transmitted on the destination port with a
VLAN tag inserted according to the frame classification of the
receiving port.

• UNTAGGED – Frames are transmitted on the destination port
without a VLAN tag regardless of the format of the received frame.
Redirect Errors

Unsupported.

Source VLAN [n]
(Selectable)

Select the VLAN ID of the VLAN that is to be changed to a source
VLAN. More than one source VLAN can be redirected to one
destination port. For details, refer to Section 6.7.1.

Destination Port [n]
(Selectable)

Select the port number that is to be changed to a destination port. For
details, refer to Section 6.7.1.

Frame Format
(Selectable)

Select the frame format for the transmission of redirected frames on the
destination port. RECEIVED, TAGGED, or UNTAGGED may be
selected. Refer to the previously described read-only Frame Format
field for details about each format. The default setting is RECEIVED.

Redirect Errors

Unsupported.

Status
(Toggle)

Add or delete source and destination ports selected in the Source
VLAN [n] and Destination Port [n] fields.

6-22

Port Configuration Menu Screens

VLAN Redirect Configuration Screen

6.7.1

Changing Source VLAN and Destination Ports

To add or delete source VLAN and destination port entries and set the Frame Format, proceed as
follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Source VLAN field near the bottom of the screen.
2. Type in the VLAN ID number of the source VLAN to be configured.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Destination Port field near the bottom of the screen.
4. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the appropriate port number for the
destination port.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Frame Format field near the bottom of the screen.
6. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step to the appropriate frame format setting
(RECEIVED, TAGGED, or UNTAGGED) for the selected Destination Port.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Status field.
8. Use the SPACE bar to select either the ADD or DEL (delete) option. Press ENTER. This adds
or deletes the selections for the Source VLAN, Destination Port, and Frame Format made in
steps 1 through 6 and also updates the screen.
TIP: If more than 1 port is being redirected, repeat steps 1 through 8 for each additional
setting. Then go to step 9 to save all the new settings at once.
If an entry is to be changed, delete the entry, save the screen, then recreate the entry
with its new settings.
NOTES: Any combination, up to 128 total, of port redirect instances can be configured
on the Port Redirect Configuration screen, and/or VLAN redirect instances on the VLAN
Redirect Configuration screen. Up to 24 instances can be configured as remote
instances to other modules in the chassis. Remote instances are instances that are
mapped from one module to another within the same chassis.
If the module has an optional ATM interface installed, ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits
(PVCs) redirect entries should also be considered as part of the 128 maximum redirect
entries for the module.

9. Use the arrow keys to highlight SAVE at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER. The message
“SAVED OK” displays. This saves the new settings and updates the Source Port and Destination
Port read-only fields.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-23

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

6.8

LINK AGGREGATION SCREEN (802.3ad MAIN MENU SCREEN)
CAUTION: These screens should be used only by personnel who are knowledgeable
about Spanning Tree and Link Aggregation and fully understand the ramifications of
modifications beyond defaults. Otherwise, the proper operation of the network could be
at risk.

For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
Port Configuration Menu > Link Aggregation Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > Port
Configuration Menu > Link Aggregation Menu

When to Use
To access the Port, Aggregator, or System information screens, and to configure port trunking
according to the IEEE 802.3ad standard.

Usage Notes
In normal usage (and typical implementations) there is no need to modify any of these parameters.
The default values will result in the maximum number of aggregations possible. If the switch is
placed in a configuration with its peers not running the protocol, no aggregations will be formed
and the switch will function normally (that is, will block redundant paths).
IEEE 802.3ad determines if ports are physically capable of aggregating by comparing the
operational keys of ports.With this IEEE 802.3ad implementation, the operation key is the same as
the administrative key assigned by management, so ports assigned different administrative key
values will then have different operational key values, and will not aggregate.
Aggregators also have an administrative and operational key. If a group of ports are in the same
LAG (Link Aggregation Group) but there is no aggregator with a matching operational key, they
will not be able to aggregate.
IEEE 802.3ad allows groups of ports in different systems to be considered within the same switch.
The system priority is used in conjunction with the System Identifier to determine the switch’s
system ID. Similar to keys, if ports are given different system priority values, they will not
aggregate. In addition, this system priority has to match the system priority of an aggregator or no
connection can be made.

6-24

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

According to the IEEE 802.3ad standard, a port does not detach from an aggregator because of link
loss. If a port is attached to an aggregator and the link is removed, the port’s mux machine will
transition from COLLECTING to ATTACHED; however, it will remain attached to the same
aggregator.
Ports that are attached to an aggregator will enter a Spanning Tree state of AGGREGATING on the
Spanning Tree screens, just as they do when manually placed in a trunk.
In this implementation, the concept of an aggregator is for a non-aggregated port to attach to,
although this aggregator doesn’t exist in any real sense. A port that is not a member of an
aggregation will be displayed in LM as attached to a non-existent aggregation. If a port instance
matches the aggregator instance it is attached to, that means it is not aggregating.
There are a few cases in which the 802.3ad implementation will disable a port’s ability to
aggregate by clearing the aggregable bit ActorOperState:

• A port is attached to another port on this same switch (loopback). There is no available
aggregator for 2 or more ports with the same LAGID. This can happen if either there are simply
no available aggregators, or if none of the aggregators have a matching operational key and
system priority.

• A port is in the same LAG as another port but is running at a slower speed. Ports running at
different speeds are not allowed to aggregate according to 802.3ad.
NOTE: Ports running at half-duplex cannot aggregate.

There is a maximum of six aggregators per module.

Definitions to Know
Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning Tree
Rapid Reconfiguration is an enhancement to the legacy 802.1D Spanning Tree implementation,
which implements a rapidly converging Spanning Tree algorithm that is event-driven instead of
timer-driven.
Spanning Tree
When multiple links are connected from one switch to another, it is necessary that only one link be
allowed to switch network traffic. Due to the functionality of a switch, if multiple links were
active, a packet would end up “looping” around in those links indefinitely. This problem is well
documented and is the reason that bridges implement the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-25

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

The STP is able to calculate which ports on a switch can be allowed to forward traffic to eliminate
the possibility of looping in a network. So, if multiple links were attached between two switches,
only one would be used. The remaining links would be placed in a disabled state called
“Blocking.”
Link Aggregation
It is desirable to have a way to use multiple interswitch links simultaneously to increase
interswitch bandwidth. This can be done if both sides agree on a set of ports that are being used as
an interswitch link called a “Trunk.” As long as both switches agree on which ports are in this
trunk, there are no problems with looping, and the Spanning Tree can treat this trunk as a single
port.

6-26

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Proprietary Aggregation Methods
Most switch vendors provide a way to group these ports together manually. For example, the user
could configure Ports 1, 2 and 3 in a trunk on switch X and connect to ports 4, 5 and 6 that are in a
trunk on switch Y. By interconnecting the switches together, the effective bandwidth can be
aggregated to the sum of the parts. The Enterasys Networks’ implementation is called
SmartTrunking.
IEEE 802.3ad
All the methods of trunking multiple links have involved manually choosing the links that are part
of the trunk. The IEEE 802.3ad specification allows the switch to determine which links are in
trunks and configure them dynamically. Since the protocol is based on IEEE standards
specifications, any switch from any vendor that supports this protocol can trunk links
automatically.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the LINK AGGREGATION MENU item in the Port
Configuration Menu screen described in Section 6.1 and press ENTER. The 802.3ad Main Menu
screen, Figure 6-8, displays.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-27

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Screen Example
Figure 6-8 802.3ad Main Menu Screen

PORT
AGGREGATOR
SYSTEM

EXIT

RETURN
3650_14

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-7 for a functional description of each menu item.

6-28

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-7

802.3ad Main Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

PORT

Used to access the 802.3ad Port screen, described in Section 6.8.1, to
view port instances and to access the 802.3ad Port Details screen,
described in Section 6.8.1.1, and the Port Statistics screen, described in
Section 6.8.1.2.

AGGREGATOR

Used to access the 802.3ad Aggregator screen to display a summary of
all the available aggregators and other basic information, including the
aggregator interface instance, operational key, system priority, and the
number of ports currently attached to the aggregator. For details about
the 802.3ad Aggregator screen, refer to Section 6.8.2.
The 802.3ad Aggregator screen also enables you to access the 802.3ad
Aggregator Details screen for a particular port instance to modify, or
view its Aggregator parameters as described in Section 6.8.2.1.

SYSTEM

6.8.1

Used to view the 802.3ad System screen to see basic system-level
information: System Identifier, Number of Ports, and Number of
Aggregators. For details, refer to Section 6.8.3.

802.3ad Port Screen

When to Use
To display a summary of all the ports that are running 802.3ad and the information concerning the
ports associated with each Aggregator, the Operational Key, and the state of the port’s MUX state
machine.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the PORT menu item in the Link Aggregation Menu (802.3ad
Main Menu) screen, described in Section 6.8, and press ENTER. The 802.3ad Port screen,
Figure 6-9, displays.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-29

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Screen Example
Figure 6-9 802.3ad Port Screen

Port

Aggregator

OperKey

1

1

1

Attached

2

23

1

Distributing

3

23

1

Distributing

4

4

1

Attached

5

5

1

Attached

6

6

1

Attached

7

7

1

Distributing

8

8

1

Distributing

9

9

1

Attached

1

23

1

Distributing

11

11

1

Attached

12

12

1

Attached

NEXT

MUX

EXIT

RETURN
3650_15

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-8 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 6-8

802.3ad Port Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port
(Read-Only)

View the port number, which correlates to the port numbers in other
screens.

Aggregator
(Read-Only)

View the instance of the aggregator and the attached port. If the
aggregator instance matches the port instance, then the port is not
aggregating with any other port.

OperKey
(Read-Only)

View operation key of the port. For ports to be able to aggregate they
must have the same operation key.

MUX
(Read-Only)

View the state of the port’s mux state machine. It can have values of
DETACHED, ATTACHED, WAITING, COLLECTING or
DISTRIBUTING. If a port is connected to another port, this field
would display DISTRIBUTING. Otherwise, ATTACHED is displayed.

6-30

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Figure 6-9 shows the four columns of information: The Port Instance; the Aggregator that the Port
is attached to; the operational key of the Port, and the state of the port’s MUX state machine.

Viewing and Editing 802.3ad Port Parameters
To view the 802.3ad related port parameters of any port displayed on the screen, proceed as
follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the port number of interest under the Port field.
2. Press ENTER. The 802.3ad Port Details screen described in Section 6.8.1.1 is displayed. Once
in this screen, the parameters of any selected 802.3ad port can be edited and saved.

6.8.1.1

802.3ad Port Details Screen

When to Use
To view and configure all the port-related LACP parameters of any port instance shown in the
802.3ad Port screen described back in Section 6.8.1.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the line with the port of interest to display the details about that
port and press ENTER. The 802.3ad Port Details screen, Figure 6-10, is displayed, showing the
details of the port parameters (in this example for Port Instance 2) that can be modified.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-31

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Screen Example
Figure 6-10 802.3ad Port Details Screen

Port Instance 2
ActorSystemPriority: 1
ActorSystemID: 00:00:1d:b5:41:bb
ActorAdminKey: 1
ActorOperKey: 1
PartnerAdminSysPriority: 1
PartnerOperSysPriority: 1
PartnerAdminSysID: 00:00:00:00:00:00
PartnerOperSysID: 00:e0:63:9d:87:a2
PartnerAdminKey: 2
PartnerOperKey: 1
SelectedAggID 23

ActorPort: 2
ActorPortPriority: 1
PartnerAdminPort: 2
PartnerOperPort: 12
PartnerAdminPortPriority: 1
PartnerOperPortPriority: 1
ActorAdminState (hex): 05
ActorOperState: 0x3d --DCSAlA
PartnerAdminState (hex): 38
PartnerOperState: 0x3d --DCSAlA
AttachedAggID: 23

LAGID:[(0001,00001db541bb,0001,00,0000),(0001,00e0639d87a2,0001,00,0000)]
SAVE

STATS

EXIT

RETURN
3650-011_16

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-9 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 6-9

802.3ad Port Details Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port Instance
(Read-Only)

See the port number, which correlates to the port numbers in
other screens.

ActorSystemPriority
(Modifiable)

Set the system priority associated with this port for use used
in the construction of the LAG ID of the port.

ActorPort

See the identifier for this port (identical to Port Instance).

(Read-Only)

ActorSystemID
(Read-Only)

6-32

See the System Identifier for the system in which this port
resides.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-9

802.3ad Port Details Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

ActorPortPriority
(Modifiable)

Set the priority value of this port (not used in this
implementation).

ActorAdminKey

See the administratively assigned key value for this port.
Only ports with matching keys may aggregate.

(Read-Only)

PartnerAdminPort
(Modifiable)

ActorOperKey
(Read-Only)

PartnerOperPort
(Read-Only)

PartnerAdminSysPriority
(Modifiable)

PartnerAdminPortPriority
(Modifiable)

PartnerOperSysPriority

Enter a default value for PartnerOperPort when no protocol
partner is available.
See the current operation key for this port. Only ports with
matching operation keys may aggregate.
See ActorPort on the partner switch that we are currently
attached to.
Set a default value to use for the PartnerOperSysPriority
when no protocol partner is available.
Set a default value to use for the PartnerOperPortPriority
when no protocol partner is available.

(Read-Only)

See the system priority of the partner port used to construct
this port’s LAG ID.

PartnerOperPortPriority
(Read-Only)

See the port priority of the partner port (not used in this
implementation).

PartnerAdminSysID

Set a default value to use for PartnerAdminSysID when no
protocol partner is available.

(Modifiable)

ActorAdminState (hex)
(Modifiable)

Set the administrative value for this port’s Actor_State.
Allows administrative control over the values of
LACP_Activity, LACP_Timeout and Aggregation.

PartnerOperSysID

See system ID of this port’s partner.

(Read-Only)

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-33

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-9

802.3ad Port Details Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

ActorOperState

See the current (operational) value of the port’s Actor_State.
The hex value is displayed as well as the individual bit
fields. The fields are as follows.

(Read-Only)

bit 0 LACP_Activity, 1 indicates Active, 0 indicates passive.
If a port is Active, it will always transmit LACP PDUs.
If it is passive, it will only transmit LACP PDUs if it
sees LACP PDUs coming from its partner. If the bit is
set, an ‘A’ is displayed, otherwise a ‘p’ is displayed.
bit 1 LACP_Timeout, 1 indicates Short timeout, 0 indicates
long timeout.
A Short timeout indicates that this port will time out
information if an LACP PDU is not received for 3
seconds, a long timeout indicates that this port will
time out information if an LACP PDU is not received
for 90 seconds. If this bit is set, an ‘S’ is displayed,
otherwise, an ‘l’ is displayed.
bit 2 Aggregation, 1 indicates that a port is Aggregable, 0
indicates that a port is individual.
If a port is capable of being aggregated with other ports
then this bit will be 1, otherwise this port will be 0. If
this bit is 1 an ‘A’ is displayed, otherwise an ‘i’ is
displayed.
bit 3 Synchronization, 1 indicates this port is Synchronized,
0 indicates that this port is not synchronized.
If a port has selected and attached to the correct
aggregator then a port is said to be synchronized. If
this bit is true an ‘S’ is displayed, otherwise a ‘-’ is
displayed for this bit position.
bit 4 Collecting, 1 indicates we are Collecting, 0 indicates
that this port is not collection.
“Collecting” means that a port is ready to receive traffic.
If Collecting is true a ‘C’ is displayed, otherwise, a ‘-’ is
displayed in this bit position.
6-34

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-9

802.3ad Port Details Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

ActorOperState

bit 5 Distributing, 1 indicates that this port is Distributing.

(Read-Only) (Continued)

“Distributing” means that a port is ready to transmit
traffic. If Distributing is true a ‘D’ is displayed,
otherwise a ‘-’ is displayed in this bit position.
bit 6 Defaulted, 1 indicates that this port has deFaulted.
If no protocol partner is available a port will resort to
using default information about its partner. When this
happens a port is said to be defaulted. If this bit is 1 an
‘F’ is displayed, otherwise a ‘-’ is displayed in this bit
position.
bit 7 Expired, 1 indicates that we have Expired.
This indicates that no LACP PDUs have been received
for a sufficient length of time so the partner
information has expired. If this is true, an ‘E’ is
displayed, otherwise a ‘-’ is displayed in this bit
position.

PartnerAdminKey
(Modifiable)

PartnerAdminState (hex)
(Modifiable)

PartnerOperKey
(Read-Only)

PartnerOperState
(Read-Only)

Set a default value to use for PartnerOperKey when no
protocol partner is available.
Set a default value to use for PartnerOperState when no
protocol partner is available.
See a default value to use for PartnerOperState when no
protocol partner is available.
See current state value of the partner port (same bits as the
ActorOperState).

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-35

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-9

802.3ad Port Details Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

SelectedAggID

See the instance of the aggregator that this port has selected.

(Read-Only)

AttachedAggID
(Read-Only)

See the instance of the aggregator to which this port is
attached.

LAGID
(Read-Only)

See the complete link aggregation group identifier for the
port. Ports with identical LAG IDs will be connected to the
same aggregator. The various PartnerAdmin values are
copied into the corresponding PartnerOper fields when no
protocol partner is present (see RecordDefault in the AD
spec). This allows for manual configuration of groups when
no protocol partner is present.

STATS
(Command)

Open the 802.3ad Port Statistics screen described in
Section 6.8.1.2 to display the current statistics of the port
displayed in the Port Instance field.

Viewing and Editing 802.3ad Port Parameters
To change a parameter, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the parameter field to be modified and type in the new value.
Press ENTER. Repeat this step to change other parameter settings as necessary before saving the
new settings.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
3. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays. All settings are saved.

Displaying Port Statistics
To display statistical information about the port displayed in the Port Instance field, proceed as
follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the STATS command at the bottom of the screen.
2. Press ENTER. The 802.3ad Port Statistics screen described in Section 6.8.1.2 is displayed,
showing the current port statistics.

6-36

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

6.8.1.2

802.3ad Port Statistics Screen

When to Use
To view all the port-related LACP parameters about a port instance shown in the 802.3ad Port
Details screen described back in Section 6.8.1.1.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the STATS command in the 802.3ad Port Details screen and press
ENTER. The 802.3ad Port Statistics screen (Figure 6-11) displays. The figure shows an example
of how the details are displayed (in this example for Port Instance 2).

Screen Example
Figure 6-11

802.3ad Port Statistics Screen

Port Instance 2
LACPDUsRx:
MarkerPDUsRx:
MarkerResponsePDUsRx:
UnknownRx:
RxState:
ActorChurnState:
ActorChurnCount:
AsyncTransCount:
ActorChangeCount:
MuxState:
MuxReason:

5457
0
0
0

IllegalRx:
LACPDUsTx:
MarkerPDUsTx:
MarkerResponsePDUsTx:

current
LastRxTime (delta):
noChurn
PartnerChurnState:
0
PartnerChurnCount:
2
PsyncTransCount:
1
PartnerChangeCount:
Distrib
SELECTED & PSync & PColl

EXIT

0
5456
0
0
11.53 Sec
noChurn
1
1
0

RETURN
3650-011_17

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-10 for a functional description of each screen field.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-37

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-10

802.3ad Port Statistics Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port Instance
(Read-Only)

See a unique number used to identify this port. This corresponds
to the port numbering scheme seen in other screens.

LACPDUsRx
(Read-Only)

See the number of valid Marker PDUs that this Aggregation Port
can receive.

IllegalRx
(Read-Only)

See the number of received frames carrying the Slow Protocol’s
Ethernet Type value (34B.4), and also contain a badly formed
PDU or a value of Protocol Subtype (43B.4) that is illegal.

MarkerPDUsRx
(Read-Only)

See the number of valid Marker Response PDUs that this
Aggregation Port can receive.

LACPDUsTx
(Read-Only)

See the number of LAC PDUs that this Aggregation Port can
transmit.

MarkerResponsePDUsRx
(Read-Only)

See the number of Marker Response PDUs that this Aggregation
Port can transmit.

MarkerPDUsTx
(Read-Only)

See the number of Marker PDUs that this Aggregation Port can
transmit.

UnknownRx
(Read-Only)

See the number of Unknown frames that can be received that
either

• carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an
unknown PDU, or

• are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but
do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type.
This is a 32-bit counter of the number of Unknown frames
received, so the value can range from 0 to 2^32-1 (or 0 to
4,294,967,296).
MarkerResponsePDUsTx
(Read-Only)

See the number of Marker Response PDUs that this Aggregation
Port can transmit.

RxState
(Read-Only)

See the state of the Receive state machine for this port.

6-38

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-10

802.3ad Port Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

LastRxTime(delta)
(Read-Only)

See the amount of time since the last LACP PDU has been
received on this port.

ActorChurnState
(Read-Only)

See the state of the Actor Churn state machine for this port.
Values can be noChurn, churn, or churnMonitor. Churn indicates
that the port is unable to find an aggregator to attach to.

PartnerChurnState
(Read-Only)

See the state of the Partner Churn state machine for this port.

ActorChurnCount
(Read-Only)

See the number of times this port’s Actor Churn machine has
entered the churn state.

PartnerChurnCount
(Read-Only)

See the number of times this port’s Partner Churn machine has
entered the churn state.

AsyncTransCount
(Read-Only)

See a count of how many times the Actor’s Mux state machine
enters the IN-Sync state.

PsyncTransCount
(Read-Only)

See a count of how many times the Partner’s Mux state machine
enters the IN-Sync state.

ActorChangeCount
(Read-Only)

See a count of how many times the Actor’s perception of the
LAG ID changes for this Aggregation Port.

PartnerChangeCount
(Read-Only)

See a count of how many times the Partner’s perception of the
LAG ID (see 43.3.6.1) changes for this Aggregation Port.

MuxState
(Read-Only)

See the state of the Mux state machine for this port.

MuxReason
(Read-Only)

See the string of text describing why the Mux machine is in its
current state.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-39

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

6.8.2

802.3ad Aggregator Screen

When to Use
To see a summary of all the available aggregators and other basic information, including the
aggregator interface instance, operational key, system priority, and the number of ports currently
attached to the aggregator.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the AGGREGATOR menu item in 802.3ad Main Menu screen
and press ENTER. The 802.3ad Aggregator screen, Figure 6-12, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 6-12 802.3ad Aggregator Screen

AggInst

OperKey

SysPri

NumPorts

23

1

1

3

24

1

1

0

25

1

1

0

26

1

1

0

27

1

1

0

28

1

1

0

EXIT

RETURN
3650_18

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-11 for a functional description of each screen field.

6-40

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-11

802.3ad Aggregator Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

AggInst
(Read-Only)

See dot3adAggIndex, a unique number that identifies this aggregator.

OperKey
(Read-Only)

See dot3adAggActorOperKey, the associated operational key value.

SysPri
(Read-Only)

See dot3adAggActorSystemPriority, the priority value associated with
this aggregator.

NumPorts
(Read-Only)

See the number of ports that are currently attached to this aggregator.

Viewing and Editing 802.3ad Aggregator Parameters
To view or change Aggregator parameters, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the parameter field to be modified and type in the new value.
Press ENTER. Repeat this step to change other parameter settings as necessary before saving the
new settings.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
3. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays. All settings are saved.

Displaying Aggregator Details
To display detail information about an Aggregator, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the line containing the Aggregator of interest.
2. Press ENTER. The 802.3ad Aggregator Details screen, described in Section 6.8.2.1, is displayed
showing the details of the selected Aggregator.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-41

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

6.8.2.1

802.3ad Aggregator Details Screen

When to Use
To see the current parameter details of the Aggregator Instance selected on the 802.3ad Aggregator
screen described in Section 6.8.2.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the line containing the Aggregator of interest on the 802.3ad
Aggregator screen and press ENTER. The 802.3ad Aggregator Details screen, Figure 6-13,
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 6-13 802.3ad Aggregator Details Screen

Aggregator Instance:

System Identifier:
System Priority:
Admin Key:
Oper Key:
Collector Max Delay:
Attached Ports

23
Actor

Partner

00:00:1d:b5:41:bb
1
1
1

00:e0:63:9d:87:a2
1
1

20000

SAVE

EXIT

RETURN
3650-011_19

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-12 for a functional description of each screen field.

6-42

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Table 6-12

802.3ad Aggregator Details Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Aggregator
Instance

See the instance of the aggregator being viewed. The instance is a
numerical value used to uniquely identify an aggregator in a system
and matches the aggregator’s logical port number.

Actor
System
Identifier

See the System associated with the aggregator.

(Read-Only)

System
Priority

See the system priority value of this aggregator.

(Read-Only)

Admin Key

See the Key assigned by management.

(Read-Only)

Oper Key

See the current Key being used by the aggregator.

(Read-Only)

Collector Max
Delay
(Read-Only)

See the value of this 16-bit read-write attribute, which defines the
maximum delay, in tens of microseconds, that may be imposed by the
Frame Collector between receiving a frame from an Aggregator Parser,
and either delivering the frame to its MAC Client or discarding the
frame.

Partner

System
Identifier

See which system belongs to the remote (partner) aggregator.

(Read-Only)

System
Priority

See the system priority of the remote aggregator.

(Read-Only)

Oper Key

See the operational Key of the remote aggregator.

(Read-Only)

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-43

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

6.8.3

802.3ad System Screen

When to Use
To see basic system-level information, such as System Identifier, Number of Ports and Number of
Aggregators.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SYSTEM menu item in 802.3ad Main Menu screen and press
ENTER. The 802.3ad System screen, Figure 6-14, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 6-14 802.3ad System Screen

System Identifier: 00:00:1d:b5:41:bb
Number of Ports:

17

Number of Aggregators:

6

EXIT

RETURN
3650_20

6-44

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Link Aggregation Screen (802.3ad Main Menu Screen)

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-13 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 6-13

802.3ad System Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

System Identifier
(Read-Only)

See the uniquely identified system-to-protocol partner.

Number of Ports
(Read-Only)

See the number of ports that are participating in 802.3ad on this switch.

Number of
Aggregators
(Read-Only)

See the number of aggregators that exist on this switch.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-45

Broadcast Suppression Configuration Screen

6.9

BROADCAST SUPPRESSION CONFIGURATION SCREEN
NOTE: Broadcast frames received above the threshold setting are dropped.

When to Use
To set a limit for the receive broadcast frames that are switched out to the other ports.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the BROADCAST SUPPRESSION CONFIGURATION menu
item on the Port Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Broadcast Suppression
Configuration screen, Figure 6-15, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 6-15 Broadcast Suppression Configuration Screen

Total RX

Peak Rate

Time Since Peak

Threshold

Reset Peak

1

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

2

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

3

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

4

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

5

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

6

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

7

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

8

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

9

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

10

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

11

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

12

12345678910

150000

999:23:59

150000

[NO]

PORT #

SAVE

PREVIOUS

NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
RETURN
2504-56w

6-46

Port Configuration Menu Screens

Broadcast Suppression Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 6-14 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 6-14

Broadcast Suppression Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

PORT #
(Read-Only)

Identify the number of the port.

Total RX
(Read-Only)

See the total number of broadcast frames received.

Peak Rate
(Read-Only)

See the highest number of broadcast frames received in a one-second
interval.

Time Since Peak
(Read-Only)

See the time since peak rate was achieved.

Threshold
(Modifiable)

Set the desired limit of receive broadcast frames that will be forwarded
per port per second. For details on how to set the threshold, refer to
Section 6.9.1.

Reset Peak
(Toggle)

Reset the Peak Rate. Resetting the Peak Rate also resets the Time Since
Peak field. The Reset Peak field toggles between YES and NO. For
details, refer to Section 6.9.2.

6.9.1

Setting the Threshold

To set the Threshold, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Threshold field for the selected port.
2. Type in the numbers for the desired limit. Only enter values in increments of ten (for example;
10, 20, 30, etc.).
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.

Port Configuration Menu Screens

6-47

Broadcast Suppression Configuration Screen

6.9.2

Setting the Reset Peak

To set the Reset Peak field to YES or NO, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Reset Peak field for the selected port.
2. Press the SPACE bar to select YES or NO.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the Time Since Peak field is also reset.

6-48

Port Configuration Menu Screens

7
802.1 Configuration Menu Screens
This chapter discusses the Enterasys Networks Rapid Reconvergence Spanning Tree
implementation as well as the implementation of IEEE 802.3AD. The following screens are
discussed:

• 802.1 Configuration Menu screen (Section 7.1)
• 802.3ad Configuration screens (Chapter 6)
• Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen (Section 7.2)
• Spanning Tree Configuration screen (Section 7.3)
• Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen (Section 7.4)
• PVST Port Configuration Screen (Section 7.5)
• 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen (Chapter 8)
• 802.1p Configuration Menu screen (Chapter 9)

Screen Navigation Path
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
802.1 Configuration Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > 802.1
Configuration Menu

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

7-1

802.1 Configuration Menu Screen

7.1

802.1 CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN

When to Use
To access the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu, 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu, or 802.1p
Configuration Menu screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the 802.1 CONFIGURATION MENU item on the Module
Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The 802.1 Configuration Menu screen, Figure 7-1,
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 7-1 802.1 Configuration Menu Screen

SPANNING TREE CONFIGURATION MENU
802.1Q VLAN CONFIGURATION MENU
802.1p CONFIGURATION MENU

EXIT

RETURN
4046_89

7-2

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

802.1 Configuration Menu Screen

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 7-1 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 7-1

802.1 Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

SPANNING TREE
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Used to select the Spanning Tree Configuration and Spanning Tree
Port Configuration screens. These screens are used for the following
functions:

• Create a separate Spanning Tree topology for each VLAN
configured in the switch module. This type of Spanning is referred
to as Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST).

• Configure the switch for Rapid Reconvergence Spanning Tree,
which provides faster topology changes, provides less transitioning
time to the forwarding state when the switch module boots,
compatible with PVST, and backwards compatible with traditional
IEEE 802.1D.

• Enable or disable Spanning Tree on a per port/per VLAN basis.
For details, refer to Section 7.2.
802.1Q VLAN
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Used to select the screens for configuring and managing VLANs.
Details about VLANs, how to configure them, and examples showing
how to configure the switch for VLANs to solve a given problem are
described in Chapter 13. For details about the 802.1Q VLAN
Configuration screens, refer to Chapter 8.

802.1p
CONFIGURATION
MENU

Used to select the Port Priority Configuration, Traffic Class
Information, Transmit Queues Configuration, Priority Classification
Configuration, and Rate Limiting Configuration screens. For details,
refer to Chapter 9.

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

7-3

Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen

7.2

SPANNING TREE CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN
CAUTION: These screens should be used only by personnel who are very
knowledgeable about Spanning Trees and how to develop them. Otherwise, the proper
operation of the network could be at risk.

For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
802.1 Configuration Menu > Spanning Tree Configuration Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > 802.1
Configuration Menu > Spanning Tree Configuration Menu

When to Use
To access the Spanning Tree Configuration, or Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SPANNING TREE CONFIGURATION MENU item on the
802.1 Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Spanning Tree Configuration Menu
screen, Figure 7-2, displays.

7-4

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen

Screen Example
Figure 7-2

Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen

SPANNING TREE CONFIGURATION
SPANNING TREE PORT CONFIGURATION

EXIT

RETURN
4046_86

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 7-2 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 7-2

Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

SPANNING TREE
CONFIGURATION

Used to create a Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) instance for each
VLAN currently configured on the switch.
For details about the Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen, refer to
Section 7.3.

SPANNING TREE
PORT
CONFIGURATION

Used to enable or disable Spanning Tree on a per port, per VLAN
basis.
For details about the Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen, refer to
Section 7.4.

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

7-5

Spanning Tree Configuration Screen

Table 7-2

Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

Screen Function

PVST PORT
CONFIGURATION

Used to allow Multiple Spanning Trees.

7.3

This screen displays when you select a port of interest on the Spanning
Tree Port Configuration screen. For details, refer to Section 7.5

SPANNING TREE CONFIGURATION SCREEN
CAUTION: This screen should be used only by personnel who are very knowledgeable
about Spanning Trees and how to develop them. Otherwise, the proper operation of the
network could be at risk.

When to Use
To create a separate Spanning Tree topology for each VLAN configured in the switch module.
Also provides access to the PVST Configuration screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SPANNING TREE CONFIGURATION menu item on the
Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The Spanning Tree Configuration
screen, Figure 7-3, displays.

7-6

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

Spanning Tree Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 7-3

Spanning Tree Configuration Screen

VLAN

AgeTime

1

300

2

250

VLAN

AgeTime

Current STP Mode: [ IEEE ]
VLAN:
2
Operation: [ Add ]
SAVE

ADD ALL CONFIGURED VLAN

EXIT

RETURN
3650_04

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 7-3 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 7-3

Spanning Tree Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

VLAN
– top of screen
(Read-Only)

See a list of the VLAN or Spanning Tree Instances. This field also
enables you to add or delete other VLAN Instances.

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

7-7

Spanning Tree Configuration Screen

Table 7-3 Spanning Tree Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)
Use this field…

To…

AgeTime
(Modifiable)

Enter the age time (10 to 1million seconds) for the associated VLAN.
This is the amount of time that the entry remains in the bridge
forwarding table. The default is 300.

Current STP Mode
(Selectable)

Select the current STP mode using the SPACE bar. You can select one
of the following: IEEE, PVSTP, NONE, and DEC. The default setting
is IEEE.
It is recommended that all switches in the network be configured for
the same STP mode setting.
IEEE = 802.1w Spanning Tree Protocol – A single spanning tree for
the entire network. Redundant links are placed in standby mode. States
are predetermined to ensure an accelerated failover.
PVSTP = Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol – PVSTP is also known
as the Spanning Forest. PVSTP allows each VLAN to have its own
spanning tree, which allows multiple links to be active, each assigned
to a different VLAN.
NONE = Spanning tree is not enabled.
DEC = DEC spanning tree protocol.

VLAN
– bottom of screen
(Modifiable)

Enter the number of the VLAN to be added or deleted from the VLAN
list.

Operation
(Toggle)

Add or Delete the VLAN entered in the VLAN field. This field is
toggled using the SPACE bar.

The default value is 2.

The default value is Add.
ADD ALL
CONFIGURED
VLAN (Toggle)

7-8

Implement the new configuration to all static VLANs and update the
VLAN list to include those new static VLANs.

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

Spanning Tree Configuration Screen

7.3.1

Configuring a VLAN Spanning Tree

To configure a VLAN Spanning Tree, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Current STP Mode field near the bottom of the screen.
2. Use the SPACE bar to select one of the following: IEEE, PVSTP, NONE, and DEC. The default
setting is IEEE.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN field near the bottom of the screen.
4. Type in the number of the VLAN that you want to add or delete from the Spanning Tree. This
establishes the STP VLAN ID of the VLAN.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Operation field near the bottom of the screen.
6. Use the SPACE bar to select Add or Delete.
7. Press ENTER. The VLAN entered in the VLAN field is added or deleted from the list
accordingly. When a VLAN is added, the age time default value of 300 seconds is automatically
set.
8. If you want to change the age time of the VLAN, use the arrow keys to highlight the Age Time
field.
9. Type in the appropriate age time. A time from 10 to 1 million seconds may be entered.
10.If more than one VLAN is to be added/deleted, repeat steps 4 through 10 until all VLANs are
configured before saving the settings.
11.Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER to save all your settings
at once.
12.If you want to add all the VLANs configured on the switch to the screen with a default age time
of 300 seconds, use the arrow keys to highlight the ADD ALL CONFIGURED VLAN
command and press ENTER.

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

7-9

Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen

7.4

SPANNING TREE PORT CONFIGURATION SCREEN
CAUTION: This screen should be used only by personnel who are very knowledgeable
about Spanning Trees and how to develop them. Otherwise, the proper operation of the
network could be at risk.

When to Use
To view the switch address of the selected STP VLAN ID, its VLAN age time, the total number of
ports, and the current MAC Address of a switch residing of each port.
The Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen is also used to allow or prevent ports from
participating in the default STP VLAN.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SPANNING TREE PORT CONFIGURATION menu item
on the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The Spanning Tree
Configuration screen (Figure 7-4) displays.

Screen Example
Figure 7-4 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen

Port #

MAC Address

State

Status

1

00-00-1D-00-00-00

forwarding

[Enable]

2

00-00-1D-00-00-01

forwarding

[Enable]

3

00-00-1D-00-00-02

forwarding

[Enable]

4

00-00-1D-00-00-03

forwarding

[Enable]

5

00-00-1D-00-00-04

forwarding

[Enable]

6

00-00-1D-00-00-05

forwarding

[Enable]

7

00-00-1D-00-00-06

forwarding

[Enable]

8

00-00-1D-00-00-07

forwarding

[Enable]

Switch Address: 00-00-1D-00-00-00

Age Time:

STP VLAN ID:

Number of Ports: 26

SAVE

[ Default ]
PREVIOUS

NEXT

EXIT

300

RETURN
40461_91

7-10

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 7-4 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 7-4

Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port #
(Read-Only)

See the port numbers of each link associated with the STP VLAN ID
selected in the STP VLAN ID field.

MAC Address
(Read-Only)

See the Mac address of the switch residing off each port.The first MAC
Address is always associated with the VLAN ID selected in the
STP VLAN ID field. The default is the MAC Address of the Default
VLAN.

State
(Read-Only)

See the current state of each port; listening, learning, or forwarding.

Status
(Toggle/Read-Only)

Enable or disable the physical state of the ports. The Status field
toggles between Enable and Disable using the SPACE bar.
When you step to an STP VLAN ID other than Default, this field
becomes a read-only field that shows the status of the ports associated
with the VLAN shown in the STP VLAN ID field.

Switch Address
(Read-Only)

See the MAC address of the switch.

Age Time
(Read-Only)

See the time out of learned entries.

STP VLAN ID
(Selectable)

Select the STP VLAN ID. Using the SPACE bar, this field can be
stepped to display the STP VLAN IDs of existing VLANs. The default
setting is Default, which represents the Default VLAN, 1.
When you highlight the STP VLAN ID field and press ENTER, the
number of ports of the STP VLAN ID and their current status are
displayed.

Number of Ports
(Read-Only)

See the total number ports associated with the VLAN ID selected in the
STP VLAN ID field. This field changes when you highlight the STP
VLAN ID field and press ENTER.

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

7-11

PVST Port Configuration Screen

7.4.1

Enabling/Disabling the Default Spanning Tree Ports
CAUTION: The Spanning Tree configuration should be done only by personnel who are
very knowledgeable about Spanning Trees and how to develop them. Otherwise, the
proper operation of the network could be at risk.

Ports associated with the Default STP VLAN can be enabled or disabled, as follows:
1. To enable or disable a port, use the arrow keys to highlight the Status field associated with that
port.
2. Use the SPACE bar to toggle to either Enable or Disable the port.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press ENTER to save all your settings
at once.

7.4.2

Viewing Status of Spanning Tree Ports

Ports and their status associated with an STP VLAN can be viewed, as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the STP VLAN ID field near the bottom of the screen.
2. Use the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate STP VLAN ID and press ENTER. The ports, MAC
Address, port state, port status, age time, and number of ports associated with the STP VLAN
ID are displayed.
3. If there are more than eight ports associated with a VLAN, you can use the NEXT command at
the button of the screen to see the next eight ports.

7.5

PVST PORT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To change the configuration parameters of a selected PVST port.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the port of interest on the Spanning Tree Port Configuration
screen, then press ENTER. The PVST Port Configuration screen, Figure 7-5, displays.

7-12

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

PVST Port Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 7-5

PVST Port Configuration Screen

Port #:
Corresponding ifIndex:
Corresponding ifDescr:
Port Designated Root:
Port Designated Bridge:
Port Priority:
Port State:
Port Enable:
Port Path Cost:

SAVE

128
blocking
enabled
100

1
1
Fast Ethernet Frontpanel
80-00-00-00-1D-E6-71-08
80-00-00-00-1D-E6-71-08
Port Designated Cost:
Port Designated Port:
Port Forward Transmissions:
STP Vlan ID:

SAVE TO ALL

0
80.01
0
Default

EXIT
3650-013_09

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 7-5 for a functional description of each screen.
Table 7-5

PVST Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port #
(Read-Only)

View the bridge port number of this port.

Corresponding
ifindex (Read-Only)

View the corresponding interface number for this port.

Corresponding
idDescr (Read-Only)

View the interface description for this port.

Port Designated Root
(Read-Only)

View the bridge id of the bridge considered root by the designated
bridge of the segment to which this port is attached.

Port Designated
Bridge (Read-Only)

View the bridge id of the bridge this port considers to be designated
bridge for this port’s segment.

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

7-13

PVST Port Configuration Screen

Table 7-5 PVST Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)
Use this field…

To…

Port Priority
(Modifiable)

View the value of the priority portion of the port id.

Port Designated Cost
(Read-Only)

View the path cost of the designated port of this port's segment.

Port State
(Read-Only)

View the current Spanning Tree state of this port.

Port Designated Port
(Read-Only)

View the port id of the port on the designated bridge for this port's
segment.

Port Enable
(Read-Only)

View the status of the port (enabled/disabled).

Port Forward
Transmissions
(Read-Only)

View the number of times this port has been transitioned from the
learning state to the forwarding state.

Port Path Cost
(Modifiable)

View the cost contribution of this port in the path to the Spanning
Tree root.

STP Vlan ID
(Read-Only)

View the Id of the VLAN in which this port belongs.

7-14

802.1 Configuration Menu Screens

8
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

NOTE: It is strongly recommended that you read Chapter 13 to gain an understanding
of VLANs and the associated terminology; how to use the VLAN Configuration screens
to create VLANs; examples of how to configure VLANs in switches to solve a problem;
and details on how frames are handled as they travel through the network.

This chapter describes the 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen (Section 8.2) and the
following screens that can be selected from its menu:

• Static VLAN Configuration screen (Section 8.3)
• Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen (Section 8.4)
• Current VLAN Configuration screen (Section 8.5)
• Current VLAN Egress Configuration screen (Section 8.6)
• VLAN Port Configuration screen (Section 8.7)
• VLAN Classification Configuration screen (Section 8.8)
• Protocol Port Configuration screen (Section 8.9)
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
802.1 Configuration Menu > 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > 802.1
Configuration Menu > 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-1

Summary of VLAN Local Management

8.1

SUMMARY OF VLAN LOCAL MANAGEMENT

The VLAN configuration process is an extension of normal Local Management operations. A
series of Local Management screens provides access to the functions and commands necessary to
add, change, or delete VLANs and to assign ports to those VLANs.
The VLAN Configuration screens are a standard part of the Local Management hierarchy when
the switch is configured to operate in 802.1Q Mode. The hierarchy of the Local Management
screens pertaining to 802.1Q VLAN configuration is shown in Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1

802.1Q VLAN Screen Hierarchy

802.1Q VLAN
Configuration Menu

Static VLAN Configuration
Static VLAN Egress Configuration
Current VLAN Configuration
Current VLAN Egress Configuration
VLAN Port Configuration
VLAN Classification Configuration
Protocol Port Configuration
40461_06

8.1.1

Preparing for VLAN Configuration

Some forethought and planning are essential to good VLAN implementation. Before attempting to
configure a single switch for VLAN operation, consider the following:

• How many VLANs will be required?
• What stations will belong to them?
• What ports are connected to those stations?
• What ports will be configured as GARP-aware ports?
It is also helpful to sketch a diagram of your VLAN strategy. The examples provided in Chapter 13
are useful depictions of the planning process.
To configure the switch for VLAN operation, proceed as follows:

• Access Local Management as described in Chapter 3.
• Perform all required initial setup operations.
• Navigate to the 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen to begin the VLAN configuration
process for the switch.
8-2

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen

8.2

802.1Q VLAN CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN

When to Use
To select screens to assign switched network ports to static VLANs, define new static VLANs, and
configure port filtering according to a VLAN list. Network users can be logically grouped into
VLANs even if they span long physical distances over a vast, intricate physical network.
The VLAN Local Management menu items listed on the 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu
allow such VLANs to be configured on a network at the switched port of the switch module. Each
port mode of operation can also be configured to handle untagged frames (Hybrid Mode), tagged
frames (1Q Trunk Mode), or frames of a legacy 802.1D switch fabric (1D Trunk Mode). Also,
some or all of the ports on the switch can be configured as GVRP ports, which enables dynamic
VLAN registration. This keeps the traffic associated with a particular VLAN and protocol to be
isolated from the other parts of the network.
NOTE: There is a global setting for GVRP that is enabled by default. Refer to Table 8-6
for more information.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the 802.1Q VLAN CONFIGURATION MENU item on the
802.1 Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu
screen, Figure 8-2, displays.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-3

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen

Screen Example
Figure 8-2 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen

STATIC VLAN CONFIGURATION
CURRENT VLAN CONFIGURATION
VLAN PORT CONFIGURATION
VLAN CLASSIFICATION CONFIGURATION

EXIT

RETURN
4046_93

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 8-1 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 8-1

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

STATIC VLAN
CONFIGURATION

Used to view, add, name, enable, or disable static VLANs within the
switch module, and also display the Filter Database ID (FDB ID)
associated with each VLAN. This screen also allows you to access the
Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen.
The Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen enables you to set one
or more ports associated with a VLAN to transmit frames according to
an egress setting (UNTAGGED, TAGGED, or NO).
For more information on the Static VLAN Configuration screen, refer
to Section 8.3.
For more information on the Static VLAN Egress Configuration
screen, refer to Section 8.4.

8-4

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen

Table 8-1

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

Screen Function

CURRENT VLAN
CONFIGURATION

Displays a list of the current VLANs along with their VLAN IDs,
FDB IDs, VLAN Type, and if they have ports on the egress list.
Each VLAN ID on the list may be highlighted to access the Current
VLAN Egress Configuration screen. This screen provides a list and
Egress status of each port associated with the selected VLAN.
For more information on the Current VLAN Configuration screen,
refer to Section 8.5.
For more information on the Current VLAN Egress Configuration
screen, refer to Section 8.6.

VLAN PORT
CONFIGURATION

Used to view a list of ports and enables you to configure each port to
either receive all frames or only tagged frames, set the PVID, enable
or disable ingress filtering on each port, and enable or disable GVRP
on each port.
For more information on the VLAN Port Configuration screen, refer
to Section 8.7.
For more information on GVRP, refer to Appendix A.

VLAN
CLASSIFICATION
CONFIGURATION

Used to display the current entries of VLAN ID (VID), protocol
classification, and description of each classification; assign VLANs
according to Classification rules; add/delete a VID and associated
classification entry; and access the Protocol Port Configuration
screen. Refer to Section 8.8 for additional information.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-5

Static VLAN Configuration Screen

8.3

STATIC VLAN CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To create, modify, and/or delete one or more Static VLANs and associated VLAN names. This
screen also provides access to the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen to modify the port list
of a VLAN selected from this screen, as described in Section 8.3.2.
NOTE: Static VLANs are those VLANs that you create manually using this screen and
can only be deleted using this screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the STATIC VLAN CONFIGURATION menu item on the
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The Static VLAN Configuration
screen, Figure 8-3, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 8-3 Static VLAN Configuration Screen

VLAN ID

FDB ID

VLAN Name

––––––––

––––––

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

1

1

Default VLAN

2

2

Engineering

VLAN ID: 1
ADD

VLAN Name: [ Default VLAN ]
DEL MARKED

NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
4046_96

8-6

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

Static VLAN Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 8-2 for a functional description of each screen field. Refer to Section 8.3.1 through
Section 8.3.5 for the application of these fields.
Table 8-2

Static VLAN Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

VLAN ID
– top of screen
(Read-Only)

See the assigned VLAN IDs that are configured in the switch module.
Initially, only the Default VLAN (VLAN ID: 1) is listed. Up to ten
VLANs can be displayed in the screen.
If there are more than ten VLANs, the NEXT command appears at the
bottom of the screen to allow stepping to the next screen.

FDB ID
(Read-Only)

See the Filter Database ID (FDB ID) numbers of the associated
VLAN IDs. This value is allocated automatically by the device when
the VLAN is created: either dynamically by GVRP, or when a Static
VLAN is created using this screen.

VLAN Name
– top of screen
(Read-Only)

See the VLAN Name of the associated VLAN ID. If a name has not
been assigned to a VLAN, no name is displayed in the VLAN Name
field.

VLAN ID
– bottom of screen
(Modifiable)

Enter a VLAN ID (VID) number (2 to 4094) for the new VLAN. Up to
1024 VLANs are supported by the switch module.

VLAN Name
– bottom of screen
(Modifiable)

Assign or change names of VLANs. The VLAN Name (with up to 32
characters) is an optional attribute of a VLAN, and is not required for
VLAN operation.

ADD
(Command)

Add the new VLAN to the switch module. If this is successful, the
screen refreshes and the new VLAN is added to the list in the screen.

DEL MARKED
(Command)

Delete the VLANs shown in the screen marked with an asterisk to the
left of the VLAN ID number. The Default VLAN cannot be marked
and deleted.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-7

Static VLAN Configuration Screen

8.3.1

Creating a Static VLAN

To create a VLAN, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN ID field near the bottom of the screen.
2. Enter the VLAN ID using a unique number between 2 and 4094. The VLAN IDs of 0, 1, and
4095 may not be used for user-defined VLANs.
NOTE: Each VLAN ID must be unique. If a duplicate VLAN ID is entered, the switch
assumes that the Administrator intends to modify the existing VLAN.

3. Press ENTER. If an illegal number is entered, the Event Message Line will display:
”PERMISSIBLE RANGE FOR VLAN IDS: 2 to 4094” and the field will refresh with the
previous value.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN Name field near the bottom of the screen.
5. Type a name of up to 32 ASCII characters in the VLAN Name field. This is an optional attribute
and is not required for VLAN operation.
6. Press ENTER.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the ADD field.
8. Press ENTER. If the VLAN is successfully created, the screen refreshes and shows the newly
created VLAN. If the VLAN is not created successfully, an error is displayed in the Event
Message Line at the top of the screen.

8.3.2

Displaying the Current Static VLAN Port Egress List

To see the ports associated with a particular VLAN, the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen
must be displayed. This screen is also used to change the Egress setting for each port of the VLAN.
For more information about the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen, refer to Section 8.4.
To access the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to step to the line with the VLAN of interest.
2. Press ENTER. The Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen displays, showing a list of the
current ports associated with the VLAN selected in step 1. For more information about the Static
VLAN Egress Configuration screen and how to use it, refer to Figure 8-4.

8-8

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

Static VLAN Configuration Screen

8.3.3

Renaming a Static VLAN

To change the name of an existing VLAN, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN ID field near the bottom of the screen.
2. Type the VLAN ID number of the VLAN to be changed. Press ENTER.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN Name field near the bottom of the screen.
4. Type the new VLAN name of up to 32 ASCII characters in the VLAN Name field.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight the ADD field and press ENTER. The new name is now
displayed.

8.3.4

Deleting a Static VLAN

To delete a VLAN from the VLAN list, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the line containing the VLAN ID, FDB ID, and VLAN Name
information. The following message is displayed at the top of the screen:
“Hit  key to edit port list, or  to mark.”
NOTE: The default VLAN cannot be deleted from the list.

2. Press the M (not case sensitive) key, and an asterisk (*) appears to the left of the highlighted line.
If more than one VLAN is to be deleted, repeat steps 1 and 2 to highlight and mark each line.
Otherwise, go to step 4.
NOTE: If for some reason you want to remove a mark, perform steps 1 and 2 to mark
the line. Then press M to delete the mark.

3. After the lines are marked, use the arrow keys to highlight the DEL MARKED command.
4. Press ENTER. The VLANs and marked line items are deleted from the list.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-9

Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen

8.3.5

Paging Through the VLAN List

To display additional VLANs that do not display in the current VLAN List as shown on the screen,
use the NEXT or PREVIOUS commands located at the bottom of the screen, as follows:
NOTE: The NEXT and PREVIOUS fields will only display if there are further VLAN List
entries to page through.

1. To display the next screen, use the arrow keys to highlight NEXT. Press ENTER to view the
entries on the next screen.
2. To display the previous screen, use the arrow keys to highlight PREVIOUS. Press ENTER to
view the entries on the previous screen.

8.4

STATIC VLAN EGRESS CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To set the type of egress (tag status) for each or all ports associated with a VLAN selected on the
Static VLAN Configuration screen. The ports can be set using the following selections:

• UNTAGGED – sets the port to transmit frames without a tag header. This setting is usually set
to configure a port connected to an end user device.

• TAGGED – sets the port to transmit frames with a tag header to associate the frame
with the VLAN. This setting is usually to configure a port as a trunk port to another switch.

• NO – sets the port so it does not transmit frames (tagged or untagged) of the VLAN.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the line item with the VLAN ID of interest on the Static VLAN
Configuration screen and press ENTER. The Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen,
Figure 8-4, displays.

8-10

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 8-4

Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen

VLAN ID: 2

Port
---1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

FDB ID: 4

Egress
---------[ UNTAGGED ]
[ TAGGED ]
[ NO ]
[ TAGGED ]
[ TAGGED ]
[ TAGGED ]
[ UNTAGGED ]
[ UNTAGGED ]

VLAN NAME: Test

Port
Egress
------------9
[ UNTAGGED ]
10 [ UNTAGGED ]
11 [ UNTAGGED ]
12
[ TAGGED ]
13
[ NO ]
14
[ TAGGED ]
15
[ TAGGED ]
16
[ TAGGED ]

Port
Egress
------------17 [ UNTAGGED ]
18
[ TAGGED ]
19
[ NO ]
20
[ TAGGED ]
21
[ TAGGED ]
22
[ TAGGED ]
23 [ UNTAGGED ]
24 [ UNTAGGED ]

SET ALL PORTS:
SAVE

NEXT

PREVIOUS

Port
Egress
------------25
[ UNTAGGED ]
26
[ UNTAGGED ]
27
[ TAGGED ]

[UNTAGGED]
EXIT

RETURN
4046_110w

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 8-3 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 8-3

Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

VLAN ID
(Read-Only)

See the VLAN ID of the VLAN selected in the Static VLAN
Configuration screen.

FDB ID
(Read-Only)

See the Filter Database ID (FDB ID) number associated with the
VLAN ID.

VLAN Name
(Read-Only)

See the VLAN Name associated with the VLAN ID.

Port
(Read-Only)

See a list of ports associated with the VLAN ID. Up to 32 ports may be
listed on the screen. If more than 32 ports are associated with a
VLAN ID, the NEXT command is displayed to step to the next screen.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-11

Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen

Table 8-3 Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)
Use this field…

To…

Egress
(Selectable)

Select the type of VLAN frame transmission (egress) for each port.
You can select UNTAGGED, TAGGED, or NO, using the SPACE bar.
UNTAGGED – the port will only transmit the VLAN frames as
untagged.
TAGGED – the port will only transmit the VLAN frames as tagged.
NO – the port is removed from the VLAN Egress List, so that the port
will not transmit the VLAN frames.
If NO appears without brackets and not in bold type, the port setting
cannot be changed directly using this screen, but has virtual ports such
as that of a physical ATM port (i.e., an ATM physical port can have
more than one virtual port, which can be configured using its own local
management).
Initially, the default setting is UNTAGGED.
When a new VLAN is created, the default setting is NO on all ports.

SET ALL PORTS
(Selectable)

Set all ports to the same setting. You can select UNTAGGED,
TAGGED, or NO, using the SPACE bar.
The default setting is UNTAGGED.

8.4.1

Setting Egress Types on Ports

The following procedures describe how to assign the egress type to one or more ports, or set one
egress type to all ports simultaneously.
Setting the Egress Type on One or More Ports Individually
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Egress field adjacent to the Port number. The port type is
displayed (i.e., Fast Ethernet Frontpanel, Gigabit Ethernet VHSIM, etc.) at the top of the screen.
2. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate Egress field (UNTAGGED, TAGGED, or NO)
for the port.
UNTAGGED – sets the port to transmit the VLAN frames without a tag header.
TAGGED – sets the port to transmit frames with a tag header to associate the frame with the
VLAN.
NO – the port supports tagging, but is shut down so that no frames of the VLAN are transmitted.
8-12

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

Static VLAN Egress Configuration Screen

3. To change the egress type on more than one port, repeat the first two steps for each port.
4. After the changes are complete, use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the
bottom of the screen.
5. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the settings are saved.
Setting the Same Egress Type on All Ports Simultaneously
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SET ALL PORTS field. The following message appears at
the top of the screen:
TOGGLE TO DESIRED SELECTION AND HIT  TO PROPAGATE
SELECTION TO PORTS
2. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate egress type (UNTAGGED, TAGGED, or NO)
and press ENTER.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the screen refreshes showing all ports
associated with the VLAN that are set to the selected egress type.

8.4.2

Displaying the Next Group of Ports

Up to 32 ports can be displayed on the screen. If there are more than 32 ports associated with the
VLAN, additional screens will contain the additional list of ports.
NOTE: The NEXT and PREVIOUS fields will only display if there are further egress lists
to page through.

To display the additional port settings that do not display in the current screen, use the NEXT or
PREVIOUS commands, as follows:
1. To display the next screen, use the arrow keys to highlight NEXT. Press ENTER to view the
entries on the next screen.
2. To display the previous screen, use the arrow keys to highlight PREVIOUS. Press ENTER to
view the entries on the previous screen.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-13

Current VLAN Configuration Screen

8.5

CURRENT VLAN CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To see the current VLANs and the associated FDB ID, VLAN type, and if the ports are on the
egress list. The egress list is how the switch keeps track of all VLANs that it will recognize.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the CURRENT VLAN CONFIGURATION menu item on the
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen, and press ENTER. The Current VLAN Configuration
screen, Figure 8-5, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 8-5 Current VLAN Configuration Screen

VLAN ID

FDB ID

VLAN Type

Ports On Egress

––––––––

––––––

––––––––––

–––––––––––––

1

1

Static

Yes

2

2

Static

No

EXIT

RETURN
30691_35

8-14

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

Current VLAN Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 8-4 for a functional description of each screen field.
NOTE: These fields are read-only fields, however, highlighting a line using the arrow
keys and pressing ENTER causes the Current VLAN Egress Configuration screen to
display. That screen shows the egress setting for each port associated with the VLAN ID
in the highlighted line.
Table 8-4

Current VLAN Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

VLAN ID
(Read-Only)

See a list of the VLANs currently recognized by the switch.

FDB ID
(Read-Only)

See the Filter Database ID (FDB ID) of the associated VLAN.

VLAN Type
(Read-Only)

See the VLAN Type of the associated VLAN (Static or Dynamic). An
example of a dynamic VLAN is a GVRP VLAN.

Ports On Egress
(Read-Only)

See if the ports associated with each VLAN are on the egress list.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-15

Current VLAN Egress Configuration Screen

8.6

CURRENT VLAN EGRESS CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To see the egress settings of all ports associated with the VLAN ID selected from the Current
VLAN Configuration screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the line item with the VLAN ID of interest on the Current VLAN
Configuration screen and press ENTER. The Current VLAN Egress Configuration screen,
Figure 8-6, displays, showing the egress setting of each port associated with the VLAN ID.

Screen Example
Figure 8-6 Current VLAN Egress Configuration Screen

VLAN ID: 1 FDB ID: 4 VLAN Type: Static
Port
---1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Egress
---------UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED
UNTAGGED

Port Egress
---- ---------11 UNTAGGED
12 UNTAGGED
13 UNTAGGED
14 UNTAGGED
15 UNTAGGED
16 UNTAGGED
17 UNTAGGED
18 UNTAGGED
19 UNTAGGED
20 UNTAGGED

Port Egress
------------21 UNTAGGED
22 UNTAGGED
23 UNTAGGED
24 UNTAGGED
25 UNTAGGED
26 UNTAGGED
27 UNTAGGED

EXIT

RETURN
4046_109w

8-16

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

VLAN Port Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 8-5 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 8-5

Current VLAN Egress Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port
(Read-Only)

See a list of the ports associated with the VLAN ID shown in the line
above the Port and Egress lists.

Egress
(Read-Only)

See the current egress setting (UNTAGGED, TAGGED, or NO) for
each port.

8.7

VLAN PORT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To see and/or make changes to the port parameters affecting

• the Port VLAN Identification (PVID) to reassign the port to a different PVID,
• the acceptable frame type that the port will transmit or receive frames of VLANs other than the
static VLANs created on the switch,

• the ingress filtering on the port, which can be enabled or disabled to filter out (drop) frames that
are not on the switch egress list, or

• the GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) status, which can be enabled or disabled.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-17

VLAN Port Configuration Screen

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN PORT CONFIGURATION menu item on the 802.1Q
Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The VLAN Port Configuration screen, Figure 8-7,
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 8-7

VLAN Port Configuration Screen

Policy PVID Override is 2

Global GVRP State
Port
–––
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

[ ENABLED ]

Ingress
Port Mode
PVID
Acceptable Frame Types
Filtering
––– ––––––––––––––
–––––––––––––––––––––
––––––––––––––
[HYBRID]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ DISABLED ]
[HYBRID]
[ DISABLED ]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[1D TRUNK]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ DISABLED ]
[HYBRID]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ DISABLED ]
[HYBRID]
[ DISABLED ]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[HYBRID]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ DISABLED ]
[HYBRID]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ DISABLED ]
[HYBRID]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ DISABLED ]
[HYBRID]
[ DISABLED ]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[1Q TRUNK]
1
[ADMIT TAGGED FRAMES ONLY] [ DISABLED ]
[HYBRID]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ DISABLED ]
[HYBRID]
1
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ DISABLED ]
SAVE

NEXT

PREVIOUS

EXIT

GVRP
Status
––––––––––––––
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
RETURN
36502_05

8-18

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

VLAN Port Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 8-6 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 8-6

VLAN Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Policy PVID
Override is
(Read-Only)

See the active override to a port as a result of an application policy.
When a port number has an asterisk next to it, selecting that Port field
will cause this field to display with the application policy number.
There are two sources of an override; 1) default policy, and 2)
authenticated policy.
Authentication using 802.1X is not possible on a port in override mode.
In Figure 8-7, the override shown is 2.

Global GVRP State
(Toggle)

Enable or Disable the GVRP Status. GVRP and PVST are not
interoperable. When ENABLED, GVRP is turned on for the entire
switch. When DISABLED, the VLANs are not learned on a given port.

Port
(Read-Only)

See a list of the switch ports.
NOTE: In some cases this field may have an asterisk next to
it. It indicates that it is currently overridden by a policy.

If a port with an asterisk is highlighted using the curser, the policy
override is setting is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the
screen as shown in Figure 8-7.
PVID
(Modifiable)

Change the PVID of one or more ports. The value must be typed in the
field. This associates the port to the VLAN associated with the PVID.

Port Mode
(Selectable)

See the current operational port mode and select one of the modes:
HYBRID, 1Q TRUNK, or 1D TRUNK. The default is HYBRID.

Acceptable Frame
Types
(Toggle)

Set the port to receive all frames or only tagged frames. The selection
can be toggled to either ADMIT ALL FRAMES or ADMIT TAGGED
FRAMES ONLY.
If a port is to be connected directly to the computer of a user, printer, or
other device, set this to ADMIT ALL FRAMES.
If a port is going to be used for a trunk port connection to another
switch, set this to ADMIT TAGGED FRAMES ONLY.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-19

VLAN Port Configuration Screen

Table 8-6

VLAN Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Ingress Filtering
(Toggle)

Enable or disable the ingress filtering on a port.
When ENABLED, the module will discard the incoming frames for
VLANs which do not include this Port in its Member set. When
DISABLED, the port will forward the frames.
This control does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as
GVRP and STP. It does affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames.

GVRP Status
(Toggle)

8.7.1

Enable or disable a port to support dynamic VLANs created by the
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP). For more information
about GVRP, refer to Appendix A.

Changing the Port Mode

To change the operational mode of a port, proceed as follows.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port Mode field for the module and port combination you
wish to change.
2. Use the SPACE bar or BACKSPACE key to step through the available selections. A port may
be configured for any of the following modes:

• HYBRID – This is the default mode for all ports on the switch. The initial Port VLAN List
includes the PVID with a frame format of untagged. Any other VLANs desired for the Port
VLAN List need to be manually configured. By changing the default mode to 1Q Trunk or
1D Trunk, the Port VLAN List and the associated frame type are automatically configured.

• 1Q TRUNK – This mode sets the port for transmitting to another 802.1Q aware device. In
this mode, all frames are transmitted with a tag header included in the frame (excluding
BPDUs). The switch will drop all untagged frames it receives on the 1Q Trunk port. The Port
VLAN List for the port includes all VLANs.

• 1D TRUNK – This mode sets the port for transmitting to a legacy 802.1D switch fabric. In
this mode, all incoming frames are classified into the default VLAN and all frames are
transmitted untagged. The switch expects to receive only untagged frames through the
1D Trunk port. This mode also updates the Port VLAN List and makes the port eligible to
transmit frames for all VLANs.
3. When the desired operational mode for the port is displayed, use the arrow keys to highlight the
SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays.
8-20

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

8.7.2

Configuring the VLAN Ports

To configure a VLAN port, proceed as follows:
NOTE: In the following steps, you only need to step to the fields that you are going to
change.

1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the PVID field.
2. Type the PVID number to be assigned to the port.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port Mode field.
4. Press the SPACE bar to select appropriate Port Mode: HYBRID, 1Q TRUNK, or 1D TRUNK.
The default is HYBRID.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the port’s Acceptable Frame Types field.
6. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the field to the correct setting: ADMIT ALL FRAMES or
ADMIT TAGGED FRAMES ONLY.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the port’s Ingress Filtering field.
8. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the field to the correct setting: ENABLED or DISABLED. This
will either enable or disable the filtering set in the Acceptable Frame Types field in step 5.
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight the port’s GVRP Status field.
10.Press the SPACE bar to toggle the field to the correct setting: ENABLED or DISABLED.
11.To configure more than one port, repeat step 1 through step 10. Then go to step 12 to save your
settings.
12.Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
13.Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and all settings are saved.

8.8

VLAN CLASSIFICATION CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To perform the following:

• Display the VLAN ID (VID), Protocol Classification, and Description of each classification of
the current entries.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-21

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

• Assign VLANs according to Classification rules.
• Add/delete a VID and associated classification entry.
• Access the Protocol Port Configuration screen.
When a frame is received that already contains an 802.1Q frame tag, frame classification is not
implemented. Instead, the frame is processed by the switch module according to the information
contained in the 802.1Q frame tag. When the frame is transmitted, it is sent to the ports associated
with the VLAN as established using the Protocol Port Configuration screen described
in Section 8.9.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN CLASSIFICATION CONFIGURATION menu item
on the 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The VLAN Classification
Configuration screen, Figure 8-8, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 8-8

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

VID
––––
7
6
1
1
5

Description
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
IP: 123.123.030.006 Mask: 255.255.255.255
IP: 123.123.030.007 Mask: 255.255.255.255
0x8137
0x0800
0x9999

Classification
–––––––––––––––––––––––
Bilateral IP Address
Dest IP Address
Ethernet II Type
Ethernet II Type
802.3 SAP

VID:

CLASSIFICATION:

IP Address:

MASK:

5

[Bil IP Address]

123.123.030.006

255.255.255.255

ADD

DEL ALL

PREVIOUS

NEXT

Classification Rule

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 8-7 for a functional description of each screen field.
8-22

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

EXIT

RETURN

31352_97w

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-7

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field …

To …

VID
– top of screen
(Selectable)

See the VLAN Identifications (VIDs) currently associated with a
protocol classification. To see which ports are assigned to a
VID/Classification, or to add/remove a port from a VID/Classification,
use the Protocol Port Configuration screen. For details, refer to
Section 8.8.2.

Classification
– top of screen
(Selectable)

See the classification associated with the VLAN in the VID column.
This field may be selected after the screen is saved to call up the
Protocol Port Configuration screen.

Description
(Selectable)

See a brief description of the classification.

VID
– bottom of screen
(Modifiable)

Enter a VLAN Identification (VID) to be associated with the
classification selected in the Classification field. For details on how to
enter the VID/Classification, refer to Section 8.8.3.

CLASSIFICATION
– bottom of screen
(Selectable)

Select the classification that will be associated with the VLAN entered
in the VID field. There can be up to three fields involved
(CLASSIFICATION, IP ADDRESS, and MASK), depending on the
classification selected. At the time of this printing, the selections
available in each field are listed in Table 8-8.
NOTE: Besides the VID selected, the order in which a frame is
transmitted also depends on the Classification Precedence
Rules discussed in Section 8.8.1. These rules come into effect
when there are multiple classifications configured in the switch
module.

For details on how to use the VLAN Classification Configuration
screen to select the classification rule, refer to Section 8.8.3.
ADD
(Command)

Add the current Classification Rule (VID and Classification selections)
to the screen. For details about how to add an entry, refer to
Section 8.8.3.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-23

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-7

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field …

To …

DEL ALL/DEL
MARKED
(Command)

Delete all or one or more marked Classification Rule entries on the
screen. The DEL ALL command is the default and it is used to
simultaneously delete all the configured Classification Rules. The DEL
MARKED command appears in place of the DEL ALL command
when one or more lines are marked for deletion. For details on using
the two commands, refer to Section 8.8.4.

Table 8-8 provides a list of the Classifications that can be selected in the Classification field and
the associated subclassifications.
Table 8-8

Classification List

Classification

Subclassification
and Options

Ethernet II Type>

Ethernet II Type:
- IPX
- DOD IP
- ARP
- RARP
- AppleTalk
- Banyan Vines
- DECNET
- CUSTOM >

8-24

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

Custom or Mask Value

Type Value: 0x00001

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-8

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification
and Options

802.3 SAP>

SSAP/DSAP (802.3):

Same

- IP
- IPX
- IPX RAW
- BANYAN
- SNA
- CUSTOM >

IP TOS

Custom or Mask Value

DSAP/SSAP Type: 0x0000

Type of Service:
0x0000

IP Protocol Type

IP Protocol Type:
TCP
- UDP
- ICMP
- IGMP
- OSPF
- CUSTOM >

IPX COS

Protocol Type: 000

IPX Class Of Service:
000

IPX Packet Type

Src IP Address

IPX Packet Type:
- Hello or SAP
- RIP
- Echo Packet
- Error Packet
- Netware 386/SAP
- Seq. Pkt Protocol
- Netware 286
- CUSTOM >

IPX Packet Type: 00

IP Address:

Mask:

000.000.000.000

000.000.000.000

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-25

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-8

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification
and Options

Custom or Mask Value

Dest IP Address

IP Address:

Mask:

000.000.000.000

000.000.000.000

IP Address:

Mask:

000.000.000.000

000.000.000.000

Bil IP Address

Src IPX Network

IPX Network Num:
0x00000000

Dest IPX Network

IPX Network Num:
0x00000000

Bil IPX Network

IPX Network Num:
0x00000000

Src UDP Port

IP UDP Port:
- FTP Data
- FTP
- BOOTP Server
- BOOTP Client
- RIP
- Telnet
- TFTP
- HTTP
- DNS
- SMTP
- POP3
- IMAP2
- IMAP3
- NETBIOS Name Serv
- NETBIOS Datagram
- NETBIOS Sess Serv
- CUSTOM >

8-26

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

UDP Port Number: 00000

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-8

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification
and Options

Dest UDP Port

IP UDP Port:
Same selection as for Src
UDP Port Classification

Bil UDP Port

TCP Port Number: 00000

TCP Port:
Same selection as for Src
TCP Port Classification

Bil TCP Port

UDP Port Number: 00000

TCP Port:
- FTP Data
- FTP
- BOOTP Server
- BOOTP Client
- RIP
- Telnet
- TFTP
- HTTP
- DNS
- SMTP
- POP3
- IMAP2
- IMAP3
- NETBIOS Name Serv
- NETBIOS Datagram
- NETBIOS Sess Serv
- CUSTOM >

Dest TCP Port

UDP Port Number: 00000

IP UDP Port:
Same selection as for Src
UDP Port Classification

Src TCP Port

Custom or Mask Value

TCP Port Number: 00000

TCP Port:
Same selection as for Src
TCP Port Classification

TCP Port Number: 00000

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-27

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-8

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification
and Options

Src IPX Socket

IPX Socket:
- NCP
- SAP
- RIP
- NETBIOS
- Diagnostics
- NLSP
- IPX WAN
- CUSTOM >

Dest IPX Socket

IPX Socket Type: 00000

IPX Socket:
Same selection as for Src IPX
Socket Classification

Bil IPX Socket

Custom or Mask Value

IPX Socket Type: 00000

IPX Socket:
Same selection as for Src IPX
Socket Classification

Src MAC Address

MAC Address:
00-00-00-00-00-00

Dest MAC Address

MAC Address:
00-00-00-00-00-00

Bil MAC Address

MAC Address:
00-00-00-00-00-00

IPX Socket Type: 00000

IP Fragments2
Src UDP Range3

Dest UDP Range3

8-28

Start:

End:

00000

00000

Start:

End:

00000

00000

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-8

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification
and Options

Custom or Mask Value

Bil UDP Range3

Start:

End:

00000

00000

Start:

End:

00000

00000

Start:

End:

00000

00000

Start:

End:

00000

00000

Src TCP Range3

Dest TCP Range3

Bil TCP Range3

1. Bold type indicates a user entry.
2. Any fragmented IP frame received is Classified to the priority identification (PID) and
forwarded out the ports configured in the Protocol Port Configuration screen.
3. This allows the classification of a packet, depending on if the udp/tcp socket falls within the range of the
user-entered “Start” and “End” values.

8.8.1

Classification Precedence Rules
NOTE: It is important that you have a comprehensive understanding of the precedence
concept before configuring the switch module, as these rules can have a significant
impact on the network operation.

When there are multiple classifications assigned to a switch module, the switch module must
determine which classification takes precedence according to the Classification Precedence Rules.
The order of precedence is predefined in the switch module and cannot be changed.
Table 8-9 lists the ISO Layer, associated classification and precedence levels.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-29

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

NOTE: In Table 8-9, the following applies:
– Highest precedence is 1a.
– Lowest precedence is 6.
– Exact Match indicates a match of an explicitly defined address.
– Best Match indicates a match of an entire subnet, or range of addresses within a
subnet.
Table 8-9

Classification Precedence

Classification Type

Precedence Level

Layer 2
Source MAC Address Best Match

1a

Destination MAC Address Best Match

1b

EtherType

6

SAP

6

Layer 3

8-30

IP TOS

5a

IP Type

5b

IPX COS

5a

IPX Type

5b

Source IP Address Exact Match

2a

Source IP Address Best Match

2b

Destination IP Address Exact Match

2c

Destination IP Address Best Match

2d

Source IPX Network Number

2a

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-9

Classification Precedence (Continued)

Classification Type

Precedence Level

Destination IPX Network Number

2b

IP Fragments

3

Layer 4
UDP Port Source

4a

UDP Port Destination

4b

TCP Source Port

4a

TCP Destination Port

4b

IPX Socket Source

4a

IPX Socket Destination

4b

UDP Source Port

4a

UDP Source Port Range

4b

UDP Dest Port

4c

UDP Dest Port Range

4d

TCP Source Port

4a

TCP Source Port Range

4b

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-31

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

Table 8-9

Classification Precedence (Continued)

Classification Type

Precedence Level

TCP Dest Port

4c

TCP Dest Port Range

4d

The following example shows how the precedence concept can be applied:
Example
A network administrator has defined the following two classifications involving VLANs:

• All frames with a UDP Port Source number of 55 (Layer 4, precedence level 4a) are assigned to
the Red VLAN.

• All frames sourced from the 134.141.28.xx subnet (Layer 3, Source IP Address Best Match,
level 2b) are assigned to the Blue VLAN.
In this example, a frame that is received with a source address of 134.141.28.99 and contains a
UDP port number of 55 will be assigned to the Blue VLAN because a Layer 3 IP Address rule
takes precedence over a Layer 4 rule.
The key thing to remember is that the switch modules will classify frames based on one of the
classification options.

8.8.2

Displaying the Current Classification Rule Assignments

To see which ports are set to a particular Classification Rule, the Protocol Port Configuration
screen must be displayed.
To access the Protocol Port Configuration, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the line with the Classification Rule of interest.
2. Press ENTER. The Protocol Port Configuration screen displays, showing all ports and those
associated with the Classification Rule selected in step 1. These ports are identified on the screen
by a YES setting in the Classify columns. For more information about the Protocol Port
Configuration screen and how to use it, refer to Section 8.9.

8-32

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

8.8.3

Assigning a Classification to a VID
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that you read Section 8.8.1 for more information
concerning classification before configuring the switch module. Incorrect configuration
will affect network operation.

To assign a Classification to a VID, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the VID (VLAN identification) field.
2. Type in the appropriate VID. Press ENTER.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Classification field.
4. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate Classification. Table 8-8 lists the
subclassification associated with each Classification (examples of classifications:
Ethernet II Type, 802.3 SAP, IP TOS, IP Protocol Type, etc.).
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the subclassification field to the immediate right of the
Classification field. The name of the field changes depending on the selected Classification, as
shown in Table 8-8 (examples of subclassification: Ethernet II Type, SSAP/DSAP (803.2), Type
of Service, IP Protocol Type, etc.).
6. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate protocol. In some cases, there is only one
selection and a value needs to be entered. This is indicated by bold zeros. Table 8-8 lists the
possible selections associated with each subclassification (examples: IPX, AppleTalk,
NetBIOS, Banyan Vines, 000.000.000.000, 0x00000000, etc.).
7. In some cases, a selection in the subclassification field requires a value to be entered in a third
field to the right of the subclassification field. If so, use the arrow keys to highlight that third
field and type in the appropriate value. Otherwise, go to step 8.
8. Use the arrow keys to highlight the ADD command field.
9. Press ENTER to save the VID and Classification settings. After a brief delay, the Classification
Rule will display in the top half of the screen.
NOTE: After creating a classification rule you must assign it to the appropriate ports
using the Protocol Port Configuration screen described in Section 8.9.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-33

VLAN Classification Configuration Screen

8.8.4

Deleting Line Items

All, or one or more, line items can be deleted as follows:
Deleting All Classification Rules
To delete all the Classification Rules in the top half of the screen, use the arrow keys to highlight
the DEL ALL command field and press ENTER.
Deleting One or More Classification Rules
To delete one or more Classification Rules, mark each one and then delete them, as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the line with the Classification Rule to be deleted.
2. Press the M key and an asterisk (*) appears next to the highlighted line to mark it. The DEL ALL
command is changed to DEL MARKED.
3. If more than one Classification Rule is to be deleted, repeat steps 1 and 2 to mark each line.
NOTE: If for some reason you want to remove a mark, perform steps 1 and 2. Pressing
the M key when a marked line is highlighted will remove the mark. If all marks are
removed, the DEL MARKED command is changed back to DEL ALL.

4. After the lines are marked, use the arrow keys to highlight the DEL MARKED command field.
5. Press ENTER. The marked line items are deleted and the DEL MARKED command is changed
back to DEL ALL.

8-34

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

8.9

PROTOCOL PORT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To perform the following:

• Display the ports.
• Show which ports are set to the line item containing the VID/Classification (Classification Rule)
of interest in the VLAN Classification Configuration screen described in Section 8.8.

• Add or remove ports from being associated with the Classification Rule.
• Add ports to the VLAN Forwarding List of the switch module.
NOTE: The ports can only be added to the VLAN Forwarding List of an existing VLAN.
If the VLAN does not exist, it must be created before the ports can be assigned to the
VLAN Forwarding List. VLANs are created using the Static VLAN Configuration screen
described in Section 8.3.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the line item of interest on the VLAN Classification Configuration
screen and press ENTER. The Protocol Port Configuration screen, Figure 8-9, displays.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-35

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 8-9

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Classification Rule Field

1

Ether II Type

Port
–––
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

0x0800 (DOD IP)

Classify
––––––
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]

Port
–––
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

SET ALL PORTS: [NO ]
SAVE

Classify
––––––
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]

Port
–––
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Classify
––––––
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
NO
[NO ]
[NO ]

Port
–––
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Classify
––––––
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]

SET PORTS TO VLAN FORWARDING [NO ]

NEXT

PREVIOUS

EXIT

RETURN
31351_24w

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 8-10 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 8-10

Protocol Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field …

To …

Classification Rule
Field
(Read-Only)

See the VID, Classification, and Definition of the line selected in the
VLAN Classification Configuration screen. For example, in
Figure 8-9, VID 1, Ether II Type, 0x0800 (DOD IP) was selected in the
VLAN Classification Configuration screen to access the Protocol Port
Configuration screen. All ports with YES in the Classify columns
indicate that they are associated with VID 1 and the Ether II Type
Classification. This causes the VLAN 1, Ether II Type frames that are
received to be classified into VID 1.
This will cause Ether II Type of type 0x0800 (DOD IP) frames to be
transmitted out all ports set to YES as frames belonging to VLAN 1.

8-36

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Table 8-10

Protocol Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field …

To …

Port
(Read-Only)

See the number of each port.

Classify
(Toggle)

See which ports are set to the VID/Classification displayed in the
Classification Rule field above the Port and Classify column headings.
This field toggles between YES and NO, which determines whether or
not the associated port is set to the VID/Classification indicated in the
Classification Rule field.
NOTE: As each Classify field is highlighted, the Event
Message Line (not shown) at the top of the screen indicates
the port type. For example: Fast Ethernet Front Panel, FTM
Backplane Port 3, and Gigabit Ethernet VHSIM.
If a port cannot be configured, NO will be displayed without
brackets.
In some cases the Classify field [NO] may have an asterisk
next to it. The asterisk indicates this classification rule is
active as a result of application by policy.

SET ALL PORTS
(Toggle)

Set all ports to the VLAN and Classification shown in the
Classification Rule field. The SET ALL PORTS field toggles between
NO and YES with NO as the default setting. YES associates all ports
set to YES to the VID/Classification shown in the Classification Rule
field.

SET PORTS TO
VLAN
FORWARDING
(Toggle)

Add the VLAN and classification shown in the Classification Rule
field to the Port VLAN List of all ports set to YES. The SET PORTS
TO VLAN FORWARDING field toggles between NO and YES with
NO as the default setting. YES adds all the ports set to YES to the
VLAN Forwarding list of the switch module.

8.9.1

Assigning Ports to a VID/Classification

The following procedures describe how to

• assign one or more ports to a Classification Rule,
• set all ports simultaneously to a Classification Rule, or
• enable all selected ports to forward frames with the Classification Rule by adding that
Classification Rule to the Port VLAN List of each port.
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

8-37

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Assigning One or More Ports Individually
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Classify field adjacent to the Port number.
2. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the Classify field to YES or NO. YES assigns the port to the
VID/Classification shown in the Classification Rule field. NO removes the port from the
Classification Rule.
3. If more than one port is to be added to the Classification Rule, repeat the first two steps for each
port.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
5. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the settings are saved.
Assigning All Ports Simultaneously
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SET ALL PORTS command field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the SET ALL PORTS field to YES or NO and press ENTER.
YES will set all the ports to the VID/Classification shown in the Classification Rule field. NO
will remove all ports from the Classification Rule.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the setting is saved.
Assigning VID/Classification to Port VLAN Lists
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SET PORTS TO VLAN FORWARDING command field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the SET PORTS TO VLAN FORWARDING command field to
YES or NO. Press ENTER.
YES will add the Classification Rule to the Port VLAN List of each port that has been set to YES
using one of the two procedures previously described. NO will remove the Classification Rule
from all the ports selected.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the setting is saved.

8-38

802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu Screens

9
802.1p Configuration Menu Screens
This chapter describes the 802.1p Configuration Menu screen and the following screens that may
be selected from its menu:

• Port Priority Configuration screen (Section 9.2)
• Traffic Class Information screen (Section 9.3)
• Traffic Class Configuration screen (Section 9.4)
• Transmit Queues Configuration screen (Section 9.5)
• Priority Classification Configuration screen (Section 9.6)
• Protocol Port Configuration screen (Section 9.7)
• Rate Limiting Configuration screen (Section 9.8)

Screen Navigation Paths
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
802.1 Configuration Menu > 802.1p Configuration Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > 802.1
Configuration Menu > 802.1p Configuration Menu

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-1

802.1p Configuration Menu Screen

9.1

802.1p CONFIGURATION MENU SCREEN

When to Use
To select the screens used for setting port priority, priority classifications, or configuring rate
limiting.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the 802.1p CONFIGURATION MENU item on the 802.1
Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The 802.1p Configuration Menu screen,
Figure 9-1, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 9-1

802.1p Configuration Menu Screen

PORT PRIORITY CONFIGURATION
TRAFFIC CLASS INFORMATION
TRANSMIT QUEUES CONFIGURATION
PRIORITY CLASSIFICATION CONFIGURATION
RATE LIMITING

EXIT

RETURN
365-011_06

9-2

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

802.1p Configuration Menu Screen

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 9-1 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 9-1

802.1p Configuration Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

PORT PRIORITY
CONFIGURATION

Used to view or change the port default transmit priority (0 through 7)
of each port for frames that are received (ingress) without priority
information in their tag header. For additional information, refer to
Section 9.2.

TRAFFIC CLASS
INFORMATION

Used to display the current traffic class mapping-to-priority of each
port. For details, refer to Section 9.3.
This screen is also used to select a port to display the Traffic Class
Configuration screen, where the current setting for that port or all
ports may be changed simultaneously. For details, refer to Section 9.4.

TRANSMIT
QUEUES
CONFIGURATION

Used to set each port individually, or all ports simultaneously, to
either transmit frames according to the priority transmit queues set in
the Advanced Port Priority Configuration screen, or transmit frames
according to a priority based on a percentage of port transmission
capacity for each transmit queue. For details, refer to Section 9.5.

PRIORITY
CLASSIFICATION
CONFIGURATION

Used to assign transmit priorities to protocol types of received frames.
For details, refer to Section 9.6.

RATE LIMITING

This screen is also used to access the Protocol Port Configuration
screen to add or delete transmitting ports associated with a specific
priority. For details about the Protocol Port Configuration screen,
refer to Section 9.7.
Used to configure a rate limit for a given port and list of priorities.
This is a traffic rate policing feature used to control the rate of traffic
on a per port/priority basis. The list of priorities can include one,
some, or all of the eight 802.1p priority levels. For details, refer to
Section 9.8.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-3

Port Priority Configuration Screen

9.2

PORT PRIORITY CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To set the priority (0 through 7) on each port. A port receiving a frame without priority information
in its tag header is assigned a priority according to the priority setting on the port. For example, if
the priority of a port is set to 5, the frames received through that port without a priority indicated in
their tag header are classified as a priority 5.
A frame with priority information in its tag header is transmitted according to that priority.
NOTE: The priority is only changed while the switch module is processing the frame.
Frames received by the switch module with a 1p priority value are transmitted with that
same value.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the PORT PRIORITY CONFIGURATION menu item on the
802.1p Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Port Priority Configuration screen,
Figure 9-2, displays.

9-4

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Port Priority Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 9-2

Port Priority Configuration Screen

Port #

Priority

Policy Override

Port #

Priority

Policy Override

1

[0]

NONE

11

[4]

NONE

2

[2]

NONE

12

[4]

NONE

3

[2]

NONE

13

[4]

NONE

4

[3]

NONE

14

[4]

NONE

5

[3]

NONE

15

[4]

NONE

6

[4]

NONE

16

[6]

NONE

7

[4]

NONE

17

[6]

NONE

8

[0]

NONE

18

[6]

NONE

9

[5]

NONE

19

[1]

NONE

10

[6]

NONE

20

[1]

NONE

Set :

[ INDIVIDUAL ]
NEXT

SAVE

PREVIOUS

EXIT

RETURN

NOTE: The Set field toggles from INDIVIDUAL to ALL PORTS. When ALL PORTS is selected, the Priority field displays
to the right of the Set field and the SAVE command changes to SAVE ALL as shown below.

Set :
SAVE ALL

[ ALL PORTS ]
NEXT

Priority :
PREVIOUS

[0 ]
EXIT

RETURN
3650-011_41

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-5

Port Priority Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 9-2 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 9-2

Port Priority Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port #
(Read-Only)

See the port number. Up to 10 rows of port numbers can be displayed
per screen with a maximum of 4 columns. The list of ports can include
both physical and virtual ports. If the number of ports exceed these
limits, one or more other screens may be accessed using the NEXT
and PREVIOUS commands.

Priority
(Selectable)

Select a default priority from 0 to 7 for each port. When the screen is
displayed the current default priority settings are shown for each port.
For details, refer to Section 9.2.1.

Policy Override
(Read-Only)

View any active policy override.

Set
(Toggle)

Set the priority for one port or set all the ports to the same priority.
This field toggles between INDIVIDUAL and ALL PORTS.
INDIVIDUAL is the default setting.
When set to INDIVIDUAL, the priority of various ports may be
changed individually and saved.
When set to ALL PORTS, a Priority field displays to the right of the
Set field, and the SAVE command changes to SAVE ALL. This allows
you to select one priority and apply it to all ports. For details, refer to
Section 9.2.2.

9.2.1

Setting Switch Port Priority Port-by-Port

To set the default port priority on a particular port, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Set field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to step to the INDIVIDUAL setting.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Priority field for the particular port.
4. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate value: 0 through 7.

9-6

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Traffic Class Information Screen

5. If more than one port is to be changed, repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the setting for each port,
then perform step 6 to save all the changes.
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
7. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the setting is saved.

9.2.2

Setting Switch Port Priority on All Ports

To set the port priority on all ports simultaneously, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Set field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to step to the ALL PORTS setting. A Priority field displays to the right of
the Set field.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Priority field.
4. Press the SPACE bar to select a priority from 0 through 7 (0 is the lowest priority).
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE ALL command at the bottom of the screen.
6. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and all ports are set to the priority selected
in step 4 and saved.

9.3

TRAFFIC CLASS INFORMATION SCREEN

When to Use
To view the current mapping of the Traffic Class-to-priority for each port, which can include both
physical and virtual ports. If the number of ports exceeds 12 ports, then other ports can be
displayed using the NEXT command.
With this screen, you can also select a port and access the Traffic Class Configuration screen,
which allows you to change the Traffic Class (0 -3, with 0 being the lowest level) for each priority
of the selected port. Then you can apply the new settings to either the selected port or to all the
ports.
NOTE: The priority is only changed while the switch module is processing the frame.
Frames received by the switch module with a 1p priority value are transmitted with that
same value.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-7

Traffic Class Information Screen

Priority-to-Traffic Class Mapping is used to assign 802.1p priority values to a Traffic Class
(0 through 3 with 0 being the lowest level Traffic Class) for each frame priority.
For example, if the Traffic Class is set to 3 for those frames with a priority 7, then those frames
would be transmitted before any frames contained in Traffic Classes 2 through 0.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the TRAFFIC CLASS INFORMATION menu item on the
802.1p Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Traffic Class Information screen,
Figure 9-3, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 9-3

Traffic Class Information Screen

Priority to Traffic Class Mapping
Port Numbers
––––––––––––
5
6
7

Priority

1

2

3

4

––––––

–––

–––

–––

–––

–––

–––

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

2

0

0

0

0

3

1

1

1

4

2

2

5

2

6
7

8

9

10

11

12

–––

–––

–––

–––

–––

–––

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
3528-88

9-8

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Traffic Class Information Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 9-3 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 9-3

Traffic Class Information Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Priority
(Read-Only)

View eight priority levels of a port that can be associated with Traffic
Class settings. When the screen is displayed the current default Traffic
Class-to-priority settings are shown for each port.
This screen is also used to select a port to display its Traffic Class
Configuration screen, where the current setting for that port or all
ports may be changed simultaneously. The Traffic Class Configuration
screen is described in Section 9.4.

Port
(Read-Only)

View up to 12 port numbers along with their Traffic Class-to-priority
settings. If the number of ports on the switch module exceed 12, one
or more screens may be viewed using the NEXT and PREVIOUS
commands.
The port fields can also be used to access its Traffic Class
Configuration screen, where the current Traffic Class-to-priority
settings may be changed and applied to that port only or to all ports.
For details, refer to “How to Access” in Section 9.4.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-9

Traffic Class Configuration Screen

9.4

TRAFFIC CLASS CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To change the Traffic Class setting of one or more priorities on each port. The new Traffic Class
settings may be applied only to the port selected or to all ports, simultaneously.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate port number field above the column of the Traffic
Class settings in the Traffic Class Information screen. Press ENTER. The Traffic Class
Configuration screen, Figure 9-4, for the selected port is displayed, showing its current Traffic
Class assignment for each Port Priority.

Screen Example
Figure 9-4

Traffic Class Configuration Screen

Number of port selected in the Traffic Class Information screen.

Port x

802.1p Priority Configuration

Priority

SAVE

SAVE TO ALL PORTS

Traffic Class

0

[1]

1

[0]

2

[0]

3

[1]

4

[2]

5

[2]

6

[3]

7

[3]

EXIT

RETURN
4046-87

9-10

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Traffic Class Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 9-4 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 9-4

Traffic Class Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Priority
(Read-Only)

See the list of eight priority levels (0 through 7) that can be associated
with the Traffic Class settings. Priority 0 is the lowest priority. When
the screen is displayed, the current default Traffic Class-to-priority
settings are shown for the selected port.

Traffic Class
(Selectable)

Enable the frames with a certain priority to be mapped to transmit
according to one of four Traffic Classes (0 through 3) with 0 being the
lowest transmit level. Refer to the following table for the Traffic Class
default values according to port priority.
Port Priority

0

1 2

3 4

5 6

7

Traffic Class

1 0 0 1 2 2 3 3

For details on how to set the Traffic Class for each priority, refer to
Section 9.4.1.
SAVE
(Command)

Save the Traffic Class selections for each priority and apply them only
to the selected port.

SAVE TO ALL
PORTS
(Command)

Save the Traffic Class selections for each priority and apply them to all
ports.

9.4.1

Assigning the Traffic Class to Port Priority

To map the Traffic Class to Priority and apply it to either the selected port only or to all front panel
Ethernet ports, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Traffic Class field next to the appropriate priority in the
Priority list.
2. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate value, 0 through 3. The 0 selection is the lowest
level Traffic Class setting.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-11

Transmit Queues Configuration Screen

3. If more than one Traffic Class setting is to be changed, repeat steps 1 and 2 until all of the
changes in the Traffic Class settings have been made.
4. To save and apply the settings to only the port shown on the screen, proceed to step 5. To save
the Traffic Class selections and apply them to all front panel Ethernet ports, proceed to step 6.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen and press
ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the settings are saved.
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE TO ALL PORTS command at the bottom of the
screen and press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the settings are saved.

9.5

TRANSMIT QUEUES CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To configure the operational mode of the transmit queues to either STRICT 802.1 or WEIGHTED.
This enables individual ports or all ports to be set to either transmit frames according to the priority
transmit queues set in the Advanced Priority Configuration screen, or transmit frames according to
a priority based on a percentage of the port transmission capacity allocated for each transmit
queue.
In the STRICT 802.1 mode, frames are transmitted strictly according to the priorities set in the
Advanced Priority Configuration screen. In this mode all frames with a transmit queue of Q3 are
transmitted first, followed by those with transmit queue of Q2, then Q1, and finally Q0.
In the WEIGHTED mode, a percentage (weighted value) is user assigned to establish the amount
of transmission capacity assigned to frames associated with each priority transmit queue
(Q0 through Q3 with Q0 being the lowest priority transmit queue). This allows the modification of
the strict priority queues so that frames with the lower priority queue are guaranteed some access
time to the transmitter.
For example, the transmit queues could be set as follows:

• Q3 to 50%, so at least 50% of the Q3 frames are transmitted.
• Q2 to 25%, so at least 25% of the Q2 frames are transmitted.
• Q1 to 25%, so at least 25% of the Q1 frames are transmitted.
• Q0 to 0%, no Q0 frames will be transmitted until Q3, Q2, and Q1 frames are transmitted.

9-12

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Transmit Queues Configuration Screen

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the TRANSMIT QUEUES CONFIGURATION menu item on
the 802.1p Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Transmit Queues Configuration
screen, Figure 9-5, displays.

Screen Example
Figure 9-5

Transmit Queues Configuration Screen

Current Queueing Mode:

[WEIGHTED]
Q0

Weights:

[0%]

Q1
+

[25%]

Q2
+

[38%]

Q3
+

[31%]

=

94%

Must add up to 100% !

Port:

SAVE

[1]

Ethernet Frontpanel

Number of Queues: 4

SET ALL PORTS

EXIT

RETURN
RETURN

These fields display only when the Current Queueing Mode is set to WEIGHTED.
The "Must add up to 100%!" message displays as long as the total percentage is not
100%, as shown.
2504-96w

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-13

Transmit Queues Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 9-5 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 9-5

Transmit Queues Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field …

To…

Current Queueing
Mode
(Toggle)

Toggle between the STRICT 802.1 and WEIGHTED mode. The default
setting is STRICT 802.1. To set the mode, refer to Section 9.5.1.

Weights Q0, Q1,
Q2, Q3
(Selectable)

Allocate the percentage of port transmission capacity according to
transmit queues Q0 through Q3 (with Q0 being the lowest priority
transmit queue).
NOTE: These selectable fields (Q0 through Q3) do not
display when the Current Queueing Mode is set to STRICT
802.1.

The weights selected must equal 100% or the values cannot be saved.
Default weight distribution is 25% per transmission queue. Selectable
percent weight values per priority transmit queue Q0 through Q3 are as
follows: 00, 06, 12, 19, 25, 31, 38, 44, 50, 56, 62, 69, 75, 81, 88, 94,
100. To set the weight per priority, refer to Section 9.5.1.
Port
(Selectable)

Step to the port to be configured. As each port is stepped to, the port
type (e.g., Ethernet front panel) displays to the right of the selected port
number. To display the current weight settings for the selected port,
press ENTER.

Number of Queues
(Read-Only)

See the number of Queues.

SET ALL PORTS
(Command)

Set all available ports to the current screen settings.

9-14

NOTE: These selectable fields (Q0 through Q3) do not
display when the Current Queueing Mode is set to STRICT
802.1.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Transmit Queues Configuration Screen

9.5.1

Setting the Current Queueing Mode

To set the current queueing mode for a particular port, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate port number. The port type displays to the right
of the Port number field.
TIP: To display the current port settings, press ENTER after selecting the port number.

3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Current Queueing Mode field.
4. To select the Current Queueing Mode for the port selected in step 1, press the SPACE bar to
toggle to either STRICT 802.1 or WEIGHTED. The default is STRICT 802.1.
If STRICT 802.1 is selected, the frames will be transmitted out the selected port according to the
frame transmit priority queue set in the Advanced Priority Configuration screen. The weight
priority transmit queue fields, Q0 through Q3, do not display. Go to step 8 to save the setting.
If WEIGHTED is selected, the weight priority transmit queue fields, Q0 through Q3, display.
The frames will be transmitted out the port according to the percent of transmit capacity
allocated for each transmit queue. The default percentages are 25% for each transmit queue (Q0
through Q3). To set the priority transmit queue fields, go to step 5.
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Q0 field.
6. Use the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate percent value for the priority transmit queue, Q0.
Q0 is the lowest priority transmit queue. Repeat this step for Q1, Q2, and Q3.
NOTE: Total percentage of transmit queues Q0 through Q3 must add up to 100% or the
values cannot be saved.
For example: Q0, 0%+ Q1, 25% + Q2, 25% + Q3, 50% = 100%

7. To save the settings so they apply to the port selected in step 1, go to step 8. To save the settings
so they apply to all available ports, proceed to step 9.
8. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen. Then press
ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the settings are saved for the port selected in
step 1.
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SET ALL PORTS command. Then press ENTER. The
message “SAVED OK” displays and the settings are saved for available ports.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-15

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

9.6

PRIORITY CLASSIFICATION CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To perform the following functions:

• Display the current Priority, Classification, and Description entries of each classification rule.
• Assign priorities according to Classification Rules.
• Add/delete a priority and associated protocol entry.
• Access the Protocol Port Configuration screen.
• Assign an 8-bit TOS (also known as DF) value to incoming IP frames. For more information
about IP TOS Rewrite, refer to Section 9.6.2.

• Write over an existing TOS value.
When a frame is received that already contains an 802.1Q frame tag, frame classification is not
implemented. Instead, the frame is processed by the switch module according to the information
contained in the 802.1Q frame tag.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the PRIORITY CLASSIFICATION CONFIGURATION menu
item on the 802.1p Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Priority Classification
Configuration screen, Figure 9-6, displays.

9-16

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 9-6

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

PID
––––
7
6
1
1
5

Description
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
IP: 123.123.030.006 Mask: 255.255.255.255
IP: 123.123.030.007 Mask: 255.255.255.255
0x8137
0x0800
0x9999

Classification
–––––––––––––––––––––––
Bilateral IP Address
Dest IP Address
Ethernet II Type
Ethernet II Type
802.3 SAP

PID:

CLASSIFICATION:

5

ADD

IP ADDRESS:

[ Bil IP Address ]
123.123.030.006
New IP TOS: [NO CHANGE]
DEL ALL

PREVIOUS

NEXT

MASK:
255.255.255.255

EXIT

RETURN
30793_97w

Classification Rule

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 9-6 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 9-6

Priority Classification Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field …

To…

PID
– top of screen
(Selectable)

Display the Priority Identifiers (PIDs) currently associated with
protocol classifications. To see which ports are assigned to a
PID/Classification, or to add/remove a port from a PID/Classification,
used in the Protocol Port Configuration screen.

Classification
– top of screen
(Selectable)

Display the classification associated with the priority in the PID
column, which may be selected to call up the Protocol Port
Configuration screen.

Description
(Selectable)

Provide a brief description of the classification.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-17

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-6

Priority Classification Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field …

To…

PID
– bottom of screen
(Modifiable)

Enter the priority value that will be associated with the classification
selected in the Classification field. A PID from 0 to 7 may be typed
into the field, where 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority.

CLASSIFICATION
– bottom of screen
(Selectable)

Select the classification that will be associated with the priority
selected in the PID field. Depending on the classification selected,
there can be up to three fields involved (CLASSIFICATION, IP
ADDRESS, and MASK). At the time of this printing, the selections
available in each field are listed in Table 9-7.
NOTE: Besides the PID selected, the order in which a frame is
transmitted also depends on the Classification Precedence
Rules discussed in Section 9.6.1. These rules come into effect
when there are multiple classifications configured in the switch
module.

For details on how to use the Priority Classification Configuration
screen to select the Classification rule, refer to Section 9.6.4.
ADD
– bottom of screen
(Toggle)

Add the current Classification Rule (PID and Classification selections)
to the screen.

DEL ALL/DEL
MARKED
– bottom of screen
(Toggle)

Delete all or one or more marked entries, simultaneously. The DEL
ALL command is the default and it is used to simultaneously delete all
the configured information Classification Rules. The DEL MARKED
command appears in place of the DEL ALL command when one or
more lines are marked for deletion.

9-18

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-7 provides a list of the classifications that can be selected in the Classification field and the
associated subclassifications.
Table 9-7

Classification List

Classification

Subclassification and
Options

Ethernet II Type>

Ethernet II Type:
- IPX
- DOD IP
- ARP
- RARP
- AppleTalk
- Banyan Vines
- DECNET
- CUSTOM >

802.3 SAP>

SSAP/DSAP (802.3):

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

- IP

Same
Same
Same
Same
Same

- IPX
- IPX RAW
- BANYAN
- SNA
- CUSTOM >

Custom or Mask Value

Type Value: 0x00001

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

DSAP/SSAP Type: 0x0000

For more information
about IP TOS, refer to
Section 9.6.2.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-19

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-7

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification and
Options

IP TOS

Type of Service:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

0x0000

IP Protocol Type

IP Protocol Type:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

TCP

Same
Same
Same
Same
Same

- UDP
- ICMP
- IGMP
- OSPF
- CUSTOM >

IPX COS

IPX Class of Service:

Custom or Mask Value

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

Protocol Type: 000

000
IPX Packet Type

IPX Packet Type:
- Hello or SAP
- RIP
- Echo Packet
- Error Packet
- Netware 386/SAP
- Seq. Pkt Protocol
- Netware 286
- CUSTOM >

9-20

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

IPX Packet Type: 00

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-7

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification and
Options

Custom or Mask Value

Src IP Address

IP Address:

Mask:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

000.000.000.000

000.000.000.000

Dest IP Address

IP Address:

Mask:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

000.000.000.000

000.000.000.000

Bil IP Address

IP Address:

Mask:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

000.000.000.000

000.000.000.000

Src IPX Network

IPX Network Num:

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

0x00000000
Dest IPX Network

IPX Network Num:
0x00000000

Bil IPX Network

IPX Network Num:
0x00000000

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-21

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-7

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification and
Options

Src UDP Port

IP UDP Port:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

- FTP Data

Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same

- FTP
- BOOTP Server
- BOOTP Client
- RIP
- Telnet
- TFTP
- HTTP
- DNS
- SMTP
- POP3
- IMAP2
- IMAP3
- NETBIOS Name Serv
- NETBIOS Datagram
- NETBIOS Sess Serv
- CUSTOM >

Dest UDP Port

IP UDP Port:

Same selections as for
Src UDP Port

Same selection as for Src
UDP Port Classification

Bil UDP Port

IP UDP Port:

Same selections as for
Src UDP Port

Same selection as for Src
UDP Port Classification

9-22

Custom or Mask Value

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

UDP Port Number: 00000

UDP Port Number: 00000

UDP Port Number: 00000

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-7

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification and
Options

Src TCP Port

TCP Port:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

- FTP Data

Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same

- FTP
- BOOTP Server
- BOOTP Client
- RIP
- Telnet
- TFTP
- HTTP
- DNS
- SMTP
- POP3
- IMAP2
- IMAP3
- NETBIOS Name Serv
- NETBIOS Datagram
- NETBIOS Sess Serv
- CUSTOM >

Dest TCP Port

TCP Port:

Same selections as for
Src TCP Port

Same selection as for Src
TCP Port Classification

Bil TCP Port

TCP Port:

Same selections as for
Src TCP Port

Same selection as for Src
TCP Port Classification

Custom or Mask Value

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

TCP Port Number: 00000

TCP Port Number: 00000

TCP Port Number: 00000

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-23

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-7

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification and
Options

Src IPX Socket

IPX Socket:
- NCP
- SAP
- RIP
- NETBIOS
- Diagnostics
- NLSP
- IPX WAN
- CUSTOM >

Dest IPX Socket

Src MAC Address

MAC Address:
00-00-00-00-00-00

Dest MAC Address

MAC Address:
00-00-00-00-00-00

Bil MAC Address

MAC Address:
00-00-00-00-00-00

IP Fragments2

9-24

IPX Socket Type: 00000

IPX Socket:
Same selection as for Src
IPX Socket Classification

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

IPX Socket Type: 00000

IPX Socket:
Same selection as for Src
IPX Socket Classification

Bil IPX Socket

Custom or Mask Value

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

IPX Socket Type: 00000

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-7

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification and
Options

Custom or Mask Value

IP Fragments2

Start:

End:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

00000

00000

Dest UDP Range

Start:

End:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

00000

00000

Bil UDP Range

Start:

End:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

00000

00000

Src TCP Port

Start:

End:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

00000

00000

Dest TCP Port

Start:

End:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

00000

00000

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-25

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-7

Classification List (Continued)

Classification

Subclassification and
Options

Custom or Mask Value

Bil TCP Port

Start:

End:

New IP TOS:
- NO CHANGE
- TOS=PID
- CUSTOM>

00000

00000

TOS: Value = 0x00
(Range: 0 - 255)

1. Bold type indicates a user entry.
2. Any fragmented IP frame received is Classified to the priority identification (PID) and
forwarded out the ports configured in the Protocol Port Configuration screen.

9.6.1

Classification Precedence Rules
NOTE: It is important that you have a comprehensive understanding of the precedence
concept before configuring the switch, as these rules can have a significant impact on
the network operation.

When there are multiple classifications assigned to a switch, the switch must determine which
classification takes precedence according to the Classification Precedence Rules. The order of
precedence is predefined in the switch and cannot be changed.
Table 9-8 lists the ISO Layer, associated classification and precedence levels.
NOTE: In Table 9-8, the following applies:
–
–
–
–

9-26

Highest precedence is 1a.
Lowest precedence is 6.
Exact Match indicates a match of an explicitly defined address.
Best Match indicates a match of an entire subnet, or range of addresses within a
subnet.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-8

Classification Precedence

Classification Type

Precedence Level

Layer 2
Source MAC Address Best Match

1a

Destination MAC Address Best Match

1b

EtherType

6

SAP

6

IP TOS

5a

IP Type

5b

IPX COS

5a

IPX Type

5b

Layer 3
Source IP Address Exact Match

2a

Source IP Address Best Match

2b

Destination IP Address Exact Match

2c

Destination IP Address Best Match

2d

Source IPX Network Number

2a

Destination IPX Network Number

2b

IP Fragments

3

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-27

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

Table 9-8

Classification Precedence (Continued)

Classification Type

Precedence Level

Layer 4

9-28

UDP Port Source

4a

UDP Port Destination

4b

TCP Source Port

4a

TCP Destination Port

4b

IPX Socket Source

4a

IPX Socket Destination

4b

UDP Source Port

4a

UDP Source Port Range

4b

UDP Dest Port

4c

UDP Dest Port Range

4d

TCP Source Port

4a

TCP Source Port Range

4b

TCP Dest Port

4c

TCP Dest Port Range

4d

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

The following example shows how the precedence concept can be applied:
Example
A network administrator has defined the following two classifications involving priorities:

• All frames with an IP TOS value of AA (Layer 3, precedence level 5a) are assigned to priority 7.
• All frames with a TCP source port number of 80 (Layer 4, precedence level 4a) are assigned to
priority 3.
In this example, a frame that is received with a TOS value of AA, and a TCP port number of 80,
will be assigned to priority 3. This is because the TCP port number classifications take precedence
over IP TOS classifications.
It is important to remember that the switch will classify frames based on one of the classification
options.

9.6.2

About the IP TOS Rewrite Feature

The Type of Service (TOS) field [also known as the Differential Services (DF) field in RFC 2474]
is an 8-bit field. It is located in the IP packet and used by a device to indicate the precedence or
priority of a given frame (see Figure 9-7). The TOS layer-3 priority indicator enables the ability to
signal the frame priority from end to end as the frame makes its way through the network.
Figure 9-7

Datagram, Layer 2 and Layer 3

Layer 2
Destination Source
Address
Address
(DA)
(SA)

Layer 3
VLAN
Priority

Version

Addr
Length

Type of
Service
(8-bits)
3559_1

This IP TOS Rewrite feature enables a Network Administrator to assign Layer 3 TOS
characteristics to incoming frames and set the switch to rewrite the 8-bit TOS value in the Layer 3
information portion of incoming frames.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-29

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

The IP TOS Rewrite feature enables you to configure the switch to:

• Insert a user-defined 8-bit value into the layer-3 TOS field.
• Write over an existing TOS value. This is useful when the Network Administrator wants to
enforce a specific priority policy in the network.
The IP TOS Rewrite parameters are set using the Priority Classification screen. The screen enables
you to configure the new IP TOS field for any IP frame classification. A selection field is displayed
for all supported classification rules. The default value is “NO CHANGE”. You can optionally
specify TOS=PID, whereby the precedence sub-field in the TOS field to match the value of the
priority in the classification rule. You can also specify a CUSTOM TOS value between 0 and 255.
This allows you to specify an IP TOS value for a particular need.

9.6.3

Displaying the Current PID/Classification Assignments

To see which ports are set to a particular PID/Classification (Classification Rule), the Protocol Port
Configuration screen must be displayed.
To access the Protocol Port Configuration, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to step to the line with the Classification Rule of interest.
2. Press ENTER. The Protocol Port Configuration screen displays, showing a list of the current
ports and those associated with the Classification Rule selected in step 1. These ports are
identified on the screen by a YES setting. For more information about the Protocol Port
Configuration screen and how to use it, refer to Section 9.7.

9.6.4

Assigning a Classification to a PID
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that you read Section 9.6.1 for more information
concerning classification before configuring the switch module. Incorrect configuration
will affect network operation.

To add a Classification Rule, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the PID (priority identification) field.
2. Type in the appropriate priority (0 through 7), where 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest
priority. Press ENTER.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Classification field.

9-30

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Priority Classification Configuration Screen

4. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate Classification. Table 9-7 lists the
subclassification associated with each Classification (examples of classifications: Ethernet II
Type, 802.3 SAP, IP TOS, IP Protocol Type, etc.).
5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the subclassification field to the immediate right of the
Classification field. The name of the field changes depending on the selected Classification, as
shown in Table 9-7 (examples of subclassification: Ethernet II Type, SSAP/DSAP (803.2), Type
of Service, IP Protocol Type, etc.).
6. Press the SPACE bar to step to the appropriate protocol. In some cases, there is only one
selection and a value needs to be entered. This is indicated by bold zeros. Table 9-7 lists the
possible selections associated with each subclassification (examples: IPX, AppleTalk,
NetBIOS, Banyan Vines, 000.000.000.000, 0x00000000, etc.).
7. In some cases, a selection in the subclassification field requires a value to be entered in a third
field to the right of the subclassification field. If so, use the arrow keys to highlight that third
field and type in the appropriate value. Otherwise, go to step 8.
8. Use the arrow keys to highlight the ADD command field.
9. Press ENTER to save the PID and Classification settings. After a brief delay, the Classification
Rule (PID, Classification, and Description) displays in the top half of the screen.
NOTE: After creating a classification rule you must assign it to the appropriate ports
using the Protocol Port Configuration screen described in Section 9.7.

9.6.5

Deleting PID/Classification/Description Line Items

All, or one or more, line items can be deleted as follows:
Deleting All Line Items
To delete all configured Classification Rules, use the arrow keys to highlight the DEL ALL
command field and press ENTER.
Deleting One or More Line Items
To delete one or more Classification Rules, mark each entry and then delete them, as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight a line to be deleted.
2. Press the M key and an asterisk (*) appears next to the highlighted line to mark it. The DEL ALL
command is changed to DEL MARKED.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-31

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

3. If more than one line item is to be deleted, repeat steps 1 and 2 to mark each line.
NOTE: To remove a mark, perform steps 1 and 2. Pressing M when a marked line is
highlighted will remove the mark. If all marks are removed, the DEL MARKED command
is changed back to DEL ALL.

4. After the lines are marked, use the arrow keys to highlight the DEL MARKED command field.
5. Press ENTER. The marked line items are deleted and the DEL MARKED command is changed
back to DEL ALL.

9.7

PROTOCOL PORT CONFIGURATION SCREEN

When to Use
To display the ports associated with the line item (Classification Rule) selected in the Priority
Classification Configuration screen described in Section 9.6. Each port can be changed so it will or
will not transmit frames according to the Classification Rule.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the line of interest (Classification Rule) under the Priority/Protocol
Type/Configured Ports columns on the Priority Classification Configuration screen and press
ENTER. The Protocol Port Configuration screen, Figure 9-8, displays. The Classification Rule
used to access this screen is displayed in the Classification Rule field shown in Figure 9-8.

9-32

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 9-8

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Classification Rule Field

1

Ether II Type

Port
–––
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Classify
––––––
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]

0x0800 (DOD IP)
Port
–––
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Classify
––––––
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]

Port
–––
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Classify
––––––
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
NO
[NO ]
[NO ]

Port
–––
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Classify
––––––
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]
[NO ]

SET ALL PORTS: [NO ]
SAVE

NEXT

PREVIOUS

EXIT

RETURN
3069_98

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 9-9 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 9-9

Protocol Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Classification Rule
(Read-Only)

See the Classification Rule (Priority, Classification, and Definition) of
the line selected in the Priority Classification Configuration screen. For
example, in Figure 9-8, the Classification Rule – 1, Ether II Type,
0x0800 (DOD IP) – was selected in the Priority Classification
Configuration screen to access the Protocol Port Configuration screen.
All ports with YES in the Classify columns would be those ports
associated with PID 1 with an Ether II Type Classification. This causes
Ether II Type frames received by those ports to be transmitted with a
priority value of 1 and according to the Classification Precedence
Rules.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-33

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Table 9-9

Protocol Port Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Port
(Read-Only)

See the number of each port.

Classify
(Toggle)

See which ports are set to the PID/Classification indicated in the
Classification Rule field (see Figure 9-8). The Classify field toggles
between YES and NO, which determines whether or not the associated
port is set to the Classification Rule.
NOTE: As each Classify field is highlighted, the Event
Message Line (not shown) at the top of the screen indicates
the port type. For example: Fast Ethernet Front Panel, FTM
Backplane Port 3, and Gigabit Ethernet VHSIM.
If a port cannot be configured, “NO” displays without
brackets.

For details about assigning ports, refer to Section 9.7.1.
SET ALL PORTS
(Toggle)

9.7.1

Toggle between YES and NO. This determines whether or not all ports
will be assigned to the classification rule shown in the Classification
Rule field. NO is the default. For details about setting all ports
simultaneously, refer to Section 9.7.1.

Assigning Ports to a PID/Classification

To assign one or more ports, or all ports simultaneously, to a PID/Classification (Classification
Rule), proceed as follows:
Assigning One or More Ports Individually
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Classify field adjacent to the Port number.
2. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the Classify field to either NO or YES. YES associates the port
to the priority shown in the Classification Rule field.
3. If more than one port is being set, repeat the first two steps for each port.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
5. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the settings are saved.

9-34

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Assigning All Ports Simultaneously
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SET ALL PORTS command field.
2. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the SET ALL PORTS field to YES or NO and press ENTER.
This setting determines whether or not all the ports are set to the PID/Classification shown in the
Classification Rule field.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press ENTER. The message “SAVED OK” displays and the setting is saved.

9.7.2

Example, Prioritizing Traffic According to Classification Rule

This example illustrates how to prioritize network traffic using classification rules.
In this example, illustrated in Figure 9-9, the ABC Company wants to prioritize traffic to their SAP
server and Mail server, so that the SAP Server has the highest priority, and the Mail Server, the
lowest priority.
Figure 9-9

Prioritizing Network Traffic According to Classification Rule
123.123.30.6
123.123.30.1
123.123.30.2
123.123.30.3
123.123.30.4
123.123.30.5

123.123.35.1
123.123.35.2
123.123.35.3
123.123.35.4
123.123.35.5

9.7.2.1

SAP
Server

S1
Mail
Server
123.123.30.7

S2
2599_25

Solving the Problem

In this example, switches S1 and S2 have already been configured and are operating. The
following covers only the additional steps needed to configure each switch to establish the priority
for each server.
NOTE: For optimal operation of the prioritizing function, the connection between S1 and
S2 is set for 802.1Q tagging.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-35

Protocol Port Configuration Screen

Switch 1
The following settings are done using the Priority Classification Configuration screen to assign the
classification to the priority. Then the Protocol Port Configuration screen is used to assign the ports
to the appropriate priority and classification.
NOTE: In the two settings below, the subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.255. This
means that frames with a source or destination address of 123.123.30.6 or
123.123.30.7 will be mapped as a priority 7 or 0, respectively.

1. To set the SAP Server (IP 123.123.30.6) to the highest priority (7), the following settings will
be made using the Priority Classification Configuration screen:

•
•
•
•

PID: 7
Classification: Bil IP Address
IP Address: 123.123.30.6
Data Mask: 255.255.255.255

2. Assign all ports on the switch module to use this classification setting.
3. To set the Mail Server (IP 123.123.30.7) to the lowest priority (0), the following settings will be
made using the Priority Classification Configuration screen:

• PID: 0
• Classification: Bil IP Address
• IP Address: 123.123.30.7
• Data Mask: 255.255.255.255
4. Assign all ports on the switch module to use this classification setting.
Switch 2
The Switch 1 setup instructions are repeated to set up Switch 2.
NOTE: For optimal operation of the prioritizing function, the connection between S1
and S2 is set for 802.1Q tagging.

9-36

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

9.8

RATE LIMITING CONFIGURATION SCREEN
NOTE: The Inbound Rate Limiting function is not supported on ports connected to
SmartTrunk segments.

When to Use
To limit the rate of traffic entering and leaving the switch module on a per port/priority basis. Up to
three inbound rules and three outbound rules can be programmed per port to control traffic
according to the priority entries. The rules also contain the programmed traffic rate. The allowable
range for the rate limit is 1 Kbps to 1 Gbps.
The outbound and inbound rate limit is configured for a given port and list of priorities. The list of
priorities can include one, some, or all of the eight 802.1p priority levels. The combined rate of all
traffic entering and exiting the port with the priorities configured to that port is not allowed to
exceed the programmed limit. If the rate exceeds the programmed limit, frames are dropped until
the rate falls below the limit.
For more information about the application of Rate Limiting and an example of how it can be used,
refer to Section 9.8.3.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the RATE LIMITING menu item on the 802.1p Configuration
Menu screen and press ENTER. The Rate Limiting Configuration screen, Figure 9-10, displays.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-37

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

Screen Example
Figure 9-10

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen
Maximum

Port #

Priority List

Direction

Dropped Events

1

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

500 kbps

Inbound

4294967295

1

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

500 kbps

Outbound

1

5, 6, 7

500 kbps

Inbound

1

5, 6, 7

500 kbps

Outbound

0

5

1, 2, 3

500 kbps

Outbound

0

5

1, 2, 3

500 kbps

Outbound

10

5, 6, 7

1000 kbps

Feature:

[ Port Number ]

ENABLED
ADD

Max Traffic Rate

Port:
DEL ALL

1
NEXT

1638067

Inbound

Priority List:

Direction:

[ ALL]

[ Inbound ]

PREVIOUS

0

EXIT

Max Rate: kbps
1000000
RETURN
30695_105

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 9-10 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 9-10

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port #
(Read-Only)

See the number of each configured port. The same port number may
appear four times, but with different priorities assigned.
NOTE: If the configuration for a port needs to be changed,
delete the line containing the incorrect configuration, and
then enter a new configuration with the correct settings.

Priority List
– top of screen
(Read-Only)

9-38

See the priorities associated with each port entry.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

Table 9-10

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Max Traffic Rate
(Read-Only)

See the maximum traffic rate set for each port entry. There can be up to
six entries (three for Inbound and three for Outbound traffic) for the
same port. However, there must be a different priority for each Inbound
entry on a port, and the same holds true for the Outbound entries.

Direction
– top of screen
(Read-Only)

Show if the port is configured to limit traffic Inbound or Outbound.

Dropped Events
(Read-Only)

See the number of frames dropped on each port. Up to 4,294,967,295
dropped frames may be displayed. When the maximum count is
reached, the count will roll over to zero. (This screen does not refresh
automatically, so you must re-enter the screen to refresh it.)

Feature
(Toggle)

Enable or disable the Rate Limiting feature on all configured ports.
This field displays the current feature status (ENABLED or
DISABLED) and can be toggled between ENABLED and
DISABLED. When ENABLED is highlighted, pressing ENTER
disables the screen function and the field changes to DISABLED.
DISABLED is the default value.
NOTE: This field must be enabled for the Rate Limiting
feature to function.

Port Number
(Modifiable)
or
Port Type
(Selectable)

Enter the number of the port to be configured using the Port Number
field, or use the Port Type field to select all the 10 Mbps Ethernet, all
the 100 Mbps Ethernet or all the 1 Gbps Ethernet type ports for
configuration.
The Port Number field may be highlighted and toggled to Port Type
using the SPACE bar.
When the Port Number field is displayed (default value), the Port field
below it may be highlighted and a port number typed in that field.
When Port Type is displayed, the field below may be highlighted and a
port type: [all 10Mbps enet], [all 100Mbps enet] or [all Gbps enet] may
be selected using the SPACE bar.
For details on configuring a port, refer to Section 9.8.1.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-39

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

Table 9-10

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Priority List
– bottom of screen
(Selectable)

Assign one or more priorities to the port being configured. The settings
available are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or ALL. When the Priority List is
highlighted, the SPACE bar is used to step to the priority, which must
be marked with an asterisk (*) using the M key. More than one priority
may be selected and marked for each port.
NOTE: If there are two entries for Inbound traffic with the
same Port number (for example, Port 2 and Port 2), you
cannot assign the same priority to both Port Inbound entries.
This also holds true for two entries for Outbound traffic on the
same port.

The selected priorities can be cleared by stepping to each one and
pressing the M key.
For details on configuring a port, refer to Section 9.8.1.
Direction
– bottom of screen
(Toggle)

Toggle between Inbound and Outbound rate limiting. Inbound is the
default value. Up to four rate limit rules (entries) may be set per port,
two for Inbound and two for Outbound or any combination of the four
Inbound or Outbound. Inbound refers to traffic being received by the
switch module and Outbound refers to traffic leaving the switch
module.
Inbound configures the rate limit to drop frames when the traffic rate
(kbps) received by the switch port exceeds the setting in the Max Rate:
kbps field for a particular entry. If there are two or three priority port
entries set to Inbound, each entry functions independently. So, if the
Max Rate is exceeded in one entry, the frames in that entry are
dropped. However, if the traffic associated with another entry on the
same port is transmitting within its maximum rate setting, those frames
are not affected.
Outbound functions the same as the Inbound, except that the port is
configured to drop frames when the traffic rate (kbps) out of the port
exceeds the setting in the Max Rate: kbps field for a particular entry.

9-40

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

Table 9-10

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Max Rate: kbps
(Modifiable)

Enter the maximum transmission rate for this entry. The maximum
transmission rate includes all frames associated with the priorities
selected in the Priority List field. The default high setting is 100 Kbps
maximum interface speed. The high range setting is 100 Kbps to
1 Gbps. The low range setting is 50 to 40000 Kbps.
For details on configuring a port, refer to Section 9.8.1.
NOTE: For further details on configuring the rate limiting
range on a port, refer to the rate_limit_mode command in
Section 12.2.

ADD
(Command)

Add the current port, priority, and maximum rate selections to the
screen. For details about how to configure and add an entry, refer to
Section 9.8.1.

DEL ALL/DEL
MARKED
(Toggle)

Delete all or one or more marked entries. The DEL ALL command is
the default and it is used to simultaneously delete all the lines of
configured information. The DEL MARKED command appears in
place of the DEL ALL command when one or more lines are marked
for deletion. For details on using the two commands, refer to
Section 9.8.2.

9.8.1

Configuring a Port

The following describes how to configure a port using the Rate Limiting Configuration screen:
1. To enter a Port Type, proceed to step 2. To enter a port number, proceed as follows:
a. Use the arrow keys to highlight the field (1) below the Port Number field.
b. Type in the port number and press ENTER.
c. Proceed to step 3.
2. To enter a Port Type, proceed as follows:
a. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Port field (near the bottom of the screen) and press the
SPACE bar. Port Number changes to Port Type and the field below it changes to [all
10Mbps enet].
b. Use the arrow keys to highlight the [all 10Mbps enet] field below the Port Type field.
c. If the port type [all 10Mbps enet] is not the selection needed, press the SPACE bar to select
either [all 100Mbps enet] or [all 1Gbps enet].
802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-41

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the field below the Priority List field, near the bottom of the
screen.
4. Select the priority setting(s) for the port as follows:
a. Use the SPACE bar to step to a priority setting: ALL, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
b. Press the M key to mark the desired priority with an asterisk.
c. If more than one priority is to be selected for the port being configured, repeat steps a and b
for each additional selection.
NOTE: At least one priority must be marked to create an entry.

5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Direction field, near the bottom of the screen.
6. Use the SPACE bar to toggle to either Inbound or Outbound.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the field below the Max Rate: kbps field.
8. Type in the maximum rate in Kbps (minimum: 50 Kbps, maximum is dependent on the speed
capability of the port). For further information, refer to the rate_limit_ command in Chapter 12.
9. To add the new port configuration to memory, highlight the ADD command field and press
ENTER. The new entry displays in the screen.
10.Repeat steps 1 through 9 of this procedure to configure additional Inbound or Outbound limits
on the same port.
11.If Inbound or Outbound rate limiting entries are to be configured on other ports on the device,
repeat steps 1 through 10 to configure each port. Any combination of Inbound and Outbound
entries may be configured per port with a limit of three for Inbound and three for Outbound. (For
example, two inbound/two outbound, one inbound/three outbound, two inbound/one outbound
and one inbound/one outbound.)
12.After configuring the entry(ies) on the ports, enable the screen function for all the configured
ports by highlighting DISABLED in the Feature field and pressing ENTER. The screen function
is enabled and the Feature field changes to ENABLED.

9-42

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

9.8.2

Changing/Deleting Port Line Items

All, or one or more, line items containing the configured port and its priority, maximum rate, and
associated dropped frames can be changed/replaced or deleted as follows:
Changing One or More Line Items
To change the configuration values in a line item, that line item must be deleted and replaced with
a new entry with the correct configuration values. The new settings can then be configured and
added.
Deleting All Line Items
To delete all configured line items, use the arrow keys to highlight the DEL ALL command field
and press ENTER.
Deleting One or More Line Items
To delete one or more line items, mark each entry and then delete them, as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight a line to be deleted.
2. Press the M key and an asterisk (*) appears next to the highlighted line to mark it. The DEL ALL
command is changed to DEL MARKED.
3. If more than one line item is to be deleted, repeat steps 1 and 2 to mark each line.
NOTE: To remove a mark, perform steps 1 and 2. When a marked line is highlighted,
pressing M will remove the mark. If all marks are removed, the DEL MARKED command
is changed back to DEL ALL.

4. After the lines are marked, use the arrow keys to highlight the DEL MARKED command field.
5. Press ENTER. The marked line items are deleted and the DEL MARKED command is changed
back to DEL ALL.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-43

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

9.8.3

More About Rate Limiting

Rate Limiting enables Service Providers in Multi-Dwelling-Unit (MDU) and similar environments
to offer varied bandwidth to customers using low cost Ethernet connections. Another solution for
the enterprise, is to provide high priority bandwidth on the network for guaranteed service level
agreements.
NOTE: When allocating the maximum rate per port, the maximum bandwidth of the
uplink must be kept in mind. For example, if the ports are all set to 10 Mbps and there
are 24 ports, this equals 240 Mbps of bandwidth. If the uplink is only 100 Mbps, there is
an obvious problem if the network administrator guaranteed more bandwidth than the
uplink can support.

In Multi-Dwelling Unit (MDU) or similar environments, the Rate Limiting feature can be activated
per port to adjust the usable bandwidth on a 10 Mbps Ethernet or other type of physical
connection. In residential housing, the service provider may offer multiple internet service
packages, each offering different bandwidth at a different price. These offerings can be supported
using low cost 10 Mbps Ethernet ports wired to each dwelling.
In the enterprise network, this feature (combined with Layer 3/4 prioritization) can provide
guaranteed delivery of high priority traffic through a congested network fabric. This is
accomplished through the construction of a committed information rate (CIR) fabric within the
traditional best effort enterprise LAN fabric.
Example
This is a simple example intended to show how the Rate Limiting feature can be applied to solve a
problem.
Assume that a network was built using a 6C105 chassis in each closet and interconnected with
Enterasys Networks switch routers using Gigabit Ethernet links. Also, assume that 100 users are
attached to each 6C105 chassis through 100 Mbps Ethernet ports. If each user attempted to transfer
data out of the wiring closet at the maximum possible rate, there could be up to 10 Gbps (100 users
x 100 Mbps) of traffic attempting to leave the chassis over a single gigabit link. In this situation,
much of the traffic will be arbitrarily dropped.
Now assume that the system administrator wants to guarantee the delivery of SAP R/3 traffic by
prioritizing it above all other incoming traffic to the chassis. (Unless the inbound rate of the SAP
traffic can be controlled, the guarantee still cannot be made because of the potential for
oversubscription of the inbound gigabit link by high priority traffic.)

9-44

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

Rate Limiting Configuration Screen

To solve this problem, the Rate Limiting feature can be configured on each port to provide each
user with 5 Mbps of high priority bandwidth into the fabric. Now the maximum possible amount of
traffic attempting to leave the chassis at high priority is 5 x 100 = 500 Mbps. The gigabit link has
ample capacity to carry this load out of the chassis. Similar provisioning calculations must be
carried throughout the network all the way to the particular resources to which the service
guarantee applies. The sum of the rate limits on all user ports cannot exceed the capacity of the
weakest point in the delivery path to the resource.

802.1p Configuration Menu Screens

9-45

10
Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens
This chapter describes the Layer 3 Extensions Menu screen and the IGMP/VLAN Configuration
screen (Section 10.2).

Screen Navigation Paths
For 6C105 chassis:
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu >
Layer 3 Extensions Menu
For 6C107 chassis:
Password > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Configuration Menu > Layer 3
Extensions Menu

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens

10-1

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screen

10.1 LAYER 3 EXTENSIONS MENU SCREEN
When to Use
To access the IGMP/VLAN Configuration screen.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the LAYER 3 EXTENSIONS MENU item on the Module
Configuration Menu screen and press ENTER. The Layer 3 Extensions Menu screen, Figure 10-1,
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 10-1

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screen

IGMP/VLAN CONFIGURATION

EXIT

RETURN
2504_103w

10-2

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 10-1 for a functional description of each menu item (at this time there is only one
menu item).
Table 10-1

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

IGMP/VLAN
CONFIGURATION

Used to enable or disable IGMP (Internet Group Management
Protocol) on selected VLANs. For details, refer to Section 10.2.

10.2 IGMP/VLAN CONFIGURATION SCREEN
When to Use
The IGMP/VLAN Configuration screen, Figure 10-2, is used to enable or disable IGMP (Internet
Group Management Protocol, RFC 2236) on selected VLANs, or globally on all VLANs that are
available.
IGMP Snooping provides a solution for handling multicast streams in layer 3 routers. IGMP is for
hosts on multi-access networks to inform locally attached switches of their Multicast group
membership information. This is performed by hosts multicasting IGMP Host Membership
Reports. Multicast switches listen for these messages and then pass them to other switches. This
allows distribution trees to be formed to deliver multicast datagrams.
Information from the IGMP packets is used to send the multicast stream only to the end stations
that request it.
IGMP is enabled or disabled by VLAN, not port by port.
NOTE: Certain versions of firmware will not allow the switch to be a querier. Please
check your release notes for further information. Refer to RFC 2236, Section 8, for more
information on IGMP.

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens

10-3

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen

The following multicast routing protocols are transparently supported and are used only to detect
the location of routers (See the Release Notes for any changes or additions to this list):

• DVMRP (Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol, RFC 1075)
• PIM (Protocol Independent Multicast) version 1 and 2
• CBT (Core Based Trees)
• MOSPF (Multicast OSPF, RFC 1583)
For additional information about IGMP, refer to Appendix B.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the IGMP/VLAN CONFIGURATION menu item on the Layer 3
Extensions Menu screen and press ENTER. The IGMP/VLAN Configuration screen (Figure 10-2)
displays.

Screen Example
Figure 10-2

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen

Configuration
-----------------IGMP Version: [ 2 ]
Query Interval: 120
Query Response Time: 10
Interface Robustness:
2
Last Member Query Interval: 1
Switch Query IP: 123.123.123.123

Statistics
------Querier Address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Querier Uptime: 0 D 10 H 16 M
Querier Expire Time: 219 S

VLAN ID: [ 003 ]
IGMP State: [ ENABLED ]

SAVE

EXIT

RETURN
25042-104w

10-4

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Table 10-2 describes each field of the IGMP/VLAN Configuration screen:
Table 10-2

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

IGMP Version
(Toggle)

See the current configured IGMP version running on the VLAN
selected in the VLAN ID field (version 1 or 2). The default is version 2.
The IGMP Version field can be toggled to configure the switch in
either version 1 or 2 to match the router configuration. For IGMP to
function correctly, all switches on a LAN must be configured to run the
same version of IGMP. All VLANs available to the switch will be
affected if ALL is chosen as the option under VLAN ID. The field will
initially display an asterisk (*).

Query Interval
(Modifiable)

See or change the query interval time. If the switch is the querier, the
value in the Query Interval field indicates how often IGMP Host-Query
frames are transmitted on the VLAN selected in the VLAN ID field.
This value is also used in calculations for other timers. The default
value is 125 seconds. The range of possible entries is 1 to 300 seconds.
An entry outside of the range will cause the error message
“PERMISSIBLE RANGE: 1...300” to display in the Event Message
field. The field will initially display an asterisk (*).

Query Response
Time
(Modifiable)

Enter the maximum query response time advertised in IGMPv2 general
queries on this VLAN. This value is used in calculations for other
timers. The default value is 10 seconds. The range of possible entries is
1 to 300 seconds. The value entered in this field cannot be bigger than
the Query Interval. The field will initially display an asterisk (*).

Interface
Robustness
(Modifiable)

Tune the expected frame loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to be
high loss, the Robustness Variable may be increased. IGMP is robust to
(Robustness Variable-1) packet losses. This value is also used in
calculations for other timers. The default value is 2. The field will
initially display an asterisk (*).
TIP: If the Interface Robustness is adjusted higher than the
default value, depending on the network, this may be an
indication of problems with the network that need to be
resolved.

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens

10-5

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen

Table 10-2

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Last Member Query
Interval
(Modifiable)

Modify the leave latency of the network.The Last Member Query
Interval is the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific
Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages, and is also the
amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages. This value
may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network. A reduced
value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a
group. The interval is in tenths of seconds. This value is not used if the
switch is not the querier. The field will initially display an asterisk (*).

Switch Query IP
(Modifiable)

Enter the IP address that the switch will use to source IGMP query
frames when the switch is the designated querier on the VLAN. The IP
address must be a valid address associated with the VLAN. The field
will initially display an asterisk (*).
NOTE: To prevent the switch from participating in the IGMP
querier election, this IP address must be set to
000.000.000.000.

Querier Address
(Read-Only)

See the address of the IGMP Querier on the IP subnet to which this
VLAN is attached. The field will initially display an asterisk (*).

Querier Uptime
(Read-Only)

See the number of seconds that the current IGMP Querier has been
operational since the last change in Queriers. The field will initially
display an asterisk (*).

Querier Expire
Time
(Read-Only)

See the number of seconds remaining before the Other Querier Present
Timer expires. If the local system (current device displayed) is the
querier, the value of this object is zero. The field will initially display
an asterisk (*).

10-6

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen

Table 10-2

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

VLAN ID
(Selectable)

See the Identifying number of the VLANs available to be modified. If
there are no VLANs available, NONE is displayed in this field and
asterisks (*) will display in the Configuration, Statistics, and IGMP
State fields. The information under Configuration and Statistics applies
only to this VLAN ID. Use the SPACE bar to step through all available
VLAN IDs.
The fields that are selectable or modifiable will initially display
asterisks (*), then the SPACE bar can be used to display the selectable
fields, and the numeric keys can be used to change the modifiable
fields.
To update the Configuration and Statistics fields for a selected
VLAN ID, use the SAVE command.

IGMP State
(Selectable)

See the current state of the VLAN indicated in the VLAN ID field,
which can be modified. Use the SPACE bar to step through the choices:
ENABLED, DISABLED, and DELETE. The commands will act only
on the VLAN whose ID is in the VLAN ID field.

10.2.1 IGMP/VLAN Configuration Procedure
To set up the IGMP protocol for each VLAN, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN ID field, and use the SPACE bar to step through the
VLAN choices to find the correct VLAN to configure.
NOTE: The VLAN IDs are those of the VLANs created using the Static VLAN
Configuration screen described in Chapter 8.
However, a VLAN ID of a VLAN not yet created can be entered, and the parameters can
be configured and saved using the SAVE command. However, the VLAN and its
configuration is not functional until that VLAN is created using the Static VLAN
Configuration screen. Parameters not modified default according to the MIB.

2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IGMP State field.

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens

10-7

IGMP/VLAN Configuration Screen

3. Use the SPACE bar to select ENABLED, DISABLED, or DELETE. If a specific VLAN was
chosen in step 1, ENABLED and DISABLED are used to enable or disable the IGMP
configuration of the chosen VLAN. (DELETE will remove the IGMP configuration of the
VLAN.)
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the IGMP Version field. Then use the SPACE bar to select the
proper IGMP version for the VLAN shown in the VLAN ID field.
NOTE: When configuring IGMP, it is advisable to follow the IGMP configuration rules in
RFC 2236 concerning switches, and routers.

5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the remaining fields: Query Interval, Query Response Time,
Interface Robustness, Last Member Query Interval, and Switch Query IP. Enter the desired
numbers in each field.
6. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command and press the ENTER key to save the
information in all the fields that were changed. Repeat this procedure for each VLAN that you
want to configure for IGMP.

10-8

Layer 3 Extensions Menu Screens

11
Module Statistics Menu Screens
This chapter describes how to use the Module Statistics Menu screen and the following screens
that may be selected from its menu:

• Switch Statistics screen (Section 11.2)
• Interface Statistics screen (Section 11.3)
• RMON Statistics screen (Section 11.4)
• An HSIM or VHSIM Statistics screen may be selected from the Module Statistics Menu screen
when an optional HSIM or VHSIM is installed in the switch module. For a description of the
screen and how to use it, refer to the user’s guide for that HSIM or VHSIM.

• Chassis Environmental Statistics (Section 11.5)

Screen Navigation Paths
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Module Statistics Menu

Module Statistics Menu Screens

11-1

Module Statistics Menu Screen

11.1 MODULE STATISTICS MENU SCREEN
When to Use
To obtain the following information:

• Statistics concerning frame traffic through each switch port.
• MIB II statistics for each switched interface.
• Statistics gathered by the embedded RMON agent on the switch.
• Statistics on any optional Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet HSIM or VHSIM installed in the
module.
NOTE: An HSIM or VHSIM Statistics menu item does not display for non-Ethernet
HSIMs or VHSIMs. If a non-Ethernet HSIM or VHSIM is installed, refer to its user’s guide
for more information.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the MODULE STATISTICS menu item on the Module Menu
screen and press ENTER. The Module Statistics Menu screen, Figure 11-1, displays.

11-2

Module Statistics Menu Screens

Module Statistics Menu Screen

Screen Example
Figure 11-1

Module Statistics Menu Screen

SWITCH STATISTICS
INTERFACE STATISTICS
RMON STATISTICS
HSIM/VHSIM STATISTICS
CHASSIS ENVIRONMENTAL STATISTICS

RETURN

EXIT

3528-01

Menu Descriptions
Refer to Table 11-1 for a functional description of each menu item.
Table 11-1

Module Statistics Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Screen Function

SWITCH
STATISTICS

Lists the number of frames received, transmitted, filtered, and
forwarded by each switch port. For details, refer to Section 11.2.

INTERFACE
STATISTICS

Provides the MIB-II statistics for each switched interface, on an
interface-by-interface basis. For details, refer to Section 11.3.

RMON
STATISTICS

Displays all the statistics gathered by the embedded RMON agent built
into the switch module. For details, refer to Section 11.4.

Module Statistics Menu Screens

11-3

Switch Statistics Screen

Table 11-1

Module Statistics Menu Screen Menu Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

Screen Function

HSIM/VHSIM
STATISTICS

Displays the statistics screen when an optional Fast Ethernet or Gigabit
Ethernet HSIM or VHSIM is installed in the switch module. An HSIM
or VHSIM Statistics menu item does not display for non-Ethernet
HSIMs or VHSIMs. If a non-Ethernet HSIM or VHSIM is installed,
refer to its user’s guide for more information.

CHASSIS
Displays the statistics screen for fan and power supplies. For details,
ENVIRONMENTAL refer to Section 11.5.
STATISTICS

11.2 SWITCH STATISTICS SCREEN
When to Use
To obtain switch statistics about the number of frames received, transmitted, filtered, and
forwarded by each switch port.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the SWITCH STATISTICS menu item on the Module Statistics
Menu screen and press ENTER. The Switch Statistics screen, Figure 11-2, displays.

11-4

Module Statistics Menu Screens

Switch Statistics Screen

Screen Example
Figure 11-2

Switch Statistics Screen

Port #

Frames Rcvd

Frames Txmtd

Frames Fltrd

Frames Frwded

1

100

100

0

100

2

100

100

0

100

3

100

100

0

100

4

100

100

0

100

5

100

100

0

100

6

100

100

0

100

7

100

100

0

100

8

100

100

0

100

9

100

100

0

100

10

100

100

0

100

11

100

100

0

100

12

100

100

0

100

13

100

100

0

CLEAR COUNTERS

PREVIOUS

NEXT

EXIT

100
RETURN
25041-26w

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 11-2 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 11-2

Switch Statistics Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Port #
(Read-Only)

Identify the port number. The total number of ports is dependent on the
number of fixed10/100-Mbps front panel ports and the optional HSIM
or VHSIM installed.

Frames Rcvd
(Read-Only)

See the number of frames received by the interface since the last
power-up or reset.

Frames Txmtd
(Read-Only)

See the number of frames transmitted by the interface since the last
power-up or reset.

Module Statistics Menu Screens

11-5

Interface Statistics Screen

Table 11-2

Switch Statistics Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Frames Fltrd
(Read-Only)

See the number of frames filtered by the interface since the last
power-up or reset.

Frames Frwded
(Read-Only)

See the number of frames forwarded by the interface since the last
power-up or reset.

CLEAR
COUNTERS
(Command)

Temporarily reset all counters of a screen to zero, allowing the user to
observe counter activity over a period of time. For details on how to use
this field, refer to Section 3.1.4.

11.3 INTERFACE STATISTICS SCREEN
When to Use
To obtain the MIB-II statistics of all the switch interfaces with the exception of an installed HSIM
or VHSIM.
NOTE: Enterasys Networks HSIMs that support FDDI or WAN gather their own
statistics, and may be viewed via the Local Management screens of the applicable
HSIM. Refer to your HSIM documentation for information on how to access these
screens.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the INTERFACE STATISTICS menu item on the Module
Statistics Menu screen and press ENTER. The Interface Statistics screen, Figure 11-3, displays.

11-6

Module Statistics Menu Screens

Interface Statistics Screen

Screen Example
Figure 11-3

Interface Statistics Screen

Name: Fast Ethernet Frontpanel

Interface: 1

7500456

InOctets:
InUnicast:

Address:

00-00-00-00-00-00

6789

Last Change:

InNonUnicast:

0

Admin Status:

xx days 00:00:00

InDiscards:

0

Oper Status:

Up

InErrors:

0

InUnknownProtos:

0

MTU:

OutOctets:

0

Speed:

OutUnicast:

0

OutNonUnicast:

0

OutDiscards:

0

OutErrors:

0

OutQLen:

0

Down

CLEAR COUNTERS

Interface: [nn]

1514
100000000

EXIT

RETURN
25042_64w

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 11-3 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 11-3

Interface Statistics Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Interface
(Read-Only)

See the Interface number for which statistics are currently being
displayed. Figure 11-3 shows the Interface field displaying 1. This
represents Port 1 of the switch module. To view other interface
statistics, refer to Section 11.3.1.

Name
(Read-Only)

See the type of interface for which statistics are being displayed.

InOctets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of octets (bytes) that have been received on the
Interface. This includes all octets including bad frames, and framing
characters.

Module Statistics Menu Screens

11-7

Interface Statistics Screen

Table 11-3

Interface Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

InUnicast
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames that have been received that were sent to
a single address.

InNonUnicast
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames that have been received that were
delivered to a broadcast or multicast address.

InDiscards
(Read-Only)

See the total number of inbound frames that were discarded, even
though the frames contained no errors. This field may increment
because the switch module was receiving frames during initialization
and was not ready to forward them, or the switch was being
overutilized.

InErrors
(Read-Only)

See the total number of inbound frames that have been discarded
because they contained errors. This field represents the total number of
errored frames, regardless of the cause of the error.

InUnknownProtos
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames that were discarded because the frames
were in an unknown or unsupported format.

OutOctets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of octets (bytes) that have been transmitted from
the Interface.

OutUnicast
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames transmitted that were sent to a single
address.

OutNonUnicast
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames transmitted to a broadcast or multicast
address.

OutDiscards
(Read-Only)

See the total number of outbound frames that were discarded, even
though the frames contained no errors. This field may increment,
because the switch was being overutilized.

OutErrors
(Read-Only)

See the total number of outbound frames discarded because they
contained errors. This field represents the total number of errored
frames, regardless of the cause of the error.

OutQLen
(Read-Only)

See the length of the frames queue. The field represents the total
number of frames that can be contained in queue.

11-8

Module Statistics Menu Screens

Interface Statistics Screen

Table 11-3

Interface Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Address
(Read-Only)

See the MAC address of the interface that is currently being displayed.

Last Change
(Read-Only)

See the last time that the interface was reset.

Admin Status
(Read-Only)

See the current status of the interface. If this field displays “Testing”,
no frames may be passed on this interface.

Oper Status
(Read-Only)

See the current status of the interface. If this field displays “Testing”,
no frames may be passed on this interface.

MTU
(Read-Only)

See the maximum frame size (in octets) that a frame may contain to be
received or transmitted from this interface.

Speed
(Read-Only)

See the theoretical maximum of the interface’s bandwidth in bits per
second.

Interface [nn]
(Command)

Enter an interface number for viewing statistics. For instructions on
how to use this command, refer to Section 11.3.1.

CLEAR
COUNTERS
(Command)

Temporarily reset all counters of a screen to zero to allow the user to
observe counter activity over a period of time. For details on how to use
this field, refer to Section 3.1.4.

11.3.1 Displaying Interface Statistics
To display the statistics for any interface, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Interface [nn] field at the bottom of the screen.
2. Press the SPACE bar to increment (or press the DEL [delete] key to decrement) the interface
number.
3. Press ENTER (neither the Interface # fields nor the statistics will change until ENTER is
pressed).

Module Statistics Menu Screens

11-9

RMON Statistics Screen

11.4 RMON STATISTICS SCREEN
When to Use
To obtain RMON statistics for each interface, on an interface-by-interface basis.
NOTE: The RMON Statistics screen provides statistics for all the switch module front
panel Ethernet Interfaces, and any Ethernet HSIM/VHSIM installed in the switch module.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the RMON STATISTICS field on the Module Statistics Menu
screen and press ENTER. The RMON Statistics screen, Figure 11-4, displays.
Figure 11-4

RMON Statistics Screen

RMON Index:

X

Owner: monitor

Data Source:

ifIndex.1

Status:

valid

Drop Events:

0

Total Packets:

0

Collisions:

0

Total Octets:

0

Broadcast Pkts:

0

64 Octets:

0

Multicast Pkts:

0

65 - 127 Octets:

0

CRC Align Errors:

0

128 - 255 Octets:

0

Undersized Pkts:

0

256 - 511 Octets:

0

Oversized Pkts:

0

512 - 1023 Octets:

0

Fragments:

0

1024 - 1518 Octets:

0

Jabbers:

0

Index: [nn]

CLEAR COUNTERS

EXIT

RETURN
25041_65w

11-10

Module Statistics Menu Screens

RMON Statistics Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 11-4 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 11-4

RMON Statistics Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

RMON Index
(Read-Only)

See the current Ethernet interface for which statistics are being shown.
The switch module has an embedded RMON agent that gathers
statistics for each interface on the switch module.

Data Source
(Read-Only)

See the source of the statistics data that is currently being displayed on
the screen. Figure 11-4 shows that the data source for this RMON
index is Port 1 by displaying the name IfIndex.1. If the screen was
displaying RMON statistics for Port 4, the name displayed would be
IfIndex.4.

Owner
(Read-Only)

See the name of the entity that configured this entry.

Status
(Read-Only)

See the current operating status of the displayed interface. This field
displays “valid” or “invalid”.

Drop Events
(Read-Only)

See the total number of times that the RMON agent was forced to
discard frames due to the lack of available switch resources.
NOTE: The Drop Events field does not display the number of
frames dropped, it only displays the number of times that the
RMON agent was forced to discard frames.

Collisions
(Read-Only)

See the total number of collisions that have occurred on this interface.

Broadcast Pkts
(Read-Only)

See the total number of good frames that were directed to the broadcast
address. The value of this field does not include multicast frames.

Multicast Pkts
(Read-Only)

See the total number of good frames received that were directed to a
multicast address. The value of this field does not include frames
directed to the broadcast address.

CRC Align Errors
(Read-Only)

See the number of frames with bad Cyclic Redundancy Checks (CRC)
received from the network. The CRC is a 4-byte field in the data frame
that ensures that the data received is the same as the data that was
originally sent.

Module Statistics Menu Screens

11-11

RMON Statistics Screen

Table 11-4

RMON Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

Undersized Pkts
(Read-Only)

See the number of frames received containing less than the minimum
Ethernet frame size of 64 bytes, not including the preamble, but have a
valid CRC.

Oversized Pkts
(Read-Only)

See the number of frames received that exceeded 1518 data bytes, not
including preamble, but have a valid CRC.

Fragments
(Read-Only)

See the number of received frames that are not the minimum number of
bytes in length or received frames that had a bad or missing Frame
Check Sequence (FCS), were less than 64 bytes in length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS bytes), and have an invalid CRC.
NOTE: It is normal for the Fragments field to increment.
Fragments are a normal result of collisions in a half-duplex
network.

Jabbers
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames that were greater than 1518 bytes and
had either a bad FCS or a bad CRC.

Total Packets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames (including bad frames, broadcast
frames, and multicast frames) received on this interface.

Total Octets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of octets (bytes) of data, including those in bad
frames, received on this interface.

64 Octets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames, including bad frames, received that
were 64 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
bytes).

65 – 127 Octets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames, including bad frames, received that
were between 65 and 127 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS bytes).

128 – 255 Octets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames, including bad frames, received that
were between 128 and 255 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS bytes).

256 – 511 Octets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames, including bad frames, received that
were between 256 and 511 bytes in length (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS bytes).

11-12

Module Statistics Menu Screens

RMON Statistics Screen

Table 11-4

RMON Statistics Screen Field Descriptions (Continued)

Use this field…

To…

512 – 1023 Octets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames, including bad frames, received that
were between 512 and 1023 bytes in length (excluding framing bits,
but including FCS bytes).

1024 – 1518 Octets
(Read-Only)

See the total number of frames, including bad frames, received that
were between 1024 and 1518 bytes in length (excluding framing bits,
but including FCS bytes).

Index [nn]
(Command)

Enter a port number to view its statistics. For instructions on how to use
this command, refer to Section 11.4.1.

CLEAR
COUNTERS
(Command)

Temporarily reset all counters of a screen to zero to allow you to
observe counter activity over a period of time. For details on how to use
this command, refer to Section 3.1.4.

11.4.1 Displaying RMON Statistics
To display the statistics for any index, proceed as follows:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Index [nn] field at the bottom of the screen.
2. Press the SPACE bar to increment (or press the DEL [delete] key to decrement) the index
number (number of the port interface).
3. Press ENTER (neither the RMON Index field nor the statistics will change until ENTER is
pressed). The RMON interface index of statistics for the port is displayed.

Module Statistics Menu Screens

11-13

Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration Screen

11.5 CHASSIS ENVIRONMENTAL STATISTICS
CONFIGURATION SCREEN
When to Use
To obtain Chassis statistics for fan and power supplies.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration screen on
the Module Statistics menu screen and press ENTER. The Chassis Environmental Statistics
Configuration screen Figure 11-5 displays.

Screen Example
Figure 11-5 Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration Screen

Chassis Power Redundancy:

Not Available

Power Supply #1 Status:

Fault

Power Supply #2 Status:

Normal

Chassis Fans Status:

Normal

EXIT

RETURN
3528-01_02

11-14

Module Statistics Menu Screens

Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration Screen

Field Descriptions
Refer to Table 11-5 for a functional description of each screen field.
Table 11-5

Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration Screen Field Descriptions

Use this field…

To…

Chassis Power
Redundancy

Determine whether there is power redundancy available.

Chassis Power #1
Status

Determine the status of the redundant power supply.

Chassis Power #2
Status

Determine the status of this power supply.

Chassis Fan Status

If there is power to Chassis Power Redundancy Status 1, this status is
redundant.
Determine the on/off status of the fans.

Module Statistics Menu Screens

11-15

12
Network Tools Screens
This chapter describes the Network Tools Help screen and how to use it and the Network Tools
commands to access and manage network devices. An example of each command is also included.

Screen Navigation Paths
Password > Main Menu > Module Selection > Module Menu > Network Tools

12.1 NETWORK TOOLS
When to Use
To access and manage network devices using the Network Tools command set.

How to Access
Use the arrow keys to highlight the NETWORK TOOLS menu item in the Module Menu screen
and press ENTER. The Network Tools Help screen, Figure 12-1, displays.
TIP: Type help at the prompt to list all the commands that are available in the current
operational mode. A command used incorrectly (wrong syntax) will prompt a display of
the correct usage. Use lowercase characters when entering commands in Network
Tools.

Network Tools Screens

12-1

Network Tools

Screen Example
Figure 12-1

Network Tools Help Screen

Welcome to Network Tools
-> help
Commands Available to the User:
Built in Commands:
arp
netstat
show

bridge
ping
traceroute

defroute
reset

ev
telnet
arp_learn
timed_reset
stpEdgePort
stpRealTimeMsgAge
stpStandby
loopback_detect
dynamic_egress
MAC_lock status
suppress_topology_traps

radius
link_trap
non_bridge_if_num
gigabit_port_mode
stpForceVersion
passiveStp
lg_frame_admin
rate_limit_mode
MAC_lock enable
MAC_lock trap enable
stpLegacyPathCost

soft_reset
cdp
timed_soft_reset
stpPort
stpPointToPointMAC
vrrpPort
sat_size
alias
MAC_lock disable
MAC_lock trap disable

SPECIAL:
done, quit, or exit - Exit from the Network Tools.
For help with a specific command, type 'help '.
->
36502_01

The Network Tools functions are performed using a series of commands. Entering commands in
Network Tools involves typing the command to be executed at the Network Tools prompt, adding
any desired or required extensions, and pressing ENTER.
There are two categories of commands in the command set: Built-in and Special, which are
described below and detailed in Sections 12.2 and 12.5.

• Built-in Commands – Allow you to access and manage network devices.
NOTE: The atm_stp_state command only displays when an HSIM or VHSIM is installed
that supports ATM, such as the HSIM-A6DP or VHSIM2-A6DP.

12-2

Network Tools Screens

Network Tools

Refer to Table 12-1 for a list of the commands.
Table 12-1

Built-in Commands

alias

arp

arp_learn

atm_stp_state1

bridge

cdp

defroute

dynamic_egress

ev

gigabit_port_mode2

lg_frame_admin

link_trap

loopback_detect

MAC_lock disable

MAC_lock enable

MAC_lock status

MAC_lock trap
disable

MAC_lock trap
enable

netstat

non_bridge_if_num

passiveStp

ping

radius

rate_limit_mode

reset

sat_size

suppress_topology_
traps

show

show mac

soft_reset

stpEdgePort

stpForceVersion

stpPointToPointMAC

stpLegacyPathCost

stpPort

stpRealTimeMsgAge

stpStandby

telnet

timed_reset

timed_soft_reset

traceroute

vrrpPort

1. The atm_stp_state command only displays when an HSIM or VHSIM is installed that supports ATM, such as the
HSIM-A6DP or VHSIM2-A6DP.
2. The gigabit_port_mode command only displays when a gigabit interface module is installed.

• Special Commands – Allow the user to exit from Network Tools. The commands are done, quit,
and exit.
NOTES: The conventions used in describing the commands in Network Tools are as
follows:
Arguments enclosed by [ ] are required.
Arguments enclosed by < > are optional.
In the following command examples, the information entered by the user is shown in
bold font.
To abort the output or interrupt a process, press the CONTROL key and c key
simultaneously, designated as ^C here.

Network Tools Screens

12-3

Built-in Commands

The commands are presented in the following format:

command
Description:

Briefly describes the command and its uses.

Syntax:

Shows the required command format. It indicates where arguments, if any,
must be specified.

Options:

Lists any additional fields in the appropriate format that may be added to the
command.

Example:

Shows an example of the command.

12.2 BUILT-IN COMMANDS
The built-in commands listed in this section activate functions on the LM managed device or
devices being accessed through Network Tools.

alias
Description:

Used to enable and disable snooping (per Port). Also clears retrieval and
clearing of stats along with listing and setting of various configuration items.

Syntax:

alias [enable | disable | status] [ALL | port # | port range, i.e., 1-5]
alias [stats]
alias [clear_stats]
alias [fwd_list]
alias [fwd_set] [rate | burst] [value]

Options:

enable – Enables alias snooping on specific port or port range.
disable – Disables alias snooping on specified ports or port range
status – Displays the current alias snooping state (enabled or disabled) on a
port or port range.
stats – Displays current alias snooping state statistics.
clear_stats – Clears all alias snooping statistics.
fwd_list – Lists current configuration settings including max frame size, max
host queue, max PPS, and max burst.
fwd_set – Allows setting of max PPS and/or max burst configuration settings.

12-4

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

alias (Continued)
Example:

-> alias disable 1-4
Snooping is disabled on port 1.
Snooping is disabled on port 2.
Snooping is disabled on port 3.
Snooping is disabled on port 4.
-> alias status 1
Snooping is disabled on port 1.
-> alias stats
Pkts Sent [

<= 64]: 0

Pkts Sent [ 65...128]: 0
Pkts Sent [129...256]: 0
Pkts Sent [257...512]: 0
Pkts Sent [512..1024]: 0
Pkts Sent [

> 1024]: 0

Pkts Dropped (Q full): 0
Pkts Dropped

(Rate): 0

Pkts Truncated

: 0

Port State Deltas

: 93

Port State No Change : 0
Host Enqueue Drop

: 0

Host Enqueue Success : 0
Host Bad Release Cnt : 0
-> alias fwd_list
Max Frame Size

:

1500

Max Host Queue Usage:

32

Max PPS

:

100

Max Burst

:

64

-> alias fwd_set rate 200
Max Frame Size

:

1500

Max Host Queue Usage:

32

Max PPS

:

200

Max Burst

:

64

Network Tools Screens

12-5

Built-in Commands

arp
Description:

Provides access to the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache, enabling
you to view cache data, delete entries, or add a static route. Super-user access
is required to delete an entry or add a static route.
Each ARP cache entry lists the network interface that the switch module is
connected to, the device’s network address or IP address, the device’s physical
address or MAC address, and the media type of connection to the device.
Media types display as numbers, which stand for the following states:
1 – Other
2 – Invalid entry (cannot ping device, timed out, etc.)
3 – Dynamic route entry
4 – Static route entry (not subject to change)
You must specify the arp command with one of the Options specified in this
table.

Syntax:

arp

Options:

-a – Views cache data
-d – Deletes an IP address entry. Requires additional arguments: [Interface
Number] [IP address]
-s – Adds a static entry. Requires additional arguments: [Interface Number]
[IP address] [MAC address]
-f – Flushes the ARP cache

Example:
-> arp-a
#interface
#30
#30
#30
#30

Network Address
122.144.40.111
122.144.48.109
122.144.52.68
122.144.21.43

-> arp-d 1 122.144.52.68
-> arp-s 1 22.44.2.3 00:00:0e:1d:3c
-> arp-f

12-6

Network Tools Screens

Physical Address
00.00.0e.12.3c.04
00.00.0e.13.3d.14
00.00.0e.12.3c.04
00.00.0e.03.1d.3c

Media Type
3(dynamic)
3(dynamic)
3(dynamic)
3(dynamic)

Built-in Commands

arp_learn
Description:

Used to set (normal or limited) how the ARP cache entry will be affected
under different conditions as described in Options below. The command can
also be used to display its current setting.

Syntax:

arp_learn [normal | limited | status]

Options:

normal – Changes the ARP cache entry for a given IP Address, if the source
address (SA) in the entry does not match that of any received IP Packet.
limited – Causes the ARP entry to change only by ARP request and ARP
response packets. Other IP packets will be ignored.
status – Displays the current status information about ARP Cache.

Example:

-> arp_learn status
Current ARP Cache Learn status: NORMAL
-> arp_learn limited
Setting ARP Cache Learning to LIMITED.
!! Don't forget to set a Default Gateway !!
-> arp_learn normal
Setting ARP Cache Learning to NORMAL.

bridge
Description:

Allows the bridge interface to be enabled or disabled at the user’s request,
either one at a time or all at once. Specifying a single interface number will
affect the bridging status of that interface, while specifying ALL will affect
every interface.

Syntax:

bridge [ENABLE/DISABLE] [IFNUM/ALL]

Options:

None

Example:

-> bridge disable all
-> bridge enable 1
-> bridge disable 1

Network Tools Screens

12-7

Built-in Commands

cdp
Description:

Allows management of the Discovery Protocol (CDP) on this module. The
user may enable, disable, or see the current status of CDP.

Syntax:

cdp [enable/disable/status]

Options:

None

Example:

-> cdp status
CDP is Enabled
-> cdp disable
-> cdp status
CDP is Disabled
-> cdp enable
-> cdp status

defroute
Description:

Allows you, in the syntax order shown below, to view, set, or delete the default
IP route to a managed device through the specified interface.

Syntax:

defroute
defroute [interface number] [IP address]
defroute delete [interface number] [IP address]

Options:

None

Example:

-> defroute
# Default route is 147.152.42.32 on interface 2
-> defroute 2 147.152.42.32
# Default route is 147.152.42.32 on interface 2
-> defroute delete
# Default route is not currently set.
->

12-8

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

dynamic_egress
Description:

Enables the dynamic_egress control function to be enabled, disabled, or the
status viewed to see if the function is enabled or disabled. The command
requires a corresponding VLAN Identifier (VID).
The dynamic_egress control function allows or disallows VLANs to be
dynamically added to the dynamic Port VLAN Lists of a port. The default is
that no dynamic Port VLAN Lists will be modified. The lists are modified
based on the inbound traffic on a port. After a frame is classified into a VLAN
(via PVID, L2/L3/L4 classification, etc.), that VLAN is added to the dynamic
Port VLAN List of that port. The following three conditions must be met
before the VLAN is added to the dynamic Port VLAN List.
1. The feature is enabled for that VLAN.
2. The frame was not Q-tagged (priority tagged or untagged is okay).
3. The SmartSwitch device is not currently in STP blocking or listening on
that port.
After a VLAN has been added to the dynamic Port VLAN List, the entry is
subject to time out (age out) if the port does not receive another frame for that
VLAN within the aging time. The dynamic-egress aging time is equal to the
Spanning Tree aging time (default is 300 seconds).
NOTE: Devices that do not source frames regularly (such as
printers), may not operate properly with dynamic egress enabled. In
these cases, it is recommended to manually create Port VLAN Lists.

For an example of how dynamic_egress functions, refer to Section 12.3.
Syntax:

dynamic_egress [action] [vid]

Options:

action:
status – Allows the status of the dynamic_egress function to be checked to
see if it is enabled or disabled.
enable – Allows dynamic egress modification for the vid.
disable – Disallows dynamic egress modification for the vid.
vid:
The VID of the VLAN to be acted on. The VLAN must be one that has been
configured in the switch before it can be selected. The maximum VID value
that can be entered is 4095.
Network Tools Screens

12-9

Built-in Commands

dynamic_egress (Continued)
Example:

-> dynamic_egress status 1
Dynamic Egress Disabled for VLAN ID 0x0001
-> dynamic_egress enable 1
Dynamic Egress Enabled for VLAN ID 0x0001
-> dynamic_egress disable 1
Dynamic Egress Disabled for VLAN ID 0x0001

ev
Description:

Enables and disables groups of events or all events concerning logging
functions.

Syntax:

Enable [Group]
Disable [Group] [Trap] [#|ALL]
Commands to Control Logging Functions:
ev STARt [Logging] [Trapping] – begin logging events/
ev STOp [Logging] [Trapping] – stop logging events/trap
ev Clear – clear the log
ev SEverity  – set/show current logging severity
ev filter [get | set ] – get/set search string
ev logsize [get|set <#(50-5000)>] – get/set dynamic log buffer size
Commands for Listing Events:
ev List [ENabled] [GROUPS|Traps|EVents|Log] – list various items
If the argument enabled is used, then only the enabled events, traps,
or groups are listed.
ev List GROUP_Event # – list events for group #
Commands for Miscellaneous Log/Event Functions:
ev STus – status of log system
ev SCreensize [#] – set # of listed events/screenful#

12-10

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

ev (Continued)
Options:

ENABLE – Enables Group or events or all
DISABLE – Disables Group or events or all
Commands to Control Logging Functions:
ev STARt [Logging] [Trapping] – begin logging events/traps
ev STOp [Logging] [Trapping] – stop logging events/traps
ev Clear – clear the log
ev SEverity  – set/show current logging severity
ev filter [get | set ] – get/set search string
ev logsize [get|set <#(50-5000)>] – get/set dynamic log buffer size
Commands for Listing Events:
ev List [ENabled] [GROUPS|Traps|EVents|Log] – list various items
If the argument enabled is used, then only enabled events
or traps or groups are listed.
ev List GROUP_Event # – list events for group #
Commands for Miscellaneous Log/Event Functions:
ev STus – status of log system
ev SCreensize [#] – set # of listed events/screenful#

Example:

ev disable all
logging(E) - Trapping(D) - Trapped(F) - LogWrapped - #logged
(4/4)

Network Tools Screens

12-11

Built-in Commands

gigabit_port_mode
Description:

Used to configure the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The user may configure the
ports or see the current status of the gigabit configuration. Changing the
mode will cause a reset and loss of all data in NVRAM with the exception of
the IP Address and Subnet IP Address.
NOTE: This field is displayed only when the switch module
supports an installed Gigabit Ethernet VHSIM.

Syntax:

gigabit_port_mode [active | redundant | status]

Options:

Active – Enables both gigabit ports.
Redundant – Causes Port 1 to be active and Port 2 to be set up as a
redundant port.
Status – Displays the current status of the gigabit port.

Example:

-> gigabit_port_mode status
gigabit_port_mode is redundant
-> gigabit_port_mode active
This will reset board and cause loss of persistent objects
except IP Address and Subnet: Are you *SURE* ?

12-12

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

lg_frame_admin
Description:

Enables the changing of large frame support on a per port basis. This enables
the user to determine if large frames can be forwarded out a particular port.

Syntax:

lg_frame_admin [ set ] [ LARGE | FRAG_IF_POSS | SMALL | AUTO ]
[ PORT | ALL_BPLANE | ALL_FDDI ]
lg_frame_admin [ status ] [ port # ]

Options:

set – Sets the size of transmitted frames for a port or a group of ports.
status – Causes the display of the current settings for one port or a group of
ports (e.g., 1– 15).
LARGE – Sets the port to allow all valid large frames to be transmitted out
the port.
FRAG_IF_POSS – This is a special setting. Sets the port, so that all large IP
frames that can be fragmented will be fragmented before being
transmitted out the port. If the large frame cannot be fragmented, then it
will be transmitted out the port as a large frame.
SMALL – Sets the port so that frames will be transmitted as either fragmented
(if possible), or dropped if they cannot be fragmented.
AUTO – Same as SMALL.
PORT – Enables the mib II port number to change the settings.
ALL_BPLANE – Causes all the backplane ports to have the same setting.
ALL_FDDI – Causes all FDDI HSIMs to have the same setting.
NOTE: Only backplane and FDDI HSIMs can be configured
beyond the default settings.

Example:

-> lg_frame_admin set FRAG_IF_POSS all_bplane
The Status for large interfaces has been changed to
FRAG_IF_POSS on all BACK PLANE interfaces.
-> lg_frame_admin status 19
Large frame port status is FRAG_IF_POSSAUTO on Port 19.

Network Tools Screens

12-13

Built-in Commands

link_trap
Description:

Allows link traps to be enabled or disabled when specifying a single port, or
simultaneously when specifying “all” or no ports. When one or all ports are
specified to enable, disable, or find their status, their current condition is
displayed.

Syntax:

link_trap [enable/disable/status] 

Options:

None

Example:

-> link_trap status
LINK TRAP STATUS:
Port 1
Port 3

is ENABLED
is ENABLED

Port 2
Port 4

is DISABLED
is ENABLED

-> link_trap disable 2
Link traps have been DISABLED on port 2
-> link_trap disable all
Link traps have been DISABLED on all ports (1-24)
-> link_trap status 3
Link traps are ENABLED on port 3

loopback_detect
Description:

Allows the user to enable, disable or check the current state of loopback
detection on Ethernet front panel ports.
The user must specify the state as enable, disable or status.
The state field is mandatory.

Syntax:

loopback_detect [enable | disable]

Options:

enable – Enables loopback detection on Ethernet front panel ports.
disable – Disables loopback detection on Ethernet front panel ports.
status – Indicates if loopback detection is enabled or disabled.

Example:

-> loopback_detect enable
-> loopback_detect disable
-> loopback_detect status
Loopback_detect is disabled.

12-14

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

MAC_lock disable
Description:

Disables MAC locking by either individual port or on all ports of the module.
When MAC Locking Disabled and Authentication Disabled, MAC locking is
released (or unlocked) when the link transitions to a down state; there is a
spanning tree topology change; or the user explicitly releases the MAC by
disabling MAC locking for a given port.
When a module is reset, the MAC locking is released without affecting the
administrative state of the port function. States assigned through LM CLI
tools must be persistent across resets. (If you set port MAC locking to either
globally or on a per port basis and the module is reset, the ports will revert to
the last state prior to the reset.

Syntax:

MAC_lock disable [ port# | all ]

Options:

port# – Port number of a port to have MAC locking disabled.
all – Disables MAC locking on all ports of the module.

Example:

-> MAC_lock disable 5
-> MAC_lock disable all

MAC_lock enable
Description:

Enables MAC locking on either an individual port or on all ports of the
module. When the first source MAC address is received on a port, it is
“locked” to that port preventing all other MAC addresses from being learned
on that port. After the receipt of the first MAC, the switch fabric discards all
subsequent frames not containing the configured source MAC address. The
only frames that are forwarded on a “locked” port are those with the “locked”
MAC address for that port, multicast frames, or broadcast frames.

Syntax:

MAC_lock enable [ port# | all ]

Options:

port# – Port number of a port to have MAC locking enabled.
all – Enables MAC locking on all ports of the module.

Example:

-> MAC_lock enable
-> MAC_lock all

Network Tools Screens

12-15

Built-in Commands

MAC_lock status
Description:

Displays a list of all ports on the module and their MAC locking status
(locked or unlocked), MAC locked to a port, and MAC lock trap (enabled or
disabled).

Syntax:

MAC_lock status

Options:

None

Example:

-> MAC_lock status
PorT

Status

1

UNLOCKED

MAC

Enabled

2

UNLOCKED

Enabled

3

LOCKED

00001d123456

Enabled

4

LOCKED

00001dabcdef

Disabled

5

UNLOCKED

Enabled

6

UNLOCKED

Enabled

7

LOCKED

00C0C6125467

Trap

Enabled

MAC_lock trap disable
Description:

Disables the sending of MAC violation traps by either individual port or on
all ports of the module.

Syntax:

MAC_lock trap disable [port# | all ]

Options:

port# – Number of a port to have MAC lock trap disabled.
all – Disables MAC lock trap on all ports of the module.

Example:

-> MAC_lock trap disable 6
-> MAC_lock trap disable all

12-16

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

MAC_lock trap enable
Description:

Enables the sending of MAC violation traps by either individual port or on all
ports of the module.
If the MAC lock trap is enabled on a port, the switch sends a trap when the
port receives a frame containing a source MAC address that is different from
the currently locked MAC address. This trap is sent only once. It is not sent
again until the trap has been reset by a link-state change, trap disable/enable
toggle, MAC authentication/unauthentication, or MAC locking
enable/disable. Traffic is not stopped when a violation occurs. Frames with
source MACs different from the currently “locked” MAC are discarded.

Syntax:

MAC_lock trap enable [ port# | all ]

Options:

port# – Number of the port that will have MAC lock trap enabled.
all – Enables MAC locking on all ports of the module.

Example:

-> MAC_lock trap enable 3
-> MAC_lock trap enable all

Network Tools Screens

12-17

Built-in Commands

netstat
Description:

Provides a display of general network statistics for the managed device. The
netstat command must be used with one of the following two display options.

Syntax:

netstat [option]

Options:

-i – Displays status and capability information for each interface.
-r – Displays routing information for each interface.

Example:
-> netstat -i
Interface + DescriptionMTU

Speed

Admin Oper MAC Addr

#1
#2
#3
#4

10000000
10000000
10000000
10000000

up
up
up
up

(ethernet
(ethernet
(ethernet
(ethernet

-

csmacd)
csmacd)
csmacd)
csmacd)

1514
1514
1514
1514

up
up
up
up

-> netstat -r
Destination

Next-hop

# Default Route
# 134.141.0.0
# 134.141.0.0

DirectConnection 1
DirectConnection 2
DirectConnection 3

0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00

0x00
0x00
0x00
0x00

0x1d
0x1d
0x1d
0x1d

0x07
0x07
0x07
0x07

0x50
0x50
0x50
0x50

0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11

Interface

non_bridge_if_num
Description:

Allows configuration of the interface number assigned to non-bridge ports.
Current settings allowed are 0 or 9999. Changing of the interface number
assigned to non-bridge ports will lead to a reset of the board.

Syntax:

non_bridge_if_num [ 0 | 9999 | status ]

Options:

None

Example:

->non_bridge_if_num_status

12-18

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

passiveStp
Description:

Allows management of PassiveStp on this device. The user may
enable/disable or see the current status of PassiveStp.
Passive Mode Spanning tree allows ports on leaf bridges to transition very
quickly and not invoke a global network re-span through requesting root
elections by:

•
•
•
•
•

Not allowing switches to become the root node;
Not allowing switches to send configuration BPDUs;
Expiring the message age timer when a link transitions to a down state;
Moving the 802.1D Blocked state directly to forwarding; and
Using a default or locally defined Passive STP Max Age time.

Syntax:

passiveStp [ enable | disable | status ]

Options:

enable – Enables PassiveStp on this device.
disable – Disables PassiveStp on this device.
status – Indicates the current status of Passive STP.

Example:

->PassiveStp disable
Disabled
->PassiveStp status
Passive is disabled
Passive Maxage = 2000

ping
Description:

Generates an outbound ping request to check the status (alive/not alive) of a
device at a specified IP address.

Syntax:

ping [IP address]

Options:

None

Example:

-> ping 122.144.40.10
122.144.40.10 is alive

Network Tools Screens

12-19

Built-in Commands

radius
Description:

Used to enable, disable, and configure the radius function. RADIUS
authentication is only used when the client has been properly configured and
enabled. When the RADIUS Client is not enabled, the legacy password
authentication will run as before. For more about Radius Client, refer to
Section 3.6.1.

Syntax:

radius
radius status
radius [enable | disable]
radius prim_ip 
radius sec_ip 
radius prim_ip 
radius sec_ip 
radius timeout 
radius retry 
radius clear
radius prim_auth_port 
radius sec_auth_port 
radius prim_acct_port 
radius sec_acct_port 
radius last_resort < [local|remote] [accept|reject|challenge] >
radius prim_secret
radius sec_secret

12-20

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

radius (Continued)
Options:

radius
Shows Radius help

radius status
Shows all Radius client settings
radius [enable | disable]
Enables or disables the Radius Client

radius prim_ip 
Shows  the primary Radius server’s IP, in decimal-dotted format
radius sec_ip 
Shows  the secondary Radius server’s IP, in decimal-dotted format
radius timeout 
Shows  Radius server timeout in seconds
radius retry 
Shows  number of Radius server retries
radius clear
Resets all Radius client settings
radius prim_auth_port 
Shows  the primary Radius server’s UDP authentication port
radius sec_auth_port 
Shows  the secondary Radius server’s UDP authentication port
radius prim_acct_port 
Shows  the primary Radius server’s UDP accounting port
radius sec_acct_port 
Shows  the secondary Radius server’s UDP accounting port
radius last_resort < [local|remote] [accept|reject|challenge] >
Shows  the last-resort action to take if all radius servers timeout, for
either local (COM port) or remote (TELNET) sessions:
Accept – accept user with no further authentication
Reject – reject user unconditionally
Challenge – challenge the user for the system password (i.e., revert to
legacy module passwords)

Network Tools Screens

12-21

Built-in Commands

radius (Continued)
Options:
(Cont’d)

radius prim_secret
Sets the primary Radius server’s shared secret.
radius sec_secret
Sets the secondary Radius server’s shared secret.
NOTES: The secret is NOT encrypted in transit; if this command is
used over TELNET then the secret may be compromised.
For maximum security, it is recommend to use a 16 to 32 character
string for the shared secret code. For security reasons, the entered
code appears as asterisks (*) on the screen.

Example:

-> radius client
RADIUS Configuration Cli
Command Format : radius
status

(shows Radius status)

clear

(clears all entries)

timeout

(server timeout, seconds)

last_resort

 

retry



enable

(enables radius client)

disable

(disables radius client)

prim_secret

(sets primary secret)

prim_ip



prim_auth_port



prim_acct_port



sec_secret

(sets secondary secret)

sec_ip



sec_auth_port



sec_acct_port



->

12-22

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

radius (Continued)
Example:
(Cont’d)

NOTE: The following shows examples of when 3, 7, and 32
characters are entered as the secret code (16 to 32 characters are
recommended).
-> radius sec_secret
Enter Secret (max 32): ***
Confirm Secret: ***

#

ERROR : secret minimum length is 6

-> radius sec_secret
Enter Secret (max 32): *******
Confirm Secret: *******
Warning: rfc2865 recommends min length of 16
ok

-> radius sec_secret
Enter Secret (max 32): ********************************
Confirm Secret: ********************************
ok

Network Tools Screens

12-23

Built-in Commands

rate_limit_mode
Description:

Allows configuration of the exit-rate limit range to either the default
high_range (100 Kbps to 1 Gbps) or the low range (50 Kbps to 400 Mbps).
Status for this command will return the current mode. This mode is stored in
non-volatile memory and is retained by normal resetting. Changing from one
mode to the other mode may result in current settings being removed if their
range is no longer valid. Changing mode will require a reset.

Syntax:

rate_limit_mode [ status ] [ high_range (default) ] [ low_range ]

Options:

None

Example:

rate_limit_mode status
rate_limit_mode low_range
rate_limit_mode high_range
-> rate_limit_mode status
Rate Limit Mode is: High Range (100Kbps - 1 Gbps).
-> rate_limit_mode low_range
This will reset board : Are you *SURE* ?
-> rate_limit_mode high_range
This will reset board : Are you *SURE* ?

reset
Description:

Initiates a hardware reset of the device. The reset command initializes the
CPU processor, runs the onboard diagnostics, and restarts the software image,
which restores the user configuration settings from NVRAM. The user will be
queried to confirm the reset command to ensure against unwanted resets.
NOTE: The Network Tools connection to the device will be
terminated upon execution of this command.

Syntax:

reset

Options:

None

Example:

-> reset
RESET: Are you *SURE
-> Y

12-24

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

sat_size
Description:

Allows configuration of the size off the Source Address Table (Forwarding
Database) on the device to either 8000 or 16000 entries. The default is 8000
entries. When set to 16000, 400 Layer 2/3/4 VLAN Classification and Priority
Assignment entries will be supported. The default is 1000 Layer 2/3/4 VLAN
Classification and Priority Assignment entries. Changing of sat_size will lead
to a reset of the board.

Syntax:

sat_size [ 8 | 16 | status ]

Options:

None

Example:

-> sat_size_status

suppress_topology_traps
Description:

Enables or disables the generation of topology traps on inter switch links.
Only inter switch link ports that transition to forwarding or blocking cause
the switch to issue a topology trap. By default, this feature is disabled and
will allow the generation of topology traps.

Syntax:

suppress_topology_traps [ enable | disable ]

Options:

enable – Suppresses the generation of topology traps.
disable – Allows the generation of topology traps.

Example:

-> suppress_topology_traps enable
-> suppress_topology_traps disable

Network Tools Screens

12-25

Built-in Commands

show
Description:

Displays information concerning various components of the device. Protocols
currently supported are IP, IPX, DECnet, and AppleTalk. Components of
those protocols that are currently supported are ARP caches, route tables, FIB
tables, server tables, and interface tables. The number of valid entries in the
table will be outputted at the end of the table display.
NOTE: The Network Tools connection to the device will be
terminated upon execution of this command.

Syntax:

show  [TABLE]

Options:

None

Example:
-> show Appletalk interfaces
# Interface
# 1
# 2

AdminStatus
enabled
disabled

OperStatus
enabled
disabled

MTU
1500
1500

Forwarding
enabled
disabled

Framing
ethernet
ethernet

> show IP ARP
# Interface
MediaType
#3
3(dynamic)
#4
3(dynamic)
# Number of valid entries: 2

12-26

Network Tools Screens

Physical|Address
00:00:1d:04:40:5d
08:00:20:0e:d8:31

NetworkAddress
123.456.40.1
123.456.40.30

Built-in Commands

show mac
Description:

The show mac command displays all MAC addresses for the device.

Syntax:

show mac  [fdbId] 
 [mac]  [portNumber]
 []
[]

Options:

fid – Show MAC addresses for the filter database identifier (fdbId).
address – Show the address (mac) if it is known by the device.
port – Show the addresses for the port (portNumber) only.
type – Show addresses of the specified type only. Valid types are:
other, tp_learned, sr_learned, self, management, priorityq, multicast,
broadcast, staticfilt, agedout
Default – Show all MAC addresses for the device.

Example:

MAC Address

FID

Port

Type

-----------------

----------

----------

----------

00:00:1D:00:00:20

1

0010

tp_learned

00:00:1D:00:03:20

1

0010

tp_learned

00:00:1D:C3:BE:53

0

0001

self

00:00:1D:C3:BE:63

0

0017

self

more? (y or n)

Network Tools Screens

12-27

Built-in Commands

soft_reset
Description:

Restarts the software image, which restores the user configuration settings
from NVRAM. The user will be queried to confirm the reset command to
ensure against unwanted resets.
TIP: The Network Tools connection to the device will be terminated
upon execution of this command.

Syntax:

soft_reset

Options:

None

Example:

->soft_reset
RESET: Are you *SURE* ?
-> Y

stpEdgePort
Description:

Sets a port to EDGE PORT (enable) or BRIDGE PORT (disable).

Syntax:

stpEdgePort [ status ]
stpEdgePort [ enable ] [ vlan id ] [ port range ]
stpEdgePort [ disable ] [ vlan id ] [ port range ]

Options:

stpEdgePort enable
stpEdgePort disable
stpEdgePort status

Example:

To enable EdgePort on VLAN 1, port 5:
-> stpEdgePort enable 1 5

To enable EdgePort on VLAN ports 5-10:
-> stpEdgePort enable 1 5-10

12-28

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

stpForceVersion
Description:

Puts Spanning Tree into STP compatibility mode (0) or the default RSTP
mode (2).

Syntax:

stpForceVersion [ 0 | 2 | status ]

Options:

stpForceVersion 0 – Indicates STP compatibility.
Enable stpForceVersion 0 only if the user does not want to “run 802.1w,”
which does not allow transmission of RSTP BPDUs. The bridge will only
transmit config BPDUs and TCNs. Therefore, to another bridge, it looks like
it is running 802.1D (with few exceptions). This is only used if the potential of
looping for 3 seconds (the time it takes a bridge to determine it is connected to
a legacy device) could not be tolerated. The necessity of using this
configuration is rare.
stpForceVersion 2 – Indicates RSTP support.
Status – Gives current value.

Example:

-> stpForceVersion 2
ForceVersion set to 2

Network Tools Screens

12-29

Built-in Commands

stpPointToPointMAC
Description:

Allows you to set the value of stpPointToPointMAC to TRUE, FALSE or
AUTO.

Syntax:

stpPointToPointMAC [ status ] [ value ]
stpPointToPointMAC [ value ] [ vlan id ] [ port range ]
Where 'value' is 'true', 'false' or 'auto'.

Options:

None

Example:

Shows all VLAN ports with a value of true:
-> stpForceVersion MAC status true
Shows all VLAN ports with a value of false:
-> stpForceVersion MAC status false
Shows all VLAN ports with a value of auto:
-> stpForceVersion MAC status auto
Changes the value of stpForceVersion MAC for a port or range of
ports.
-> stpForceVersion MAC auto 2 1-32

12-30

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

set spantree legacypathcost
Description:

Enables or disables the use of 802.1D or 802.1t Path Cost bridging values on
the device. The default is legacy 802.1D standard Path Cost values.
NOTE: When connecting ports between devices, it is
recommended that the devices are all set to run either 802.1D or
802.1t. The path costs must be consistent between bridge ports of
all the devices.

Table 12-2 shows the path cost values when running 802.1t bridging.
Table 12-2

Path Cost Parameter Values

Link
Speed

Recommended
Value

Recommended
Range

Range

10 Mb/s

2,000,000*

200,00020,000,000

1-200,000,000

100 Mb/s

200,000*

20,0002,000,000

1-200,000,000

1 Gb/s

20,000

2,000- 200,000

1-200,000,000

10 Gb/s

2,000

200-20,000

1-200,000,000

*Bridges conforming to IEEE Std 802.1D, 1998 Edition, i.e., that support only 16-bit
values for Path Cost, must use 65,535 as the Path Cost for these link speeds when
used in conjunction with Bridges that support IEEE Std 802.1t (32 bit) Path Cost
values.
Syntax:

stpLegacyPathCost [ enable | disable | status]

Options:

enable – Enables the device to use spanning tree legacy 802.1D Path Cost
values.
disable – Returns the device to the default setting of using the spanning tree
802.1t Path Cost values.
status – Displays the current status of the Path Cost setting (enabled or
disabled).

Network Tools Screens

12-31

Built-in Commands

set spantree legacypathcost (Continued)
Example:

To set the device to use the 802.1D legacy path costs, enter:
-> stpLegacyPathCost enable

To set the device to use the 802.1t path costs (default setting), enter:
-> stpLegacyPathCost disable

To determine if the device is currently operating using 802.1t or 802.1D path
costs values, enter:
-> stpLegacyPathCost status

stpPort
Description:

Used to enable, disable, or show which spanning tree ports on the physical
ports are enabled. This command does not apply to virtual interfaces such as
ATM. To enable, disable, or view the status of ATM ports, use the
atm_stp_state command.

Syntax:

stpPort [status]
stpPort [enable] [port#]
stpPort [disable] [port#]

Options:

status – displays a list of the physical ports that are enabled.
enable port# – enables a specific port.
disable port# – disables a specific port.

Example:

-> stpPort status
The following ports are STP ENABLED:
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

21
-> stpPort enable 1
Enabling STP on Port 2.
-> stpPort disable 2
Disabling STP from Port 2.

12-32

Network Tools Screens

10
20

Built-in Commands

stpRealTimeMsgAge
Description:

Sets the BPDU MESSAGE AGE time mechanism to either IEEE or REAL
TIME.

Syntax:

stpRealTimeMsgAge [ enable | disable | status ]

Options:

enable – Enables the BPDU MESSAGE AGE time mechanism.
disable – Disables BPDU MESSAGE AGE time mechanism.
status – Shows status of the BPDU MESSAGE AGE time mechanism.

Example:

stpRealTimeMsgAge disable
disabled

stpStandby
Description:

Allows the user to control the behavior of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
during link state change. The user may enable, disable, or see the status of the
stpStandby. The enable command causes the STP to go through the standby
states for the port that received a valid link. The disable command causes the
STP to stay in the forwarding state regardless of the link state change.

Syntax:

stpStandby [enable/disable/status]

Options:

None

Example:

-> stpStandby status
Disabled.
-> stpStandby enable
-> stpStandby status
Enabled.
-> stpStandby disable
-> stpStandby status
Disabled.
->

Network Tools Screens

12-33

Built-in Commands

telnet
Description:

Allows the user to communicate with another host (that supports Telnet
connections) using the Telnet protocol. The user must specify the remote host
using its IP address. The [IP address] field is mandatory. If no Port number is
specified, telnet will attempt to contact the host at the default port.

Syntax:

telnet [IP address] 

Options:

None

Example:

-> telnet 134.141.12.345
Trying 134.141.12.345
Connected to 134.141.12.345
SunOS UNIX (server 1)
login:

timed_reset
Description:

Allows configuration of a timed_reset in number of seconds. Status for this
command will return the time until a reset will occur and whether or not a
non-volatile reset will occur when the reset happens. The reset_nv and
dont_reset_nv commands tell the timed reset if non-volatile memory should
be reset or not. If reset non_volatile is chosen, ip will be retained. Entering a
time of 0 will disable any currently enabled timed_reset.

Syntax:

timed_reset [ status ] [ t (seconds) ]
[ reset_nv | dont_reset_nv ]

Options:

None

Example:

timed_reset status
timed_reset 10
timed_reset 30 status
timed_reset 60 reset_nv

12-34

Network Tools Screens

Built-in Commands

timed_soft_reset
Description:

Allows configuration of a timed_soft_reset in number of seconds. Status for
this command will return the time until a reset will occur and whether or not a
non-volatile reset will occur when the reset happens. The reset_nv and
dont_reset_nv commands tell the timed reset if non-volatile memory should
be reset or not. If reset non_volatile is chosen, ip will be retained. Entering a
time of 0 will disable any currently enabled timed_soft_reset.

Syntax:

timed_soft_reset [ status ] [ t (seconds) ]
[ reset_nv | dont_reset_nv ]

Options:

None

Example:

timed_soft_reset status
timed_soft_reset 10
timed_soft_reset 30 status
timed_soft_reset 60 reset_nv

traceroute
Description:

Generates a TRACEROUTE request to a specified IP address and provides a
display of all next-hop routers in the path to the device. If the device is not
reached, the command displays all next-hop routers to the point of failure.

Syntax:

traceroute [IP address]

Options:

None

Example:

-> traceroute 122.144.11.52
#
#
#
#

next-hop[0]:122.144.60.45
next-hop[1]:122.144.8.113
next-hop[2]:122.144.61.45
122.144.11.52 is alive:3 hops away.

Network Tools Screens

12-35

Built-in Commands

vrrpPort
Description:

Enables the user to choose the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
Port(s), front panel Ethernet or Fast Ethernet ports.
When the link on a VRRP Port goes down or up, the database is purged. Then
a notification is sent out to all LAN emulation clients (LECs) connected to the
local HSIM/VHSIM to clear their LEARP cache. Clearing the databases
causes the removal of old information and forces the SmartSwitch devices to
establish new virtual connections based on the new router paths.
NOTE: This command is only valid when the switch supports the
installed HSIM or VHSIM.

Syntax:

vrrpPort [ get ]
vrrpPort [ set ] [ port# ]
vrrpPort [ unset ] [ port# ]
vrrpPort [ set ] [ all ]
vrrpPort [ unset ] [ all ]

Options:

get – displays a list of all port numbers of VRRP Ports currently set.
set port# – sets a specific port as a VRRP Port.
set all – sets all front panel as VRRP Ports.
unset port# – terminates the VRRP setting on a specific port.
unset all – terminates the VRRP setting on all front panel ports.
NOTE: Setting the VRRP Port(s) to 0 will disable this application.

Example:

-> vrrpPort get
VRRP Port is set to 0.
-> vrrpPort set 1
VRRP Port is set to 1.

12-36

Network Tools Screens

Example, Effects of Aging Time on Dynamic Egress

12.3 EXAMPLE, EFFECTS OF AGING TIME ON DYNAMIC EGRESS
This section provides an example of how aging time affects the dynamic recognition of frames
from a user device on a port.
In this example, assume that a rule set on Port 1 of the switch module classifies all IP frames to a
Red VLAN. Once Port 1 receives a frame from a user device, the frame is classified to the
Red VLAN and added to the dynamic Port VLAN List of Port 1.
If after 300 seconds another IP frame is not received on Port 1 (by any station), the Red VLAN is
removed from the dynamic Port VLAN List for Port 1. When Port 1 receives another frame, the
Red VLAN is added again to the dynamic Port VLAN List of Port 1 and the process continues.
The dynamic Port VLAN List is a temporary list used in the dynamic egress function to keep track
of the VLANs and the associated users that reside off a dynamic-egress enabled port.

12.4 EXAMPLE, USING DYNAMIC EGRESS TO CONTROL TRAFFIC
In this simple example (Figure 12-2), assume that there are four ports on the switch module
attached to PCs supporting both protocols AppleTalk (809B and 80F3) and IP. Two PCs support IP
only. The AppleTalk frame traffic is to be contained so only the users running the AppleTalk
protocol can communicate with each other and not flood the network with AppleTalk frames.
However, all users are to have access to a web server connected to Port 7.
Figure 12-2

Example, Dynamic Egress Application
PCs
IP

IP
AppleTalk
IP

AppleTalk
IP
AppleTalk
IP

AppleTalk
IP
123456

S1
7

Web
Server
3069_106

Network Tools Screens

12-37

Special Commands

Solving the Problem
In this example, Switch 1 (S1) has already been configured with a default VLAN 0001 associated
with Filter Database Identifier (FDB ID) 0001 as the Port VLAN Identifier (PVID) on all ports.
The following additional steps are required to configure the switch to solve this problem.
1. Define a new VLAN (VLAN ID 2) using the Static VLAN Configuration screen.
2. Create a Layer 2 rule to associate the protocol AppleTalk 809B and 80F3 to VLAN ID 2 (VID 2)
using the VLAN Classification Configuration screen. This rule is assigned to all ports.
3. Enable the dynamic egress control on VLAN 2 using the Network Tools command
(dynamic_egress enable 2).
With the above configuration, an AppleTalk frame received on any port will be classified into
VLAN 2 (the AppleTalk VLAN), and the Port VLAN List of that port is updated to include
VLAN 2.
For instance, if Port 1 or 2 is connected to a new AppleTalk user, the AppleTalk frames received on
that port are dynamically associated with VLAN 2 and VLAN 2 is added to the Port VLAN List of
that port. The Port VLAN List contains a list of all VLANs whose frames can be transmitted out
that port.
In this example, the AppleTalk traffic is routed only to AppleTalk users (Ports 1, 2, 5, and 6), while
IP traffic is allowed to be seen by IP users (Ports 3, 4, and 7) and by IP/AppleTalk users (Ports 1, 2,
5, and 6).

12.5 SPECIAL COMMANDS
done, quit, exit
Description:

The done, quit, or exit command enables the user to exit from Network Tools
and return to the Main Menu screen.

Syntax:

done, quit, or exit

Options:

None

Example:

-> done
Connection closed

12-38

Network Tools Screens

13
VLAN Operation and Network Applications

NOTE: It is recommended to read this chapter to gain an understanding of VLANs
before configuring the switch.

This chapter provides the following information:

• Definition of VLANs (Section 13.1)
• Types of VLANs (Section 13.2)
• Benefits and Restrictions (Section 13.3) of VLANs
• VLAN Terms (Section 13.4)
• VLAN Operation (Section 13.5)
• Configuration Process (Section 13.6)
• VLAN Switch Operation (Section 13.7)
• VLAN Configuration (Section 13.8)
• Summary of VLAN Local Management (Section 13.9)
• Quick VLAN Walkthrough (Section 13.10) setting up a Static VLAN using Local Management
• Examples (Section 13.11) showing how VLAN-aware switches can be configured based on a
given problem

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-1

Defining VLANs

13.1 DEFINING VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network is a group of devices that function as a single Local Area Network
segment (broadcast domain). The devices that make up a particular VLAN may be widely
separated, both by geography and location in the network.
The creation of VLANs allows users located in separate areas or connected to separate ports to
belong to a single VLAN group. Users that are assigned to such a group will send and receive
broadcast and multicast traffic as though they were all connected to a common network.
VLAN-aware switches isolate broadcast, multicast, and unknown traffic received from VLAN
groups, so that traffic from stations in a VLAN are confined to that VLAN.
When stations are assigned to a VLAN, the performance of their network connection is not
changed. Stations connected to switched ports do not sacrifice the performance of the dedicated
switched link to participate in the VLAN. As a VLAN is not a physical location, but a
membership, the network switches determine VLAN membership by associating a VLAN with a
particular port or frame type.
Figure 13-1 shows a simple example of a port-based VLAN. Two buildings house the Sales and
Finance departments of a single company, and each building has its own internal network. The
stations in each building connect to a SmartSwitch in the basement. The two SmartSwitches are
connected to one another with a high speed link.

13-2

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Defining VLANs

Figure 13-1

Example of a VLAN

Building One

S

S

F

Building Two

S

S

F

A

F

1

10 9

trunk

SmartSwitch
S

S

Member of Sales Network

8

7 6

S

F

B

SmartSwitch
F

Member of Finance Network
22631-01

In this example, the Sales and Finance workstations have been placed on two separate VLANs. In
a plain Ethernet environment, the entire network is a broadcast domain, and the SmartSwitches
follow the IEEE 802.1D bridging specification to send data between stations. A broadcast or
multicast transmission from a Sales workstation in Building One would propagate to all the switch
ports on SmartSwitch A, cross the high speed link to SmartSwitch B, and then propagated out all
switch ports on SmartSwitch B. The SmartSwitches treat each port as being equivalent to any other
port, and have no understanding of the departmental memberships of each workstation.
In a VLAN environment, each SmartSwitch understands that certain individual ports or frames are
members of separate workgroups. In this environment, a broadcast or multicast data transmission
from one of the Sales stations in Building One would reach SmartSwitch A, be sent to the ports
connected to other local members of the Sales VLAN, cross the high speed link to SmartSwitch B,
and then be sent to any other ports and workstations on SmartSwitch B that are members of the
Sales VLAN.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-3

Types of VLANs

13.2 TYPES OF VLANs
There are a number of different strategies for creating Virtual Local Area Networks, each with
their own approaches to defining a station’s membership in a particular VLAN.

13.2.1 802.1Q VLANs
An 802.1Q VLAN switch determines the VLAN membership of a data frame by its Tag Header,
described later in this chapter. If the frame received is not tagged, the switch classifies the frame
into the VLAN that is assigned as the default VLAN of the switch.
Some or all ports on the switch may be configured to operate as GARP VLAN Registration
Protocol (GVRP) ports. If a frame received is tagged, the frame is forwarded to the GVRP ports
that are configured to transmit frames associated with the frame VLAN ID and protocol. If the
received frame is not tagged, the frame is examined and tagged as belonging to the default VLAN.
Then the frame is forwarded to the GVRP ports that are configured to transmit frames associated
with the default VLAN and the frame protocol.

13.2.2 Other VLAN Strategies
VLANs may also be created by a variety of addressing schemes, including the recognition of
groups of MAC addresses or types of traffic. One of the best-known VLAN-like schemes is the use
of IP Subnets to divide networks into smaller subnetworks.

13.3 BENEFITS AND RESTRICTIONS
The primary benefit of the 802.1Q VLAN technology is that it provides localization of traffic. This
function also offers improvements in security and performance to stations assigned to a VLAN.
While the localization of traffic to VLANs can improve security and performance, it imposes some
restrictions on network devices that participate in the VLAN. Through the use of Filtering
Database IDs (FDB IDs) security can be implemented to enable or prevent users from one or more
VLANs from communicating with each other.
One or more VLANs can be assigned to an FDB ID so that all the users that share a common
FDB ID can communicate with each other regardless of their VLAN affiliation. However, for the
sake of security, the members of one FDB ID cannot communicate with the members of another
FDB ID.
To set up a VLAN, all the network switch devices that are assigned to the VLAN must support the
IEEE 802.1Q specification for VLANs. Before you attempt to implement a VLAN strategy, ensure
that the switches under consideration support the IEEE 802.1Q specification.

13-4

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

VLAN Terms

13.4 VLAN TERMS
To fully understand the operation and configuration of port based VLANs, it is essential to
understand the definitions of several key terms.
Table 13-1

VLAN Terms and Definitions

VLAN Term

Definition

VLAN ID

A unique number (between 1 and 4094) that identifies a
particular VLAN. Up to 1000 VLANs can be created on one
SmartSwitch.

VLAN Name

A 32-character alphanumeric name associated with a VLAN ID.
The VLAN Name is intended to make user-defined VLANs
easier to identify and remember.

Egress

Output direction of data from a network device.

Ingress

Incoming direction of data to a network device.

Filtering Database
Identifier (FDB ID)

Addressing information that the device learns about a VLAN is
stored in the filtering database assigned to that VLAN. Several
VLANs can be assigned to the same FDB ID to allow those
VLANs to share addressing information. This enables the devices
in the different VLANs to communicate with each other when the
individual ports have been configured to allow communication to
occur.
The configuration is accomplished using the Local Management
VLAN Forwarding Configuration screen. By default a VLAN is
assigned to the FDB ID that matches its VLAN ID.

Tag Header (VLAN Tag)

Four bytes of data inserted in a frame that identifies the
VLAN/frame classification. The Tag Header is inserted into the
frame directly after the Source MAC address field. Twelve bits of
the Tag Header represent the VLAN ID. The remaining bits are
other control information.

Tagged Frame

A data frame that contains a Tag Header. A VLAN-aware device
can add the Tag Header to any frame it transmits.

Untagged Frame

A data frame that does not have a Tag Header.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-5

VLAN Terms

Table 13-1

VLAN Terms and Definitions (Continued)

VLAN Term

Definition

Default VLAN

The VLAN to which all ports are assigned upon initialization.
The Default VLAN has a VLAN ID of 1 and cannot be deleted or
renamed.

Forwarding List

A list of the ports on a particular device that are eligible to
transmit frames for a selected VLAN.

Port VLAN List

A per port list of all eligible VLANs whose frames can be
forwarded out one specific port and the frame format (tagged or
untagged) of transmissions for that port. The Port VLAN List
specifies what VLANs are associated with a single port for frame
transmission purposes.

Filtering Database

A database structure within the switch that keeps track of the
associations between MAC addresses, VLANs, and interface
(port) numbers. The Filtering Database is referred to when a
switch makes a forwarding decision on a frame.

1Q Connection
(previously referred to as a
1Q Trunk)

A connection between 802.1Q switches that passes only traffic
with a VLAN Tag Header inserted in each frame. All VLANs in
the port’s Port VLAN List are configured to transmit all frames
as tagged frames. The port will drop all incoming frames that do
not have a VLAN tag.

1D Connection

This is a reference to a connection from a switch that passes only
untagged traffic. By default, a port designated to pass only
untagged frames has all VLANs on its Port VLAN List and is
configured to transmit all frames as untagged frames.
NOTE: The user cannot configure an interface to
receive only untagged frames.

Per VLAN Spanning Tree
Protocol (PVSTP)

A protocol used to create a separate Spanning Tree topology for
each VLAN configured in a switch.

Quick Convergence STP
(QCSTP)

A protocol that is compatible with PVSTP and provides
automatic topology changes at 1/10th the speed of PVSTP.
QCSTP is also backwards compatible with IEEE 802.1D.

13-6

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

VLAN Operation

Table 13-1

VLAN Terms and Definitions (Continued)

VLAN Term

Definition

Generic Attribute
Registration Protocol
(GARP)

A protocol used to propagate state information throughout a
switched network.

GARP VLAN
Registration Protocol
(GVRP)

A GARP application used to dynamically create VLANs across a
switched network.

GARP Multicast
Registration Protocol
(GMRP)

A GARP application that functions in a similar fashion as GVRP,
except that GMRP registers multicast addresses on ports to
control the flooding of multicast frames.
NOTE: GMRP is not supported in this device.

13.5 VLAN OPERATION
The following sections describe the operation of a VLAN switch and discuss the operations that a
VLAN switch performs in response to both normal and VLAN-originated network traffic.

13.5.1 Description
The 802.1Q VLAN operation is slightly different than the operation of traditional switched
networking systems. These differences are due to the importance of keeping track of each frame
and its VLAN association as it passes from switch to switch or from port to port within a switch.

13.5.2 VLAN Components
Before describing the operation of an 802.1Q VLAN, it is important to understand the basic
elements that are combined to make up an 802.1Q VLAN.

Stations
A station is any end unit that belongs to a network. In the vast majority of cases, stations are the
computers through which the users access the network.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-7

Configuration Process

Switches
In order to configure a group of stations into a VLAN, the stations must be connected to
VLAN-aware switches. It is the job of the switch to classify received frames into VLAN
memberships and transmit frames, according to VLAN membership, with or without a VLAN Tag
Header.

13.6 CONFIGURATION PROCESS
Before a VLAN can operate, steps must be performed to configure the switch to establish and
configure a VLAN. Enterasys Networks VLAN-aware switches default to operate in the 802.1Q
VLAN mode. However, further configuration is necessary to establish multiple logical networks.
NOTE: The actual steps involved in VLAN configuration using Local Management are
presented in Section 13.8. This brief section describes the actions that must be taken in
very general terms, and is intended only to aid in the Administrator’s understanding of
VLAN switch operation.

13.6.1 Defining a VLAN
A VLAN must exist and have a unique identity before any ports or rules can be assigned to it. The
Administrator defines a VLAN by assigning it a unique identification number (the VLAN ID), a
filter database association, and an optional name. The VLAN ID is the number that will identify
data frames originating from, and intended for, the ports that will belong to this new VLAN.

13.6.2 Classifying Frames to a VLAN
Now that a VLAN has been created, rules are defined to classify all frames in a VLAN. This is
accomplished through management by associating a VLAN ID with each port on the switch.
Optionally, frames can be classified according to layer 2/3/4 information contained in the frame.
At the same time, the Administrator configures the trunk ports that need to consider themselves
members of every VLAN. The configuration of trunk ports is very important in multiswitch VLAN
configurations where a frame’s VLAN membership needs to be maintained across several
switches.

13.6.3 Customizing the VLAN Forwarding List
Each port on a VLAN-awareswitch module has a VLAN forwarding list that contains, as a
minimum, the Port VLAN Identifier (PVID) of the VLAN configured. Additionally, the Port
VLAN Forwarding List of each port can be configured to allow any number of VLANs to be added
to its list. In the case of GMRP (dynamic VLANs), the list can have VLANs added and deleted by
the switch as directed by the protocol.
13-8

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

VLAN Switch Operation

13.7 VLAN SWITCH OPERATION
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN switches act on the classification of frames into VLANs. Sometimes, VLAN
classification is based on tags in the headers of data frames. These VLAN tags are added to data
frames by the switch as the frames are transmitted out certain ports, and are later used to make
forwarding decisions by the switch and other VLAN-aware switches. In the absence of a VLAN
tag header, the classification of a frame into a particular VLAN depends upon the configuration of
the switch port that received the frame.
The operation of an 802.1Q VLAN switch is best understood from a point of view of the switch
itself. To illustrate this concept, the examples that follow view the switch operations from inside
the switch.
Figure 13-2 depicts the inside of a switch with six ports, numbered one through six. The switch has
been configured to associate VLAN A and B with Filtering Database Identifier (FDB ID) 2,
VLAN C and D with FDB ID 3, and VLAN E with FDB ID 4. Port 6 has been classified to serve
as a VLAN trunk connection (will only transmit and receive tagged frames). This classification
establishes that all VLANs are members of the Port VLAN List for Port 6 and the frames
transmitted for all VLANs will contain a tag header. Also the PVID for Port 6 is set to the default
VLAN with its corresponding relationship to FDB ID 1. Although untagged frames are not usually
present on a VLAN trunk connection, any untagged frames received would need to be classified if
the port has not been configured to drop all untagged frames.
Figure 13-2

View from Inside the Switch

Port 1

A
FID 2

Port 4

D
FID 3

Port 2

Port 5

B
FID 2
E
FID 4

Port 3

Port 6

C
FID 3
Default
FID 1

2599-02

NOTE: The example in Figure 13-2 shows ports sharing the same FDB ID, which is
supported by the switch. However, this feature cannot be configured using Local
Management at this time, but it can be configured using an SNMP management
application.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-9

VLAN Switch Operation

13.7.1 Receiving Frames from VLAN Ports
When a switch is placed in 802.1Q Operational Mode, every frame received by the switch must
belong, or be assigned, to a VLAN.
The switch will now make a forwarding decision on the frame, as described in Section 13.7.2.

Untagged Frames
The switch receives a frame from Port 1 and examines the frame. The switch notices that this
frame does not currently have a VLAN tag. The switch recognizes that Port 1 is a member of
VLAN A and classifies the frame as such. In this fashion, all untagged frames entering a VLAN
switch assume membership in a VLAN.
NOTE: A VLAN ID is always assigned to a port. By default, it is the Default VLAN
(VLAN ID = 1).

The switch will now make a forwarding decision on the frame, as described in Section 13.7.2.

Tagged Frames
In this example, the switch receives a tagged frame from Port 4. The switch examines the frame
and notices the frame is tagged for VLAN C. This frame may have already been through a
VLAN-aware switch, or originated from a station capable of specifying a VLAN membership. If a
switch receives a frame containing a tag, the switch will classify the frame in regard to its tag
rather than the PVID for its port.
The switch will now make a forwarding decision on the frame, as described in Section 13.7.2.

13.7.2 Forwarding Decisions
The type of frame under consideration and the filter setting of a VLAN switch determines how the
switch forwards VLAN frames.

13.7.2.1 Broadcasts, Multicasts, and Unknown Unicasts
If a frame with a broadcast, multicast, or other unknown address is received by an 802.1Q
VLAN-aware switch, the switch checks the VLAN classification of the frame. The switch then
forwards the frame out all ports that are identified in the Egress List for that VLAN. For example,
if Port 3, shown in Figure 13-2, received the frame, the frame would then be sent to all ports that
had VLAN C in their Port VLAN List.
13-10

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

VLAN Configuration

13.7.2.2 Known Unicasts
When a VLAN switch receives a frame with a known MAC address as its destination address, the
action taken by the switch to determine how the frame is transmitted depends on the VLAN, the
VLAN associated FDB ID, and if the port identified to send the frame is enabled to do so.
When a frame is received it is classified into a VLAN. The destination address is looked up in the
FDB ID associated with the VLAN. If a match is found, it is forwarded out the port identified in
the lookup if, and only if, that port is allowed to transmit frames for that VLAN. If a match is not
found, then the frame is flooded out all ports that are allowed to transmit frames belonging to that
VLAN.
For example, assume that a frame is received by the switch depicted in Figure 13-2. This frame is a
unicast untagged frame received on Port 3. The frame is then classified for VLAN C. The switch
then makes its forwarding decision by comparing the destination MAC address to its filtering
database. In this case, the MAC address is looked up in the filtering database FDB ID 3, which is
associated with VLAN C and VLAN D. The switch recognizes the destination MAC address of the
frame as being located out Port 4.
Having made the forwarding decision, the switch now examines the Port VLAN List of Port 4 to
determine if it may transmit a frame belonging to VLAN C. If so, the frame is transmitted out Port
4. If Port 4 has not been configured to transmit frames belonging to VLAN C, the frame is
discarded.

13.8 VLAN CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes how to set up the switch for local or remote management, and the VLAN
Local Management screens used to create and configure VLANs in the switch.

13.8.1 Managing the Switch
The switch may be managed locally via a terminal connected to the COM port, or remotely
(SNMP or Telnet sessions) from a management station connected to a switch port that is a member
of the same VLAN as the switch’s Host Data Port. (By default, this is the default VLAN.) When
the switch is configured with VLANs, special precautions must be taken to use remote
management.

13.8.2 Switch Without VLANs
When the switch is powered up, the switch uses its default settings to switch frames like an 802.1Q
switch. In this default configuration, all ports are a member of the default VLAN (VLAN 1)
including the virtual Host Data Port of the switch, so any port can be used to manage the device as
shown in Figure 13-3.
VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-11

VLAN Configuration

Figure 13-3

Switch Management with Only Default VLAN

802.1Q Switch

1
2

Host
Data
Port

3

4
5
6

NOTE: All ports, including the virtual Host Data Port, are
members of the default VLAN. Therefore, any station
shown may be used as the management station.
2599_14

13.8.3 Switch with VLANs
If the switch is to be configured for multiple VLANs, it may be desirable to configure a
management-only VLAN. This allows a management station connected to the management VLAN
to manage all ports on the switch and make management secure by preventing management via
ports assigned to other VLANs.
NOTE: The switch’s virtual Host Data Port, like any other port, has VLAN membership
that may be configured. For manageability of the device to be maintained, this port must
be a member of the same VLAN as the port to which the management station is
connected.

Figure 13-4 shows an example of a switch configured with port 1 on the Management VLAN port
and the other users belonging to VLANs A, B, and C.

13-12

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

VLAN Configuration

Figure 13-4

Switch Management with VLANs

Management
VLAN

VLAN A

VLAN A

802.1Q Switch

1
2
3

Set as an 802.1Q Trunk port.

4
Host
Data
Port

7

5
6

VLAN B

VLAN B

VLAN C

25992_15

To set up the switch (Figure 13-4) to establish a management VLAN on port 1, use the following
process:
1. Use the Static VLAN Configuration screen to define a new VLAN named “Management
VLAN” (or other suitable name) and its VLAN ID. In this example, the VLAN ID is set to 2.
An FDB ID is automatically assigned by the switch, so that the Management VLAN has its
filtering database to make the VLAN secure. In this example, the FDB ID is 2 and no other
VLAN is assigned to this FDB ID. This keeps the new VLAN from sharing its filtering database
with other VLANs in the switch.
2. Use the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen to associate the ports to particular VLANs.
For details on defining a Static VLAN, refer to Section 8.3.1.
3. Use the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen to select the type of Egress setting for each
port. When a port is set as Tagged, a VLAN tag is inserted into each frame transmitted out the
port to associate it with the VLAN specified at the top of the screen.
4. Use the VLAN Port Configuration screen to enter the VLAN ID, 2, of the new Management
VLAN as the Port VLAN ID (PVID) to a port. In this example, it is port 1. Leave the Acceptable
Frame Types setting in the default value, ADMIT ALL FRAMES.
NOTE: It is not necessary to configure a physical port for management on each switch.
Only those switches that will have a management station attached to it need a physical
port assigned to the Management VLAN.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-13

Summary of VLAN Local Management

5. Use the VLAN Port Configuration screen to enter the VLAN ID, 2, of the new Management
VLAN as the Port VLAN ID (PVID) to the Host Data Port. The port number will depend on the
device. This port is not a physical port and will usually be one number above the maximum
number of physical ports on the device, including the ports on any optional interfaces installed.
In this example, it will be port 8. Set the Acceptable Frame Types setting to the setting: ADMIT
VLAN ALL FRAMES. For details on assigning a PVID, refer to Section 8.7.
This process would be repeated on every switch that is connected in the network to ensure that
each switch has a secure Management VLAN for switch management.
If the switch was connected to another switch via port 7, which was set to pass only tagged frames,
then the management station connected to the Management VLAN port of either switch could
manage both switches.
NOTE: The management stations at each switch must be on the same Management
VLAN.

No matter how many switches are connected, a management station connected to any port on the
same Management VLAN can be used to remotely manage any Enterasys Networks 802.1Q
switch in the network as long as the Host Data Port of all the switches are members of the same
Management VLAN.

13.9 SUMMARY OF VLAN LOCAL MANAGEMENT
The VLAN configuration process is an extension of normal Local Management operations. A
series of Local Management screens provides access to the functions and commands necessary to
add, change, or delete VLANs and to assign ports to those VLANs.
A switch supporting 802.1Q VLANs provides the VLAN Configuration screens as a standard part
of its Local Management hierarchy when the switch is configured to operate in 802.1Q Mode. The
hierarchy of the Local Management screens pertaining to 802.1Q VLAN configuration is shown in
Figure 13-5.

13-14

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Summary of VLAN Local Management

Figure 13-5

802.1Q VLAN Screen Hierarchy

802.1Q VLAN
Configuration Menu

Static VLAN Configuration
Static VLAN Egress Configuration
Current VLAN Configuration
Current VLAN Egress Configuration
VLAN Port Configuration
VLAN Classification Configuration
Protocol Port Configuration
40462_95

For details about each screen and how to use them, refer to Chapter 8.

13.9.1 Preparing for VLAN Configuration
A little forethought and planning is essential to a good VLAN implementation. Before attempting
to configure a single switch for VLAN operation, consider the following:

• How many VLANs will be required?
• What stations will belong to them?
• What ports are connected to those stations?
• What ports will be configured as GARP-aware ports?
• Will Per VLAN Spanning Tree or Quick Convergence Spanning Tree be used?
It may also be helpful to sketch out a diagram of your VLAN strategy. The examples provided
starting with Section 13.11 may be useful for a depiction of the planning process. Section 13.10
provides a quick walkthrough on how to use the screens to configure the switch for VLANs.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-15

Quick VLAN Walkthrough

13.10 QUICK VLAN WALKTHROUGH
The procedures below provide a short tutorial walkthrough that presents each of the steps
necessary to configure a new Static VLAN. These steps include the following:

• Assigning a VLAN ID and VLAN Name
• Assigning ports to the VLAN Egress list
• Configuring the port parameters
You may want to follow this walkthrough from start to finish before attempting to configure your
own VLANs. This walkthrough begins at the 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen.

Assigning a VLAN ID and VLAN Name
1. On the 802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen, use the arrow keys to highlight the STATIC
VLAN CONFIGURATION menu item. Press ENTER. The Static VLAN Configuration
screen displays.
2. On the Static VLAN Configuration screen, use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN ID field
at the bottom of the screen. Assign a number for a new VLAN by typing the number “2” in the
VLAN ID field. A Filtering Database Identified (FDB ID) will automatically be assigned to the
VLAN ID.
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the VLAN Name field at the bottom of the screen. Type “TEST
VLAN” in the VLAN Name field. Press ENTER.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the ADD command field at the bottom of the screen. Press
ENTER. The new VLAN is created and added to the list in the screen as shown in Figure 13-6.

13-16

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Quick VLAN Walkthrough

Figure 13-6

Walkthrough Stage One, Static VLAN Configuration Screen

VLAN Name

VLAN ID

FDB ID

––––––––

––––––

1

1

Default VLAN

2

2

Test VLAN

VLAN ID: 2
ADD

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

VLAN Name: [ Test VLAN ]
DEL MARKED

NEXT

EXIT

RETURN
40461_80

Assigning Ports to the VLAN Egress list
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the line in the list that has VLAN ID 2. As shown in Figure 13-6,
the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen displays showing all ports.
It is now time to assign a port to this new VLAN.
NOTE: When a Static VLAN is created, all ports on the Static VLAN Egress
Configuration screen are set to the default setting of NO for that VLAN. This means that
none of the ports are on the Egress list for that VLAN and will not transmit its frames.

2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Egress field of Port 3.
NOTE: For the purposes of this walkthrough, Port 3 will be configured. As this port will
connect to a single workstation, and is not to be used for switch-to-switch
communications, the Egress will be set to UNTAGGED.

3. Use the SPACE bar to step to UNTAGGED.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-17

Quick VLAN Walkthrough

4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER.
Port 3 is added to the Egress list of VLAN 2 with a frame format of UNTAGGED. The screen
should now look like Figure 13-7.
Figure 13-7

Walkthrough Stage Two, Port 3 Egress Setting

VLAN ID: 2
Port
Egress
------------1
[ NO ]
2
[ NO ]
3 [UNTAGGED ]
4
[ NO ]
5
[ NO ]
6
[ NO ]
7
[ NO ]
8
[ NO ]

FDB ID: 2
Port
---9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

VLAN NAME: Test
Egress
---------[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]

SET ALL PORTS:

Port
---17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Egress
---------[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]

Port
---25
26
27

Egress
---------[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]

[UNTAGGED]

SAVE

EXIT

RETURN

40461_83

Now that Port 3 belongs to VLAN 2, we will designate one port as a trunk port for a connection to
another VLAN-aware switch. This trunk port will carry tagged frames from all VLANs, allowing
VLAN frames to maintain their VLAN ID across multiple switches.
NOTE: For the purposes of this walkthrough, port 10 will be configured as the trunk
port.

5. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Egress field for port 10 in the Static VLAN Egress
Configuration screen.
6. Use the SPACE bar to step to TAGGED.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER.
Port 10 will now serve as a trunk port connection. The screen should now look like Figure 13-8.

13-18

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Quick VLAN Walkthrough

Figure 13-8

Walkthrough Stage Three, Port 10 Egress Setting

VLAN ID: 2
Port
Egress
------------1
[ NO ]
2
[ NO ]
3 [UNTAGGED ]
4
[ NO ]
5
[ NO ]
6
[ NO ]
7
[ NO ]
8
[ NO ]

FDB ID: 2

VLAN NAME: Test

Port
Egress
------------9
[ NO ]
10
[ TAGGED ]
11
[ NO ]
12
[ NO ]
13
[ NO ]
14
[ NO ]
15
[ NO ]
16
[ NO ]

Port
---17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SET ALL PORTS:

Egress
---------[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]

Port
---25
26
27

Egress
---------[ NO ]
[ NO ]
[ NO ]

[UNTAGGED]
EXIT

SAVE

RETURN

40461_84

Configuring the Port Parameters
Now that the TEST VLAN and the trunk connection are set up, we can proceed to set the port
parameters for ports 3 and 10, as follows:
1. On the 802.1Q Configuration Menu screen, use the arrow keys to highlight the
VLAN PORT CONFIGURATION menu item and press ENTER. The VLAN Port
Configuration screen displays.
2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the PVID field for Port 3.
3. Type in 2, which is the VLAN ID of the Test VLAN. This will associate Port 3 with the
VLAN ID, thus making the port PVID of 2.
NOTE: Since Port 3 will connect to a single workstation, and is not to be used for
switch-to-switch communications, the acceptable frame types allowed through this port
will be all frame types (tagged and untagged). Since Port 3 will not receive VLAN frames
from the work station, it is not necessary to filter frames.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-19

Quick VLAN Walkthrough

4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Acceptable Frame Types field for Port 3.
5. Use the SPACE bar to step to ADMIT ALL FRAMES.
6. Leave the INGRESS FILTERING field for Port 3 in the default setting of DISABLED. This
prevents frames from being filtered out according to the Port VLAN List.
7. Leave the GVRP STATUS field for Port 3 in the default setting of ENABLED. This sets
Port 10 as a GVRP port to receive registrations of dynamically created VLANs.
8. Leave the PVID field for Port 10 set in the default setting of 1.
NOTE: Since Port 10 will be used for switch-to-switch communications, the PVID is left
set on the default VLAN value of 1. This associates Port 10 with all VLANs on the
switch. Since Port 10 will be used as a trunk port, only tagged frames will be allowed
through the port.

9. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Acceptable Frame Types field for Port 10.
10.Use the SPACE bar to step to ADMIT VLAN TAGGED ONLY. This causes Port 10 to drop
all frames received that are untagged.
11.Leave the INGRESS FILTERING field for Port 3 in the default setting of DISABLED.
12.Leave the GVRP STATUS field for Port 3 in the default setting of ENABLED. This sets
Port 10 as a GVRP port to pass tagged frames of dynamically created VLANs.
13.Use the arrow keys to highlight the SAVE command at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER.
The screen should now look like Figure 13-9.

13-20

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Examples

Figure 13-9

Walkthrough Stage Four, VLAN Port Configuration

Port
–––
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

PVID
–––
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

SAVE

Acceptable Frame Types
–––––––––––––––––––––––
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT VLAN TAGGED ONLY ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]
[ ADMIT ALL FRAMES ]

NEXT

Ingress Filtering
––––––––––––––
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]
[ DISABLED ]

EXIT

GVRP Status
––––––––––––––
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]
[ ENABLED ]

RETURN
4046_112

This effectively completes the configuration of a single VLAN, assigning it to a port, and
configuring the switch to forward the frames received on that port to a trunk port. The trunk port in
turn forward the frames as tagged to another switch.
You can now use the VLAN Classification Configuration and Port Protocol Configuration screens
to transmit frames according to classification rules and associated ports, as described in Chapter 8.

13.11 EXAMPLES
NOTE: Due to the complexity of Local Management, the following simple examples and
are not meant to cover the full potential of Local Management.

The following sections provide some examples of how VLAN-aware SmartSwitches can be
configured to group users at the port level to create VLANs in existing networks. Each example
presents a problem and shows how it is solved by configuring the switches using the VLAN Local
Management screens. The actual procedures and screens used to configure a VLAN-aware switch
are covered in Chapter 8. Also provided in the discussion of each example is a description of how
the frames transmitted from one user would traverse the network to its target device.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-21

Example 1, Single Switch Operation

13.12 EXAMPLE 1, SINGLE SWITCH OPERATION
This first example looks at the configuration of a single Ethernet switch for VLAN operation. In
this example, two groups of three users are to be assigned to two VLANs to isolate them from one
another. The blue users (B1, B2, B3) are to be kept completely separate from the red users (R1, R2,
R3). Figure 13-10 shows the initial state of the switch.
Figure 13-10

Example 1, Single Switch Operation

R1

802.1Q Switch

1

4

R2

2

5

B2

R3

3

6

B1

B3

22631_11

13.12.1 Solving the Problem
To set up this switch, users will be assigned to two new VLANs, red stations to the Red VLAN,
and blue stations to the Blue VLAN. The information below describes how the switch is
configured to create these two VLANs and how users are assigned to them.
1. The switch is set for 802.1Q operation.
2. VLAN ID 2 (Red VLAN) and VLAN ID 3 (Blue VLAN) are created using the Static VLAN
Configuration screen. The filter database FDB ID 2 and FDB ID 3 are automatically assigned to
the Red VLAN and Blue VLAN, respectively.
3. The Egress type for each port associated with a VLAN is set using the Static VLAN Egress
Configuration screen. In this example, the settings are as follows:

• For the Red VLAN
Ports 1, 2, and 3; Egress; UNTAGGED

• For the Blue VLAN
Ports 4, 5, and 6; Egress; UNTAGGED

13-22

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Example 1, Single Switch Operation

4. The ports 1 through 6 are configured as follows using the VLAN Port Configuration screen:

• Ports 1, 2, and 3 are set as follows:
PVID: 2
Acceptable Frame Types: ADMIT ALL FRAMES
Ingress Filtering: ENABLED
GVRP Status: DISABLED

• Ports 4, 5, and 6 are set as follows:
PVID: 3
Acceptable Frame Types: ADMIT ALL FRAMES
Ingress Filtering: ENABLED
GVRP Status: DISABLED
5. The VLANs and ports are now configured and enabled. Figure 13-11 shows the resulting VLAN
assignment to each port.
Figure 13-11

Switch Configured for VLANs

R1

802.1Q Switch

1
VLAN ID 002

R2

2

VLAN ID 003

5

VLAN ID 002

R2

4

3

B2

VLAN ID 003

6

VLAN ID 002

B3

B1

VLAN ID 003
30691_68

The switch will now classify each frame received as belonging to either the Red or Blue VLANs.
Traffic from one VLAN will not be forwarded to the members of the other VLAN, and all frames
transmitted by the switch will be normal, untagged Ethernet frames.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-23

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

13.12.2 Frame Handling
This section describes the operations of the switch when two frames are received. The first frame
is a broadcast sent by station R1.
1. Station R1 transmits the broadcast frame. The switch receives this frame on Port 1. As the frame
is received, the switch classifies it. The frame is untagged, so the switch classifies it as belonging
to the VLAN that Port 1 is assigned to, the Red VLAN.
2. At the same time, the switch adds the source MAC address of the frame and the VLAN
associated with port 1 to its Source Address Table in FDB ID 2. In this fashion it learns that
station R1 is located out Port 1.
3. Once the frame is classified, its destination MAC address is examined. The switch discovers that
the frame is a broadcast, and treats it as it would any other unknown destination MAC address.
The switch forwards the frame out all ports in the Red VLAN’s Forwarding List except for the
one that received the frame. In this case, the frame is sent to Ports 2 and 3.
The second frame is a unicast, where station R2 responds to station R1’s broadcast.
4. Station R2, having received and recognized the broadcast from R1, transmits a unicast frame as
a response. The switch receives this frame on Port 2. The switch classifies this new untagged
frame as belonging to the Red VLAN.
5. The switch adds the source MAC address and VLAN for station R2 to its Source Address Table
in FDB ID 2, and checks the Source Address Table for the destination MAC address given in
the frame. The switch finds the MAC address and VLAN in this table, and recognizes that the
MAC address and VLAN match for R1 is located out Port 1.
6. The switch examines its VLAN configuration information and determines that the frame for Red
VLAN is allowed to be forwarded out Port 1 and that it must be sent in an untagged format.
7. The switch forwards the frame out Port 1. Any other unicast transmissions between stations R1
and R2 will be handled identically.

13.13 EXAMPLE 2, VLANs ACROSS MULTIPLE SWITCHES
This second example investigates the steps that must be taken to set up VLANs across multiple
802.1Q VLAN switches. This includes the configuration and operation of trunk ports (port set for
TAGGED frames only) between 802.1Q VLAN switches.
As shown in Figure 13-12, two companies, “Redco” and “Blue Industries,” share floors 2 and 4 in
a building where the network infrastructure is supplied by the building owner. The objective is to
completely isolate the network traffic of the two companies by limiting the user’s traffic through
the ports of two switches, thus maintaining security and shielding the network traffic from each
company. This example will show the use and configuration of a trunk connection and the creation
of VLANs across multiple switches.
13-24

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

Figure 13-12

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

Redco

Blue Industries
User A

2

Bridge 1

Red VLAN

1

4

Bridge 2
3

Blue VLAN

4
Floor 4

Floor 3

Redco

Blue Industries
File Server

2

Bridge 3

Blue VLAN

1

2

Bridge 4

File Server

3

Red VLAN

Floor 2

Floor 1

User

802.1D Legacy Bridge

802.1Q VLAN Aware Switch

File Server
22632_13

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-25

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

13.13.1 Solving the Problem
To solve the problem in this example, the users are assigned to VLANs using Switch 4 and Switch
2 as shown in Figure 13-12. Redco users are assigned to the Red VLAN and Blue Industries users
to the Blue VLAN. The following information shows how Switch 4 and Switch 2 are configured to
create the two VLANs to isolate the users of the two companies from one another on the network
using the existing infrastructure.

Switch 4
Switch 4 is set as follows:
1. Two VLANs are added to the list of VLANs in the Static VLAN Configuration screen. An
FDB ID is automatically assigned to each VLAN. In this example, the following VLANs are
created:

• VLAN ID 2, FDB ID 2, with a VLAN Name of Red
• VLAN ID 3, FDB ID 3, with a VLAN Name of Blue
Because the VLANs are assigned to two separate FDB IDs, the users on VLAN ID 2 and
VLAN ID 3 cannot communicate with each other.
2. The Egress type for both VLAN ID 2, Port 1, and VLAN ID 3, Port 3, are set to UNTAGGED
using the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen. This means that these ports will transmit
only untagged VLAN frames.
3. Ports 1 and 3 are configured as follows using the VLAN Port Configuration screen:

• Port 1 is set as follows:
PVID: 2
Acceptable Frame Types: ADMIT ALL FRAMES
Ingress Filtering: ENABLED
GVRP Status: DISABLED

• Port 3 is set as follows:
PVID: 3
Acceptable Frame Types: ADMIT ALL FRAMES
Ingress Filtering: ENABLED
GVRP Status: DISABLED
This causes the switch to classify all untagged frames received as belonging to the VLAN
specified by each port PVID and to replace the previous PVID information in the port VLAN
List with the new PVID information. This makes Port 1 part of the Red VLAN, Port 3 part of
the Blue VLAN, and both are set to the VLAN frame format of untagged.

13-26

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

4. Port 4 is configured as a trunk port by setting the Egress type for both VLAN ID 2, Port 4 and
VLAN ID 3, Port 4 to TAGGED using the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen. This
means that these ports will only transmit tagged VLAN frames.

• Port 4, Egress: TAGGED
5. Port 4 is configured as follows using the VLAN Port Configuration screen:

• Port 4 is set as follows:
PVID: 1
Acceptable Frame Types: ADMIT TAGGED FRAMES ONLY
Ingress Filtering: ENABLED
GVRP Status: ENABLED
Port 4 is set as a trunk port and all frames forwarded out this port are forwarded as tagged frames.
By default the port remains as a member of the Default VLAN. With the original classification
information inserted in the frame Tag Header, the receiving switch will maintain the original
frame classification. GVRP is enabled on this port and will support dynamic VLANs created by
GVRP.

Switch 2
Switch 2 is set as follows:
1. Two VLANs are added to the list of VLANs in the Static VLAN Configuration screen. An
FDB ID is automatically assigned to each VLAN. In this example, the following VLANs are
created:

• VLAN ID 2, FDB ID 2, with a VLAN Name of Red
• VLAN ID 3, FDB ID 3, with a VLAN Name of Blue
2. The Egress type for both VLAN ID 3, Port 1, and VLAN ID 2, Port 3, are set to UNTAGGED
using the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen. This means that these ports will transmit
only untagged VLAN frames.
3. Ports 1 and 3 are configured as follows using the VLAN Port Configuration screen:

• Port 1 is set as follows:
PVID: 3
Acceptable Frame Types: ADMIT ALL FRAMES
Ingress Filtering: ENABLED
GVRP Status: DISABLED

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-27

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

• Port 3 is set as follows:
PVID: 2
Acceptable Frame Types: ADMIT ALL FRAMES
Ingress Filtering: ENABLED
GVRP Status: DISABLED
This causes the switch to classify all untagged frames received as belonging to the VLAN
specified by each port PVID and to replace the previous PVID information in the port VLAN
List with the new PVID information. This makes Port 1 part of the Blue VLAN, Port 3 part of
the Red VLAN, and both are set to the VLAN frame format of untagged.
4. Port 2 is configured as a trunk port by setting the Egress type for both VLAN ID 2, Port 2, and
VLAN ID 3, Port 2, to TAGGED using the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen. This
means that these ports will only transmit tagged VLAN frames.

• Egress: Port 2: TAGGED
5. Port 2 is configured as follows using the VLAN Port Configuration screen:

• Port 2 is set as follows:
PVID: 1
Acceptable Frame Types: ADMIT TAGGED FRAMES ONLY
Ingress Filtering: ENABLED
GVRP Status: ENABLED
Port 2 is set as a trunk port and all frames forwarded out this port are forwarded as tagged frames.
By default the port remains as a member of the Default VLAN. With the original classification
information inserted in the frame Tag Header, the receiving switch will maintain the original
frame classification. GVRP is enabled on this port and will support dynamic VLANs created by
GVRP. The operation of GVRP is described in Appendix A.

13-28

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

13.13.2 Frame Handling
The following describes how, when User A attempts to log on to the File Server on Bridge 4, the
frames from User A are classified on Switch 4 and traverse the network. In this example, the MAC
address of User A is “Y” and the MAC address for the File Server is “Z”. The following
description includes illustrations to help understand how the frames flow through the network.
1. User A sends a frame with a Broadcast Destination Address in an attempt to locate the File
Server. The frame is received on User A’s port of Bridge 1 and, because the frame is a broadcast
frame, it is transmitted out all ports of Bridge 1 as shown in Figure 13-13.
Figure 13-13

Bridge 1 Broadcasts Frames

Redco

Blue Industries
User A

2

Bridge 1
1

Red VLAN

4

3

Bridge 2

Blue VLAN

4
Floor 4

2263_14

2. Switch 4 receives the frame from Bridge 1 and immediately classifies it as belonging to the Red
VLAN. After the frame is classified, Switch 4 checks the Destination Address and, upon
discovering that it is a Broadcast Destination Address, forwards the frame out all ports in the
Red VLAN Forwarding List excluding Port 1, which received the frame. In this example, it is
only Port 4.
Switch 4 updates its Source Address Table in FDB ID 2 if it didn’t already have a dynamic entry
for MAC address “Y” in FDB ID 2. Because Switch 4 received the frame on Port 1, it does not
forward the frame out that port, but does forward the frame to Port 4.
The frame is transmitted to Switch 2 with a VLAN Tag Header inserted in the frame. The VLAN
Tag Header indicates that the frame is classified as belonging to the Red VLAN. Figure 13-14
shows the path taken to this point to reach Switch 2.
The VLAN Tag Header is inserted because Switch 4, Port 4 is set to transmit tagged frames.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-29

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

Figure 13-14

Transmitting to Switch 4

Redco

Blue Industries
2

User A

Bridge 1

1

4

Red VLAN

Bridge 2

3

Blue VLAN
4

Floor 4

Floor 3

Redco

Blue Industries
2

Bridge 3

Blue VLAN

1

Bridge 4

2

File Server

3

Red VLAN

Floor 2
22631_15

3. When Switch 2 receives the tagged frame on its Port 2, it checks the frame’s VLAN Tag Header
and determines that the frame is classified as belonging to the Red VLAN, and that the frame is
a broadcast frame. Switch 2 forwards the frame to all ports in the Red VLAN Forwarding List
excluding Port 2, which received the frame. In this example, the only eligible port is Port 3,
which connects to Bridge 4. Switch 2 checks its Forwarding List, which specifies that the VLAN
frame type for that port is untagged. Switch 2 then updates its Source Address Table in FDB ID
2 for MAC address “Y” if necessary. The untagged frame is then transmitted out Port 3 to
Bridge 4. Bridge 4 forwards the frame out all its ports because it is a broadcast frame, and the
server receives it as shown in Figure 13-15.

13-30

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Example 2, VLANs Across Multiple Switches

Figure 13-15

Transmitting to Bridge 4

Floor 3

Redco

Blue Industries
2

Bridge 3

Blue VLAN

1

2

3

Bridge 4

File Server

Red VLAN

Floor 2
2263_16

4. The File Server responds with a unicast frame to User A. All switches between the File Server
and User A have an entry in their respective Source Address Tables identifying which port to
use for forwarding the frame to User A, MAC address “Y” in FDB ID 2. All switches update
their Source Address Tables for the File Server’s MAC address “Z” as the frame is forwarded
through the switch fabric to User A. The 802.1D switches update their Source Address Tables
based on the source MAC address and receive port and the 802.1Q switches update their
databases based on the source MAC address, VLAN, and receive port.
5. The frame from the File Server is received on Switch 2, and forwarded to Switch 1 as a tagged
frame classified as belonging to the Red VLAN. Switch 1 removes the tag and forwards the
frame to Bridge 1, which in turn forwards the frame out of the port attached to User A. All
subsequent frames between User A and the File Server are forwarded through the switch fabric
in the same manner.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-31

Example 3, Filtering Traffic According to a Layer 4 Classification Rule

13.14 EXAMPLE 3, FILTERING TRAFFIC ACCORDING TO A LAYER 4
CLASSIFICATION RULE
This example illustrates how to filter out broadcast transmissions at Layer 4 from other parts of a
network.
In this example, illustrated in Figure 13-16, switches S1 and S2 have already been configured and
operating. However, it was discovered that the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broadcast
frames from routers R1 and R2 were flooding the subnetwork of Switches S1 and S2.
Figure 13-16

Example 5, Filtering Traffic According to a Classification

R1
Port 25

R2
Port 25

S1

S2

Users

Users

2599_27

13.14.1 Solving the Problem
To prevent the RIP broadcasts from flooding the users’ terminals connected to S1 and S2, a new
VLAN will be added to each switch, but not assigned to any ports (creating a Null VLAN). Then
each switch will be configured with a Layer 4 classification rule that will classify each RIP
broadcast frame received on Port 25 of each switch to the Null VLAN. Since the Null VLAN is not
associated with any ports, the frame will be dropped and not transmitted out any port.
In this example, the switches have already been configured and operating. The following covers
only those steps needed to configure each switch to eliminate the problem.

Switches 1 and 2
Each switch is set as follows:
1. A VLAN is added to the list of VLANs in the Module/VLAN Configuration screen and assigned
to an FDB ID. In this example, the switch is set as follows:

• VLAN ID 99, FDB ID 99, with a VLAN Name of Null VLAN
13-32

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Example 4, Securing Sensitive Information According to Subnet

2. The VLAN Classification Configuration screen is used to configure the switch to detect and
classify the incoming RIP broadcast frames on Port 25 to the Null VLAN. Since the Null VLAN
is not assigned to any port, the frame is dropped (not transmitted out any port). The VLAN
Classification Configuration screen is set as follows:

• VID: 99
• Classification: Dest UDP Port
• IP UDP Port: 520
Port 520 is a well known port number used by RIP.

13.15 EXAMPLE 4, SECURING SENSITIVE INFORMATION ACCORDING
TO SUBNET
The ABC Company wants to confine the sensitive information being transmitted by their Finance
Department to its users only.
In this example, illustrated in Figure 13-17, the users in the Finance Department are members of
the Finance VLAN and are also on subnet 28 as shown in bold type.
Figure 13-17

Example 6, Securing Traffic to One Subnet

Finance
Department
User Subnet
Class B Address:
123.123.28.1
123.123.28.2
123.123.28.3
123.123.28.4
123.123.28.5
Engineering
Department
User Subnet
Class B Address:
123.123.50.1
123.123.50.2
123.123.50.3
123.123.50.4
123.123.50.5

S1

Port 25

Finance
Server
123.123.28.25
Other Users
123.123.xx.xx
2599_26

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-33

Example 5, Using Dynamic Egress to Control Traffic

13.15.1 Solving the Problem
In this example, Switch 1 (S1) has already been configured and is operating.
To isolate the Finance Department traffic, Subnet 28 will be isolated from the Engineering
Department subnet 50 and other users on the company’s network (123.123.xx.xx).
The following covers only those steps needed to configure the switch to solve the problem.

Switch 1
To isolate the network traffic of the Finance Department to the users on the Finance VLAN (20),
which are on subnet 28, S1 will be configured as follows using the VLAN Classification
Configuration screen:

• VID: 20
• Classification: Bil IP Address
• IP Address: 123.123.28.0
• Data Mask: 255.255.255.0
As a result of this setting, any frame with a source or destination IP address of 123.123.28.xx
(where xx can be a value of 0-255) will be classified to the Finance VLAN (20) and will remain
within subnet 28. Any frame from another network or subnet will not be allowed access to subnet
28 because of the datamask 255.255.255.0.

13.16 EXAMPLE 5, USING DYNAMIC EGRESS TO CONTROL TRAFFIC
In this simple example (Figure 13-18), assume that there are four ports on the switch module (S1)
attached to PCs supporting both protocols AppleTalk (809B and 80F3) and IP. Two PCs support IP
only. The AppleTalk frame traffic is to be contained so only the users running the AppleTalk
protocol can communicate with each other and not flood the network with AppleTalk frames.
However, all users are to have access to a web server connected to port 7.

13-34

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Example 5, Using Dynamic Egress to Control Traffic

Figure 13-18

Example 7, Dynamic Egress Application

PCs
IP

IP
AppleTalk
IP

AppleTalk
IP
AppleTalk
IP

AppleTalk
IP
123456

S1
7

Web
Server
3069_106

Solving the Problem
In this example, Switch 1 (S1) has already been configured with a default VLAN 0001 associated
with FDB ID 0001 as the PVID on all ports.
The following additional steps are required to configure the switch to solve this problem.
1. Define a new VLAN (VLAN ID 2) using the Static VLAN Configuration screen.
2. Create a Layer 2 rule to associate the protocol AppleTalk 809B and 80F3 to VLAN ID 2 (VID 2)
using the VLAN Classification Configuration screen. This rule is assigned to all ports.
3. Enable the Dynamic Egress control on VLAN 2 using the Network Tools command
(dynamic_egress enable 2).
With the above configuration, an AppleTalk frame received on any port will be classified into
VLAN 2 (the AppleTalk VLAN), and the Port VLAN List of that port is updated to include
VLAN 2.
For instance, if port 1 or 2 is connected to a new AppleTalk user, the AppleTalk frames received on
that port are dynamically associated with VLAN 2 and VLAN 2 is added to the Port VLAN List of
that port. The Port VLAN List contains a list of all VLANs whose frames can be transmitted out
that port.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-35

Example 6, Locking a MAC Address to a Port Using Classification Rules

In this example, the AppleTalk traffic is routed only to AppleTalk users (ports 1, 2, 5, and 6), while
IP traffic is allowed to be seen by IP users (ports 3, 4, and 7) and by IP/AppleTalk users (ports 1, 2,
5, and 6).

13.17 EXAMPLE 6, LOCKING A MAC ADDRESS TO A PORT USING
CLASSIFICATION RULES
The following example illustrates how to add security by “locking” an individual MAC address to
a port on the switch module (S1). This would typically be done to ensure that only a particular
device can gain access to the network from a specific port. Traffic received by the switch from any
MAC address other than the one assigned to the “locked” port will be discarded.
In this example, illustrated in Figure 13-19, switch S1 will be configured to lock ports 1 and 2 to
the source address 00.00.00.00.00.0A and 00.00.00.00.00.0B of Workstation 1 and 2, respectively.
Figure 13-19

Locking Ports According to Classification Rule

Workstation 1

00.00.00.00.00.0A
Locked
Ports

Port 1
Port 2

Workstation 2

00.00.00.00.00.0B

Uplink to Network

S1
4046_25

13.17.1 Solving the Problem
In this example, switches S1 and S2 need to be configured with two 802.1Q VLANs. Since the
switch, by default, already has one VLAN created (the Default VLAN), only one new VLAN will
need to be created. In this example, the new VLAN will be named the Red VLAN.
The object of this is to configure S1 so that when it receives a frame on Port 1 from MAC address
00.00.00.00.00.0A, the frame is classified into the Red VLAN. When S1 receives a frame on Port
1 from a MAC address other than 00.00.00.00.00.0A, the frame is associated with the Default
VLAN. To accomplish this, S1 is configured so that the frames originating from the Red VLAN
are eligible to be forwarded out the desired ports. The frames associated with the Default VLAN
are not forwarded to any ports and are discarded by S1.
13-36

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

Example 6, Locking a MAC Address to a Port Using Classification Rules

The frames received on Port 2 will be handled in the same way except that S1 will only allow
frames with the MAC address 00.00.00.00.00.0B frames to be forwarded out the desired ports and
discard all other frames received on Port 2 that are not MAC address 00.00.00.00.00.0B frames.
This is accomplished using the screens as follows:

• The Static VLAN Configuration screen to create one VLAN, which will be named Red VLAN
in this example.

• The Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen to set Ports 1 and 2 to transmit only untagged
frames and add them to the VLAN Egress list of the switch.

• The Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen to remove all ports from the Default VLAN List.
• The VLAN Port Configuration screen to associate Ports 1 and 2 with Red VLAN and enable the
port to receive all frames.

• The VLAN Classification Configuration screen to create two src MAC address classification
rules and assign them to the appropriate new VLAN, and

• The Protocol Ports Configuration screen to assign the new classification rules to Ports 1 and 2
and add the new VLANs to their port VLAN forwarding list.

Switch 1
To secure Port 1, you would configure Switch 1 as follows:
1. Create the static Red VLAN and add it to the module VLAN list by entering the following
settings using the Static VLAN Configuration screen:

• VLAN ID: 2
• VLAN NAME: Red
2. Assign Port 1 and 2 to the Red VLAN and set the ports to handle untagged frames as follows:

• The Red VLAN is selected from the Static VLAN Configuration screen to display the Static
VLAN Egress Configuration screen.

• The following are set using the Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen:
– Port 1, Egress: UNTAGGED
– Port 2, Egress: UNTAGGED
No other ports are assigned to the Red VLAN and the exiting ports are left in the default
setting of NO.

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

13-37

Example 6, Locking a MAC Address to a Port Using Classification Rules

3. Remove all ports from the Default VLAN Egress List as follows:

• The Default VLAN is selected from the Static VLAN Configuration screen to display the
Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen. The following is set using the Static VLAN
Egress Configuration screen:
SET ALL PORTS: NO
This configuration setting will cause the untagged frames sent to the Default VLAN from Ports
1 and 2 to be dropped because Ports 1 and 2 have been deleted from the Egress list of the Default
VLAN.
4. Create two source (src) MAC address classification rules and apply them to the Red VLAN
(VID 2), the following settings are entered using the VLAN Classification Configuration screen:
For the Red VLAN and Port 1:

• VID: 2
• Classification: src MAC Address
• Subclassification/MAC Address: 00.00.00.00.00.0A
• ADD the rule. It will display in the top half of the VLAN Classification Configuration screen.
5. Enter the following settings on the Protocol Port Configuration screen to assign two src MAC
address classification rules to Port 1 and add the classification to the Port VLAN List of Port 1:

• Port 1: YES to assign the classification rule to Port 1
• SET PORTS TO VLAN FORWARDING: YES to add the VLAN and classification rule to
the Port VLAN List of Port 1
For the Red VLAN and Port 2 set the following:

• VID: 2
• Classification: src MAC Address
• Subclassification/MAC Address: 00.00.00.00.00.0B
• ADD the rule. It will display in the top half of the VLAN Classification Configuration screen.
6. Enter the following settings on the Protocol Port Configuration screen to assign the new
classification rule to Port 2 and add the classification to the Port VLAN List of Port 2:

• Port 2: YES to assign the classification rule to Port 2
• SET PORTS TO VLAN FORWARDING: YES to add the VLAN and classification rule to
the Port VLAN List of Port 2.

13-38

VLAN Operation and Network Applications

A
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
(GARP)
This appendix describes the switch operation when its ports are operating under the Generic
Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) application – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol
(GVRP).
NOTE: There is a global setting for GVRP that is enabled by default. Access to these
settings is only available through a MIB.

A.1

OPERATION

The process of the forwarding decision and tagging frames is the same as for 802.1Q as described
in Chapter 13. However, the GVRP protocol frames will not have a tag even when transmitted out
a 1Q Trunk Port.
The purpose of GVRP is to dynamically create VLANs across a switched network. When a VLAN
is declared, the information is transmitted out GVRP configured ports on the switch in a GARP
formatted frame using the GVRP multicast MAC address. A switch that receives this frame,
examines the frame, and extracts the VLAN IDs. GVRP then creates the VLANs and adds the
receiving port to its tagged member list for the extracted VLAN IDs). The information is then
transmitted out the other GVRP configured ports of the switch. Figure A-1 shows an example of
how VLAN blue from end station A would be propagated across a switch network.

Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)

A-1

How It Works

A.2

HOW IT WORKS

In Figure A-1, Switch 4, port 1 is registered as being a member of VLAN Blue and then declares
this fact out all its ports (2 and 3) to Switch 1 and Switch 2. These two switches register this in the
Port VLAN Lists of the ports (Switch 1, port 1 and Switch 2, port 1) that received the frames with
the information. Switch 2, which is connected to Switch 3 and Switch 5 declares the same
information to those two switches and the Port VLAN List of each port is updated with the new
information, accordingly.
Figure A-1

Example of VLAN Propagation via GVRP

D
Switch 1

1

3

Switch 2
R

R

1

1

2

D
2

3

D

R
Switch 3

D

Switch 4

1

R
Switch 5

R
1

End
Station A

R
D

= Port registered as a member of VLAN Blue
= Port declaring VLAN Blue
2599_19

Configuring a VLAN on an 802.1Q switch creates a static GVRP entry. The entry will always
remain registered and will not time out. However, dynamic entries will time-out and their
registrations are removed from the member list if the end station A is removed. This ensures that if
switches are disconnected, or if end stations are removed, the registered information remains
accurate.
The end result is that the Port VLAN List of a port is updated with information about VLANs that
reside off that port, even if the actual station on the VLAN is several hops away.

A-2

Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)

B
About IGMP
This appendix provides information about the following:

• IGMP Overview (Section B.1)
• Supported Features and Functions (Section B.2)
• Detecting Multicast Routers (Section B.3)
B.1

IGMP OVERVIEW

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is a multicast protocol used by routers. This
protocol is supported by Enterasys Networks SmartSwitches when operating in the 802.1Q mode
to “snoop” the IGMP frames. The multicast information is gleaned from the IGMP frame and a
filter is created to send the stream of data only to those end stations that will receive it.
IGMP queries are sent periodically from routers. An end station that will receive a multicast
stream will send a “query response” back to the router. If the router does not receive any response
from the end station, it stops forwarding the multicast streams to that station.
IGMP messages use an IP protocol number of 2. Routers send queries to the all-hosts group of
224.0.0.1. End stations send query responses to the multicast address of the stream they are
requesting to receive.
Routers need to be discovered and all multicast packets need to be sent to all routers.

About IGMP

B-1

Supported Features and Functions

B.2

SUPPORTED FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS

The following lists the features and functions supported when using IGMP:

• Runs only when the switch is operating in the 802.1Q mode.
• Supports multiple multicast and non-multicast routers on the same VLAN.
• Supports standalone multicast servers only if a router is present on the network.
• Multicast forwarding rate is dependent on the number of ports to which the multicast stream is
forwarded. More ports degrade the performance.

• Supports IGMP version 1 and 2 only. Default is version 2.
• Ports that are directly connected to routers are discovered dynamically through snooping for
routing protocols.

• IGMP is enabled or disabled per VLAN, and not per port.
NOTE: Certain versions of firmware will not allow the switch to be a querier. Refer to
the release notes shipped with your product and to standard (not shipped with product)
RFC 2236, Section 8, for more information.

• IGMP will run with GMRP, however, the IGMP does have higher priority than GMRP.
• The switch will “snoop” on all incoming multicast addresses to detect query responses, as well
as queries. Query responses are sent to the multicast address detected in the stream from the host
requesting to receive queries. The frame is an IP frame of protocol type 2. If the frame is a
response frame, IGMP will take the multicast address and VLAN ID, and program a filter on the
receive port. The response is then forwarded out upstream ports so that the router will receive it.
Ports that receive queries are marked as upstream ports. It is assumed a router exists somewhere
off this port, and responses are sent here. If the switch detects a router protocol on a port, that
port is also marked as a router port. This keeps the switch from blocking traffic to other routers.

B-2

About IGMP

Detecting Multicast Routers

B.3

DETECTING MULTICAST ROUTERS

The location of a router needs to be known in order to forward IGMP report frames back to the
router. The router(s) sends multicast routing protocol frames that get flooded throughout the
network. By snooping on these protocol, the switch will mark ports as connected to a router. The
port is put in a “forward all” mode where all multicast frames will be flooded. This allows all types
of IP multicast traffic (including IGMP streams) to go to the router.
There are many multicast routing protocols that the switch supports. These include the following:

• PIM version 1 and 2
• CBT (core based trees)
• MOSPF
• DVMRP
The routing protocols are detected as follows:

• All the multicast routing protocols have a destination address of 01-00-5E.
• DVMRP and PIM version 1 run over IGMP. If the IGMP frame type is not a REPORT, QUERY,
or LEAVE, then the frame is assumed to be one of these.

• PIM version 2 is IP protocol type 0x67.
• OSPF is IP protocol type 0x59. To detect that the frame is a multicast OSPF (MOSPF), the OSPF
data must be looked at. The data starts after the IP header. Byte 31 (options) needs to be checked.
If bit 2 is set (0x02 the MC bit), the frame is an MOSPF frame.

• CBT is IP protocol type 0x07.
• IGMP frames are detected by checking the IP protocol type. If the type is -x02, it is IGMP. The
first byte following the IP header is the IGMP frame type and version. (Note that the lower 4 bits
of the first byte in the IP header is the length of the IP header in 32-bit words) The version is
always 1, so the entire byte (version +type) may be used to check the IGMP type as follows:
0x11 = query
0x12 = report version 1
0x16 = report version 2
0x17 = leave

About IGMP

B-3

Index

Numerics
1D Connection 13-6
1D Trunk 8-20
1Q Connection 13-6
1Q Trunk 8-20
802.1 Configuration Menu screen 7-2
802.1p Configuration Menu screen 9-2
802.1Q switching mode
hierarchy of 3-3
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen 8-3
802.3ad Aggregator Details screen 6-42
screen fields
Admin Key 6-43
Aggregator Instance 6-43
Collector Max Delay 6-43
Oper Key (Actor) 6-43
Oper Key (Partner) 6-43
System Identifier (Actor) 6-43
System Identifier (Partner) 6-43
System Priority (Actor) 6-43
System Priority (Partner) 6-43
802.3ad Aggregator screen 6-40
screen fields
AggInst 6-41
NumPorts 6-41
OperKey 6-41
SysPri 6-41
802.3ad Main Menu screen 6-24
802.3ad Port Details screen 6-31
screen fields
ActorAdminKey 6-33
ActorAdminState (hex) 6-33
ActorOperKey 6-33
ActorOperState 6-34
ActorPort 6-32
ActorPortPriority 6-33
ActorSystemID 6-32

ActorSystemPriority 6-32
AttachedAggID 6-36
LAGID 6-36
PartnerAdminKey 6-35
PartnerAdminPort 6-33
PartnerAdminPortPriority 6-33
PartnerAdminState (hex) 6-35
PartnerAdminSysID 6-33
PartnerAdminSysPriority 6-33
PartnerOperKey 6-35
PartnerOperPort 6-33
PartnerOperPortPriority 6-33
PartnerOperState 6-35
PartnerOperSysID 6-33
PartnerOperSysPriority 6-33
Port Instance 6-32
SelectedAggID 6-36
STATS 6-36
802.3ad Port screen 6-29
screen fields
Aggregator 6-30
MUX 6-30
OperKey 6-30
Port 6-30
802.3ad Port Statistics screen 6-37
screen fields
ActorChangeCount 6-39
ActorChurnCount 6-39
ActorChurnState 6-39
AsyncTransCount 6-39
IllegalRx 6-38
LACPDUsRx 6-38
LACPDUsTx 6-38
LastRxTime(delta) 6-39
MarkerPDUsRx 6-38
MarkerPDUsTx 6-38
MarkerResponsePDUsRx 6-38
MarkerResponsePDUsTx 6-38
Index-1

MuxReason 6-39
MuxState 6-39
PartnerChangeCount 6-39
PartnerChurnCount 6-39
PartnerChurnState 6-39
Port Instance 6-38
PsyncTransCount 6-39
RxState 6-38
UnknownRx 6-38
802.3ad System screen 6-44
screen fields
Number of Aggregators 6-45
Number of Ports 6-45
System Identifier 6-45

A
Acceptable Frame Type
setting of 8-21
Access Control List screen 5-25
screen fields
Access Control Lists 5-27
IP Addresses 5-27
MASK 5-27
Access policy 4-13, 5-22
Advertised ability
setting of 6-12
Assigning Ports to a VID/Classification
all at a time 8-12, 8-37
one or more at a time 8-12, 8-37
Assigning VID/Classification to Port VLAN
Lists 8-38
Authentication Server 3-20
Authenticator 3-19

B
Broadcast Suppression Configuration screen 6-46
screen fields
Peak Rate 6-47
PORT # 6-47
Reset Peak 6-47
Threshold 6-47
Time Since Peak 6-47
Total RX 6-47
Index-2

Built-in Commands
use of 12-2

C
Chassis Configuration screen 4-4
screen fields
Chassis Date 4-5
Chassis Time 4-5
Chassis Uptime 4-6
IP Address 4-5
MAC Address 4-5
Screen Lockout Time 4-6
Screen Refresh Time 4-5
Subnet Mask 4-5
setting a new screen refresh time 4-8
setting the chassis date 4-7
setting the chassis time 4-8
setting the screen lockout time 4-9
setting the subnet mask 4-7
Chassis date 4-5
Chassis Environmental Information screen 4-16
screen fields
Chassis Fan Status 4-17
Chassis Power Redundancy 4-17
Power Supply #X Status 4-17
Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration
screen 11-14
screen fields
Chassis Fan Status 11-15
Chassis Power #1 Status 11-15
Chassis Power #2 Status 11-15
Chassis Power Redundancy 11-15
Chassis Menu screen 4-2
Chassis time 4-5
Chassis Uptime 4-6
Classification List 8-24, 9-19
Classification Precedence Rules 8-29
Classification Rule
filtering traffic according to 13-32
CLEAR COUNTERS command
how to use 3-5
COM port 5-14
Command field 1-7
Command set 12-2

Configuration
VLAN Spanning Tree 7-9
VLAN Spanning Tree ports 7-12
Configuration Process 13-8
Confining Network Traffic According to Priority
and VLAN 9-35
Controlling Traffic
example of 12-37
Current VLAN Configuration screen 8-14
screen fields
FDB ID 8-15
Ports on Egress 8-15
VLAN ID 8-15
VLAN Type 8-15
Current VLAN Egress Configuration screen
screen fields
Egress 8-17
Port 8-17
Cursor movement 1-3

D
Default gateway 5-5
Default VLAN 13-6
Display field 1-7
Distributed Chassis Management 1-6
Document conventions xxii
Dynamic Egress
example of use 12-37

E
EAP 3-19
EAP Authenticator Statistics screen 3-48
screen fields
CLEAR COUNTERS 3-50
Frame Source 3-50
Frame Version 3-50
Invalid Frames Rx 3-50
Length Error Frames Rx 3-50
Logoff Frames Rx 3-49
Port Number 3-50
Request Frames Tx 3-50
Request Id Frames Tx 3-50
Response Frames Rx 3-50

Response Id Frames Rx 3-50
Start Frames Rx 3-49
Total Frames Rx 3-49
Total Frames Tx 3-49
EAP Configuration screen
See EAP Port Configuration screen
EAP Diagnostic Statistics screen 3-51
screen fields
Access Challenges 3-53
Auth Failures 3-53
Auth Successes 3-53
CLEAR COUNTERS 3-54
Enters Authenticating 3-52
Enters Connecting 3-52
Fail Authenticating 3-52
Logoffs Authenticated 3-53
Logoffs Authenticating 3-52
Logoffs Connecting 3-52
Non-NAK resp From Supp 3-53
Other Requests To Supp 3-53
Port Number 3-53
Reauths Authenticated 3-53
Reauths Authenticating 3-52
Responses 3-53
Starts Authenticated 3-53
Starts Authenticating 3-52
Success Authenticating 3-52
Timeouts Authenticating 3-52
EAP Port Configuration screen 3-39
screen fields
Authentication State 3-40
Backend State 3-41
Force Reauth 3-43
Initialized Port 3-43
Maximum Requirements 3-43
Port 3-40
Port Control 3-42
EAP Session Statistics screen 3-46
screen fields
CLEAR COUNTERS 3-48
Port Number 3-48
Session Authenticate Method 3-47
Session Terminate Cause 3-47
Session Time 3-47
Session User Name 3-48
Index-3

SessionFramesRx 3-47
SessionFramesTx 3-47
SessionID 3-47
SessionOctetsRx 3-47
SessionOctetsTx 3-47
EAP Statistics Menu screen 3-44
Egress Types on Ports
setting of 8-12
Ethernet Interface Configuration screen 6-4
screen fields
Config 6-6
Duplex 6-6
FDX FC 6-6
HDX FC 6-7
Intf 6-5
Link 6-6
Port 6-5
Port Type 6-5
Speed 6-6
Ethernet Port Configuration screen 6-8
screen fields
Advertised Ability 6-10
Auto-Negotiation State 6-9
Default Duplex 6-9
Default Speed 6-9
Full Duplex Flow Control 6-11
Half Duplex Flow Control 6-11
Interface 6-9
Physical Port 6-9
SAVE TO ALL PORTS 6-11
Event message field 1-6
Examples 13-21

F
FID. See Filtering Database ID
Fields
command 1-7
display 1-7
event message 1-6
input 1-7
selection 1-7
types 1-6
Filtering Database 13-6
Index-4

Filtering Database ID 13-5
Filtering Network Traffic According to a Layer 4
Classification Rule 13-32
FLASH Download Configuration screen 5-32
Flash Download Configuration screen
screen fields
Download File Name 5-35
Download Method 5-34
Download Server IP 5-35
Last Image File Name 5-35
Last Image Server IP 5-35
Reboot After Download 5-35
TFTP gateway IP addr 5-35
Transfer Status 5-35
Forwarding list 13-6
customizing 13-8
Fragmentation 5-7
Frames
tagged 13-5, 13-10
untagged 13-5, 13-10

G
General Configuration screen 5-4
COM port 5-14
default gateway 5-10
IP address 5-8
module time 5-12, 5-13
screen fields
Agg Mode 5-8
Application 5-7
Clear NVRAM 5-7
Com 5-7
Default Gateway 5-5
IP Address 5-5
IP Fragmentation 5-7
MAC Address 5-5
Management Mode 5-6
Module Date 5-5
Module Name 5-5
Module Time 5-5
Module Uptime 5-6
Operational Mode 5-6
Screen Refresh Time 5-6

Subnet Mask 5-5
Telnet 5-7
TFTP Gateway IP Addr 5-5
WebView 5-7
screen lockout time 5-6, 5-14
screen refresh time 5-13
subnet mask 5-9
Getting help 1-9
GVRP
enabling or disabling on port 8-21
purpose of A-1

H
Heading Field 1-6
Hierarchy
802.1Q switching mode 3-3
Host Access Control Authentication (HACA)
how to use 3-16
Host data port 13-12, 13-14
HSIM/VHSIM Configuration screen 6-13
Hybrid 8-20

I
IGMP
detecting multicast routers when using B-3
features and functions supported B-2
overview of B-1
IGMP/VLAN Configuration screen 10-3
screen fields
IGMP State 10-7
IGMP Version 10-5
Interface Robustness 10-5
Last Member Query Interval 10-6
Querier Address 10-6
Querier Expire Time 10-6
Querier Uptime 10-6
Query Interval 10-5
Query Response Time 10-5

Switch Query IP 10-6
VLAN ID 10-7
Ingress Filtering
enabling or disabling of port 8-21
Input field 1-7
Interface Statistics screen 11-6
InOctets 11-7
interface 11-7
name 11-7
screen fields
Address 11-9
Admin Status 11-9
CLEAR COUNTERS 11-9
InDiscards 11-8
InErrors 11-8
InNonUnicast 11-8
Interface 11-9
InUnicast 11-8
InUnknownProtos 11-8
Last Change 11-9
MTU 11-9
Oper Status 11-9
OutDiscards 11-8
OutErrors 11-8
OutNonUnicast 11-8
OutOctets 11-8
OutQLen 11-8
OutUnicast 11-8
Speed 11-9
IP address 4-5, 5-5, 5-8
IP Fragmentation 5-7
enabling/disabling of 5-17
IP TOS Rewrite Feature
about the 9-29

K
Keyboard conventions 1-8

Index-5

L
Layer 3 Expansion Menu screen 10-2
Lists
Forwarding 13-6
Port VLAN 13-6
Local Management
clearing counters 3-5
exiting from 3-4
navigating the screens 3-1
paging to next or previous screen 3-5
requirements 1-4
screen elements 1-4
See also managing the switch
Local Management screens
selection of 3-4

M
MAC Port Configuration screen 3-54
screen fields
Authentication State 3-55
Force Reauth 3-56
Initialize Port 3-56
Port # 3-55
Port Enable 3-55
SET ALL PORTS 3-56
MAC Supplicant Configuration screen 3-56
screen fields
Duration 3-57
Initialize Supplicant 3-58
MAC Address 3-57
Port 3-57
Reauthenticate Supplicant 3-58
Main Menu screen 3-8
Management agent 1-3
Management Terminal
COM port connection of 2-1, 2-2
setup of 2-1, 2-3
Managing the switch 13-11
when configured with VLANs 13-12
when not configured with VLANs 13-11
Module Configuration Menu screen 5-2

Index-6

Module date 5-5
Module Login Password
setting of 3-31
Module Login Password screen 3-29
screen fields
Access Policy 3-30
Password 3-30
Restrict NVRAM Passwords from upload/
download 3-30
Switch 8 3-30
Module Menu screen 3-12
Module Selection screen 3-9
screen fields
Hardware Revision 3-11
Module # 3-11
Module Type 3-11
Serial # 3-11
Module Statistics Menu screen 11-2
Module time 5-5
Moving the cursor 1-3

N
Name Services Configuration screen 3-35
screen fields
Name Services 3-36
Secure Harbour IP 3-36
Switch Name 3-36
Web Authentication 3-36
Navigating screens 3-1
Network management
in-band 1-3
out-of-band 1-3
Network Tools
built-in commands 12-2
alias 12-4
arp 12-6
arp_learn 12-7
atm_stp_state 12-3
bridge 12-7
cdp 12-8
defroute 12-8
dynamic_egress 12-9

ev 12-10
gigabit_port_mode 12-12
lg_frame_admin 12-13
link_trap 12-14
loopback_detect 12-14
netstat 12-18
non_bridge_if_num 12-18
passiveStp 12-19
ping 12-19
radius 12-20
rate_limit_mode 12-24
reset 12-24
sat_size 12-25
show 12-26, 12-31
show mac 12-27
soft_reset 12-28
stpEdgePort 12-28
stpForceVersion 12-29
stpPointToPointMAC 12-30
stpPort 12-32
stpRealTimeMsgAge 12-33
stpStandby 12-33
suppress_topology_traps 12-25
telnet 12-34
timed_reset 12-34
timed_soft_reset 12-35
traceroute 12-35
vrrpPort 12-36
description of 12-1
functional CLI commands
dynamic_egress 12-9
vrrpPort 12-36
special commands 12-3, 12-38
done, quit, or exit 12-38
Network Tools screen 12-1
Network Traffic
confining/restricting the 9-35
filtering 13-32
NEXT command
how to use 3-5
NVRAM
clearing of 5-16

P
PAE 3-19
Password screen (chassis) 3-6
Passwords screen (module login) 3-29
Port Configuration Menu screen 6-2
Port mode
1D Trunk 8-20
1Q Trunk 8-20
changing 8-20
Hybrid 8-20
Port Priority Configuration screen 9-4
screen fields
Policy Override 9-6
Port 9-6
Priority 9-6
SET 9-6
Port Redirect Configuration screen
screen fields
Destination Port 6-18
Destination Port [n] 6-18
Frame Format (Read-Only) 6-18
Frame Format (selectable) 6-18
Redirect Errors 6-18
Redirect Errors (toggle) 6-19
Source Port (Read-Only) 6-18
Source Port [n] 6-18
Status 6-19
Port Redirect Configuration screen (chassis) 4-19
screen fields
Dest Module [n] (Selectable) 4-21
Dest Port [n] (selectable) 4-21
Destination Module 4-20
Destination Port 4-20
Frame Format (Read-Only) 4-21
Frame Format (Selectable) 4-21
Redirect Errors (Read-Only) 4-21
Redirect Errors (Toggle) 4-22
Source Module 4-20
Source Port 4-20
Src Module [n] (Selectable) 4-21
Src Port [n] (Selectable) 4-21
Status 4-22

Index-7

Port Redirect Configuration screen (module) 6-16
Port Security
setup example 13-36
Port VLAN list 13-6
Ports
setting Egress types on 8-12
PREVIOUS command
how to use 3-5
Primary and Secondary Servers
function of 3-16
Priority and VLAN
isolating network according to 9-35
Priority Classification Configuration screen 9-16
screen fields
ADD 9-18
CLASSIFICATION 9-18
Classification (top of screen) 9-17
DEL 9-18
Description 9-17
PID 9-18
PID (top of screen) 9-17
Protocol Port Configuration (VLAN) screen
screen fields
Classification Rule Field 8-36
Classify 8-37
Port 8-37
SET ALL PORTS 8-37
SET PORTS TO VLAN
FORWARDING 8-37
Protocol Port Configuration screen 9-32
screen fields
Classification Rule 9-33
Classify 9-34
Port 9-34
SET ALL PORTS 9-34
Protocol Port Configuration screen (VLAN) 8-35
PVID
assigning to port 8-21
PVST Port Configuration screen 7-12
screen fields
Corresponding ifindex 7-13
Port # 7-13
Port Designated Bridge 7-13
Port Designated Cost 7-14
Index-8

Port Designated Port 7-14
Port Designated Root 7-13
Port Enable 7-14
Port Forward Transmissions 7-14
Port Path Cost 7-14
Port Priority 7-14
Port State 7-14
STP Vlan ID 7-14
PWA 3-19

Q
Queueing Mode
setting of 9-15

R
RADIUS 3-19
Radius Client
assigned reasonable default values when radius
is installed 3-17
multiple access levels per user name for 3-17
Radius Client and HACA
use of 3-16
RADIUS Configuration screen
screen fields
IP Address 3-33
Last-Resort Action/Local 3-33
Last-Resort Action/remote 3-33
Radius Client 3-33
Retries 3-32
Secret 3-33
Time-out 3-32
Radius Configuration screen 3-31
screen fields
Auth Port 3-33
Radius Server
multiple access for 3-16
type access levels for 3-16
Rate Limiting
changing/deleting port configuration for 9-43
configuration ports for 9-41
example of 9-44
more about 9-44

Rate Limiting Configuration screen 9-37
screen fields
ADD 9-41
DEL 9-41
Direction 9-40
Direction (top of screen) 9-39
Dropped Events 9-39
Feature 9-39
Max Rate: Kbps 9-41
Max Traffic Rate 9-39
Port 9-38
Port Number 9-39
Port Type 9-39
Priority List 9-40
Priority List (top of screen) 9-38
Redirect Configuration Menu screen 6-14
Related manuals xxii
Remote Management
See also managing the switch
Reset Peak Switch Utilization
setting of 5-31
RMON Statistics screen 11-10
65 – 127 11-12
fragments 11-12
screen fields
1024 – 1518 Octets 11-13
128 – 255 Octets 11-12
256 – 511 Octets 11-12
512 – 1023 Octets 11-13
64 Octets 11-12
65 – 127 Octets 11-12
Broadcast Pkts 11-11
CLEAR COUNTERS 11-13
Collisions 11-11
CRC Align Errors 11-11
Data Source 11-11
Drop Events 11-11
Fragments 11-12
Index 11-13
Jabbers 11-12
Multicast Pkts 11-11
Oversized Pkts 11-12
Owner 11-11
RMON Index 11-11

Status 11-11
Total Octets 11-12
Undersized Packets 11-12
total packets 11-12
Rules
Classification Precedence 8-29

S
Screen fields
command fields 1-7
display fields 1-7
event message field 1-6
heading field 1-6
input fields 1-7
module type and slot number fields 1-6
selection fields 1-7
screen fields
FLASH Download Configuration screen 5-32
Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen 7-10
Screen lockout time 5-14
Screen refresh time 5-13
Screens
6C105 Chassis
Chassis Configuration screen 4-4
Chassis Environmental Information
screen 4-16
Chassis Menu screen 4-2
Main Menu screen 3-8
Port Redirect Configuration screen 4-19
Redirect Configuration Menu screen 4-18
SNMP Community Names Configuration
screen 4-12
SNMP Configuration Menu screen 4-10
SNMP Traps Configuration screen 4-14
VLAN Redirect Configuration screen 4-23
802.1 Configuration Menu screen 7-2
802.1p Configuration Menu screen 9-2
802.1Q VLAN Configuration Menu screen 8-3
802.3ad Aggregator Details screen 6-42
802.3ad Aggregator screen 6-40
802.3ad Main Menu screen 6-24
802.3ad Port Details screen 6-31
802.3ad Port screen 6-29
Index-9

802.3ad Port Statistics screen 6-37
802.3ad System screen 6-44
Access Control List screen 5-25
Broadcast Suppression Configuration
screen 6-46
Chassis Environmental Statistics Configuration
screen 11-14
clearing counters 3-5
Current VLAN Configuration screen 8-14
Current VLAN Egress Configuration
screen 8-16
Ethernet Interface Configuration screen 6-4
Ethernet Port Configuration screen 6-8
exiting from 3-4
General Configuration screen 5-4
hierarchy of 3-1
HSIM/VHSIM Configuration screen 6-13
IGMP/VLAN Configuration screen 10-3
Interface Statistics screen 11-6
Layer 3 Extensions Menu screen 10-2
Link Aggregation Menu screen
See 802.3ad Main Menu screen
Module Configuration Menu screen 5-2
Module Menu screen 3-12
Module Selection screen 3-9
Module Statistics Menu screen 11-2
navigation of 3-1
Network Tools screen 12-1
paging to next or previous 3-5
Password screen (chassis) 3-6
Port Configuration Menu screen 6-2
Port Priority Configuration screen 9-4
Port Redirect Configuration screen 6-16
Priority Classification Configuration
screen 9-16
Protocol Port Configuration screen 9-32
Protocol Port Configuration screen
(VLAN) 8-35
PVST Port Configuration screen 7-12
Rate Limiting Configuration screen 9-37
Redirect Configuration Menu screen 6-14
RMON Statistics screen 11-10
Security Menu screen 3-26
EAP Authenticator Statistics screen 3-48
Index-10

EAP Configuration screen
See EAP Port Configuration screen
EAP Diagnostic Statistics screen 3-51
EAP Port Configuration screen 3-39
EAP Session Statistics screen 3-46
EAP Statistics Menu screen 3-44
MAC Port Configuration screen 3-54
MAC Supplicant Configuration screen 3-56
Name Services Configuration screen 3-35
Passwords screen (module login) 3-29
Radius Configuration screen 3-31
System Authentication Configuration
screen 3-37
selection of 3-4
Setting community names 4-13
SNMP Community Names Configuration
screen 5-20
SNMP Configuration Menu screen 5-18
SNMP Traps Configuration screen 5-23
Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen 7-4
Static VLAN Configuration screen 8-6
Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen 8-10
Switch Statistics screen 11-4
System Resources Information screen 5-30
Traffic Class Configuration screen 9-10
Traffic Class Information screen 9-7
Transmit Queues Configuration screen 9-12
VLAN Classification Configuration screen 8-21
VLAN Port Configuration screen 8-17
VLAN Redirect Configuration screen 6-20
Security Menu screen 3-26
Security Methods
overview of 3-15
Security, Ports
setup example 13-36
Selection field 1-7
Set Ports to VLAN Forwarding 8-38
Setting community names 4-13
Setup of
management terminal 2-3
SNMP Community Names
setting of 5-20
SNMP Community Names Configuration screen
screen fields

Access Policy 4-13
Community Name 4-13
SNMP Community Names screen
screen fields
Access Policy 5-22
community name 5-21
SNMP Configuration Menu screen 5-18
SNMP Traps Configuration screen 5-23
screen fields
Enable Traps 4-15, 5-24
Trap Community Name 4-15, 5-24
Trap Destination 4-15, 5-24
trap table configuration 4-16, 5-24
Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen 7-4
Spanning Tree Configuration screen
screen fields
ADD ALL CONFIGURED VLAN 7-8
Age Time 7-8
Current STP Mode 7-8
Operation 7-8
VLAN 7-7
VLAN (Modifiable) 7-8
Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen 7-10
PORT # 7-11
screen fields
Age Time 7-11
MAC Address 7-11
Number of Ports 7-11
State 7-11
Status 7-11
STP Instance 7-11
Switch Address 7-11
Special commands
use of 12-3
Special Commands, Network Tools 12-38
Static VLAN Configuration screen 8-6
screen fields
ADD 8-7
DEL MARKED 8-7
FDB ID 8-7
VLAN ID 8-7
VLAN ID (bottom of screen) 8-7
VLAN Name 8-7

VLAN Name (bottom of screen) 8-7
Static VLAN Egress Configuration screen 8-10
screen fields
Egress 8-12
FDB ID 8-11
Port 8-11
SET ALL PORTS 8-12
VLAN ID 8-11
VLAN Name 8-11
Station 13-7
Strict 802.1p Queueing Mode
setting of 9-15
Subnet mask 4-5, 5-5, 5-9
Supplicant 3-20
Switch 13-8
Switch 8 Function
Enable/Disable 3-30
Switch Statistics screen 11-4
clearing counters 11-6
screen fields
Clearing Counters 11-6
Frames Fltrd 11-6
Frames Frwded 11-6
Frames Rcvd 11-5
Frames Txmtd 11-5
Port # 11-5
System Authentication Configuration screen 3-37
screen fields
Authentication Status 3-38
Authentication Type 3-38
Port # 3-38
System Authentication 3-38
System Resources Information screen 5-30
screen fields
CPU Type 5-31
Current Switch Utilization 5-31
DRAM Installed 5-31
FLASH Memory Installed 5-31
NVRAM Installed 5-31
Peak Switch Utilization 5-31
Reset Peak Switch Utilization 5-31

Index-11

T
Tag 13-5
Tag Header 13-5
Tagged frame 13-5, 13-10
Telnet connections 2-4
TFTP Gateway IP Addr 5-35
TFTP gateway IP addr 5-5
Traffic Class Configuration screen 9-10
screen fields
Priority 9-11
SAVE 9-11
SAVE TO ALL PORTS 9-11
Traffic Class 9-11
Traffic Class Information screen 9-7
screen fields
Port 9-9
Priority 9-9
Traffic Class to Port Priority
assignment of 9-11
Transmit Queues Configuration screen 9-12
screen fields
Current Queueing Mode 9-14
Number of Queues 9-14
Port 9-14
SET ALL PORTS 9-14
Weights Q0, Q1, Q2, Q3 9-14
Trap table configuration 4-16, 5-24
Traps
enable 4-15, 5-24

U
Uninterruptible Power Supply
COM configuration for 2-4
connection of 2-4
Untagged frame 13-5, 13-10

V
VLAN
classifying frames to a 13-8
components 13-7
configuration process of 13-8

Index-12

customizing the forwarding list 13-8
default VLAN 13-6
defining a 13-8
definition 13-2 to 13-4
Local Management for 7-3
terms 13-5
types 13-4
VLAN Classification Configuration screen 8-21
screen fields
ADD 8-23
Classification 8-23
Classification (top of screen) 8-23
DEL ALL/DEL MARKED 8-24
Description (top of screen) 8-23
VID 8-23
VID (top of screen) 8-23
VLAN Configuration
deleting 8-9
preparation for 13-15
VLAN ID 13-5
VLAN Local Management 8-2
summary of 13-14
VLAN Port Configuration screen 8-17
screen fields
Acceptable Frame Types 8-19
Global GVRP State 8-19
GVRP Status 8-20
Ingress Filtering 8-20
Policy PVID Override 8-19
Port 8-19
Port Mode 8-19
PVID 8-19
VLAN Ports
configuration of 8-21
VLAN Redirect Configuration screen 6-20
screen fields
Destination Port 6-22
Destination Port [n] 6-22
Frame Format (Read-Only) 6-22
Frame Format (Selectable) 6-22
Redirect Errors 6-22
redirect errors 6-22
Source VLAN (Read-Only) 6-22

Source VLAN [n] 6-22
status 6-22
VLAN Redirect Configuration screen
(chassis) 4-23
screen fields
Dest Module [n] (Selectable) 4-25
Dest Port [n] (Selectable) 4-25
Destination Module (Read-Only) 4-25
Destination Port (Read-Only) 4-25
Frame Format (Read-Only) 4-25
Frame Format (Selectable) 4-25
Redirect Errors 4-25
Source Module (Read-Only) 4-24
Source VLAN ID 4-24
Src Module [n] (Selectable) 4-25
Src VLAN ID [n] (Selectable) 4-25
Status (Toggle) 4-25
VLAN Spanning Tree
configuring a 7-9
VLAN Spanning Tree Ports
configuration of 7-12
viewing status of 7-12
VLAN Switch Operation
description of 13-9

W
Weighted Queueing Mode
setting of 9-15

Index-13



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Modify Date                     : 2002:11:15 09:30:00-05:00
Create Date                     : 2002:11:15 09:00:49Z
Page Count                      : 430
Creation Date                   : 2002:11:15 09:00:49Z
Mod Date                        : 2002:11:15 09:30:00-05:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : bedard
Metadata Date                   : 2002:11:15 09:30:00-05:00
Creator                         : bedard
Title                           : CH1.book
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools